Mechanical engineering and materials Books

Book SynopsisBest practices for picking up the pieces when projects fail There are plenty of books available offering best practices that help you keep your projects on track, but offer guidance on what to do when the worst has already happened.Table of Contents1 Understanding Success and Failure 1 1.0 Introduction 1 1.1 Success: Historical Perspective 2 1.2 Early Modifications to Triple Constraints 3 1.3 Primary and Secondary CONSTRAINTS 4 1.4 Prioritization of Constraints 6 1.5 From Triple Constraints to Competing Constraints 6 1.6 Future Definitions of Project Success 8 1.7 Different Definitions of Project Success 11 1.8 Understanding Project Failure 12 1.9 Degrees of Project Failure 13 1.10 Other Categories of Project Failure 16 1.11 Summary of Lessons Learned 17 2 Causes of Project Failure 19 2.0 Introduction 19 2.1 Facts about Project Failure 19 2.2 Causes of Project Failure 20 2.3 Schedule Failure 22 2.4 Failures due to Unknown Technology 23 2.5 Project Size and Success/Failure Risk 24 2.6 Failure due to Improper Critical Failure Factors 25 2.7 Failure to Establish Tracking Metrics 26 2.8 Failing to Recognize Early Warning Signs 26 2.9 Improper Selection of Critical Team Members 27 2.10 Uncertain Rewards 29 2.11 Estimating Failures 31 2.12 Staffing Failures 32 2.13 Planning Failures 34 2.14 Risk Management Failures 36 2.15 Management Mistakes 37 2.16 Lacking Sufficient Tools 38 2.17 Failure of Success 39 2.18 Motivation to Fail 41 2.19 Tradeoff Failures 42 2.20 Summary of Lessons Learned 43 3 Business Case Failure 45 3.0 Introduction 45 3.1 Changing Stakeholders 45 3.2 Revalidation of Assumptions 46 3.3 Managing Innovation 47 3.4 Examples of Changing Business Cases 48 3.5 PROLOGUE TO THE Iridium Case Study 52 3.6 Rise, Fall and Resurrection of Iridium 52 Naming the Project “Iridium” 55 Obtaining Executive Support 55 Launching the Venture 56 Iridium System 58 Terrestial and Space-Based Network 58 Project Initiation: Developing Business Case 59 “Hidden” Business Case 61 Risk Management 61 Collective Belief 63 Iridium’s Infancy Years 64 Debt Financing 67 M-Star Project 68 A New CEO 69 Project Management at Motorola (Iridium) 69 Satellite Launches 70 Initial Public Offering (IPO) 71 Signing Up Customers 71 Iridium’s Rapid Ascent 72 Iridium’s Rapid Descent 74 Iridium “Flu” 78 Definition of Failure (October 1999) 79 3.7 Summary of Lessons Learned 84 4 Sponsorship/Governance Failures 87 4.0 Introduction 87 4.1 Defining Project Governance 88 4.2 Project versus Corporate Governance 88 4.3 Roles, Responsibilities and Decision-Making Authority 90 4.4 Governance Frameworks 91 4.5 Governance Failures 93 4.6 Why Projects Are Hard to Kill 94 4.7 Collective Belief 96 4.8 Exit Champion 97 4.9 When to Give Up 98 4.10 Prologue to the Denver International Airport Case Study 101 4.11 Denver International Airport 101 Background 101 Airports and Airline Deregulation 102 Does Denver Need a New Airport? 103 Enplaned Passenger Market 108 Land Selection 109 Front Range Airport 109 Airport Design 110 Project Management 112 Baggage-Handling System 114 Early Risk Analysis 115 March 1991 115 April 1991 116 May 1991 116 August 1991 117 November 1991 117 December 1991 118 January 1992 118 June 1992 118 September 1992 119 October 1992 119 March 1993 119 August 1993 120 September 1993 120 October 1993 121 January 1994 121 February 1994 121 March 1994 121 April 1994 122 May 1994 122 June 1994 123 July 1994 124 August 1994 124 September 1994 127 October 1994 128 November 1994 128 December 1994 130 Airline Costs per Enplaned Passenger 131 February 28, 1995 132 Appendix A 133 Introduction 133 Agreement between United and the City 134 Appendix B Jokes about the Abbreviation DIA 138 4.12 Denver International Airport Baggage- Handling System: Illustration of Ineffective Decision Making 142 Synopsis 142 Background 142 System at a Glance 142 Chronology of Events 143 Basic Mode of Failure 145 Key Decisions That Led to Disaster 145 Other Failure Points 151 Conclusion 152 4.13 Summary of Lessons Learned 153 5 Project Politics and Failure 155 5.0 Introduction 155 5.1 Political Risks 156 5.2 R easons for Playing Politics 156 5.3 Situations Where Political Games Will Occur 157 5.4 Governance Committee 158 5.5 Friends and Foes 159 5.6 A ttack or Retreat 159 5.7 N eed for Effective Communications 161 5.8 Power and Influence 162 5.9 Managing Project Politics 163 5.10 Prologue to the Space Shuttle Challenger Disaster Case Study 163 5.11 Space Shuttle Challenger Disaster 164 Background to Space Transportation System 166 NASA Succumbs to Politics and Pressure 167 Solid Rocket Boosters 169 Blowholes 171 O-Ring Erosion 173 Joint Rotation 173 O-Ring Resilience 174 External Tank 175 Spare Parts Problem 175 Risk Identification Procedures 175 Teleconferencing 176 Paperwork Constraints 176 Politics and O-Rings 178 Issuing Waivers 178 Launch Liftoff Sequence Profile: Possible Aborts 180 O-Ring Problem 184 Pressure, Paperwork and Waivers 189 Mission 51-L 191 Second Teleconference 194 Ice Problem 199 The Accident 202 NASA and Media 205 Findings of Commission 205 Chain-of-Command Communication Failure 209 Epilogue 210 Potential Cover-Up 211 Senate Hearing 213 5.12 Summary of Lessons Learned 214 6 Software Failures 217 6.0 Introduction 217 6.1 IT’s Biggest Failures 217 IBM’s Stretch Project 217 Knight-Ridder’s Viewtron Service 218 DMV Projects—California and Washington 218 Apple’s Copland Operating System 219 Sainsbury’s Warehouse Automation 220 Canada’s Gun Registration System 220 Three Current Projects in Danger 221 6.2 Software Bugs 222 6.3 Causes of Failure in Software Projects 224 6.4 Large-Scale IT Failure 225 Reader ROI 225 Out with the Old 227 Seeds of Failure 228 Early Warnings 230 Call for Help 232 6.5 W orst Possible Failure: FoxMeyer Drugs 234 Case Study: FoxMeyer Drugs’ Bankruptcy: Was It a Failure of ERP? 235 6.6 L ondon Heathrow Terminal 239 History 240 Construction 240 Main Terminal Building 241 Satellite Terminal Buildings 241 New Heathrow Control Tower 242 Opening Day 242 6.7 Summary of Lessons Learned 243 7 Safety Considerations 245 7.0 Importance of Safety 245 7.1 Boeing 787 Dreamliner Battery Problems 245 7.2 Airbus A380 Problems 250 Configurations 251 Brief History 251 7.3 Summary of Lessons Learned 255 8 Scope Creep 257 8.0 Understanding Scope Creep 257 8.1 Creeping Failure 258 8.2 Defining Scope 259 8.3 Scope Creep Dependencies 261 8.4 C auses of Scope Creep 261 8.5 N eed for Business Knowledge 263 8.6 W ays to Minimize Scope Creep 263 8.7 Sydney Opera House 265 Performance Venues and Facilities 266 Construction History 267 8.8 Summary of Lessons Learned 273 9 Project Health Checks 275 9.0 Need for Project Health Checks 275 9.1 Understanding Project Health Checks 276 9.2 Who Performs Health Checks? 278 9.3 Health Check Life-Cycle Phases 278 9.4 Project Management Failure Warning Signs 279 “Instant Amnesia” and “Da Nial Ain’t In Egypt” 280 Project Cost 280 The Lone Ranger Rides Again! 281 No Sale! 281 Arrogance Rules! 282 2 + 2 = 17! 282 Mao Didn’t Have the Only “Long March” 283 What Risk? There’s No Risk Here! 283 Where’s Your Project Plan? 284 I’ll Take a Booth without a Cell Phone! 284 Don’t Bother Me with Details! 284 What Layoffs? 285 The Out-of-Towner Speaks: Distance Means Credibility 285 Disclaimer 286 9.5 Summary of Lessons Learned 286 10 Techniques for Recovering Failing Projects 289 10.0 Understanding Troubled Projects 289 10.1 Root Causes of Failure 290 10.2 Definition Phase 292 10.3 Early Warning Signs of Trouble 292 10.4 Selecting Recovery Project Manager (RPM) 294 10.5 Recovery Life-Cycle Phases 295 10.6 Understanding Phase 295 10.7 Audit Phase 296 10.8 Tradeoff Phase 298 10.9 Negotiation Phase 300 10.10 Restart Phase 300 10.11 E xecution Phase 301 10.12 Project Recovery versus Project Rescue 302 10.13 R ecovery Decision 302 10.14 Summary of Lessons Learned 304 Index 309

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis comprehensive book will provide both fundamental and applied aspects of adhesion pertaining to microelectronics in a single and easily accessible source.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgements xvi Part 1: Adhesion: Fundamentals and Measurement 1 Study of Molecular Bonding or Adhesion by Inelastic Electron Tunneling Spectroscopy, with Special Reference to Microelectronics 3 Robert R. Mallik 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Principles of IETS 6 1.3 Application of IETS in Microelectronics 13 1.4 Prospects 24 1.5 Summary 26 References 27 2 Adhesion Measurement of Thin Films and Coatings: Relevance to Microelectronics 33 Wei-Sheng Lei and Ajay Kumar 2.1 Introduction 33 2.2 Mechanical Methods 36 2.3 Laser Based Techniques 51 2.4 Summary and Remarks 56 References 59 Part 2: Ways to Promote/Enhance Adhesion 3 Tailoring of Interface/Interphase to Promote Metal-Polymer Adhesion 67 Jörg Friedrich 3.1 Introduction 67 3.2 New Concepts for Ideal Design of Metal-Polymer Interfaces with Covalently Bonded Flexible Spacer Molecules 87 3.3 Situation at Al Oxide/Hydroxide Surfaces Using Aluminium as Substrate 92 3.4. Adhesion Promotion by Non-specific Functionalization of Polyolefin Surfaces 94 3.5 Methods for Producing Monosort Functional Groups at Polyolefin Surfaces 103 3.6 Reactions and Bond Formation at the Interface 110 3.7 Grafting of Spacer Molecules at Polyolefin Surfaces 112 3.8 Summary and Conclusions 121 Acknowledgement 123 References 123 4 Atmospheric and Vacuum Plasma Treatments of Polymer Surfaces for Enhanced Adhesion in Microelectronics Packaging 137 Hang Yu, Yiyuan Zhang, Anita Wong, Igor M. De Rosa, Han S. Chueh, Misha Grigoriev, Thomas S. Williams, Tommy Hsu, and Robert F. Hicks 4.1 Introduction 137 4.2 Plasma Fundamentals 139 4.3 Survey of Vacuum Plasma Treatment of Polymers 146 4.4 Survey of Atmospheric Pressure Plasma Treatment of Polymers 151 4.5 Atmospheric Pressure Plasma Activation of Polymer Materials Relevant to Microelectronics 153 4.6 Vacuum Versus Atmospheric Plasmas for Use in Semiconductor Packaging 165 References 166 5 Isotropic Conductive Adhesive Interconnect Technology in Electronics Packaging Applications 173 James E. Morris and Liang Wang 5.1 Introduction 173 5.2 ICA Technology 174 5.3 Technology Reviews 176 5.4 Electrical Properties 176 5.5 Mechanical Properties 180 5.6 Thermal Properties 181 5.7 Metallic Filler 181 5.8 Polymer Materials 184 5.9 Reliability 186 5.10 Dispensation 188 5.11 Environmental Properties 189 5.12 Other Results 189 5.13 Summary 190 5.14 Prospects 190 References 191 Part 3: Reliability and Failure Mechanisms 6 Role of Adhesion Phenomenon in the Reliability of Electronic Packaging 213 Puligandla Viswanadham 6.1 Introduction 214 6.2 Hierarchy of Electronic Packaging. 216 6.3 Substrates, Carriers, and Laminates 217 6.4 Flexible Laminates 236 6.5 First Level Packaging /Semiconductor Packaging 237 6.6 Second Level Packaging 247 6.7 Reliability Enhancements 256 6.8 Thermal Management 260 6.9 Summary 261 Acknowledgements 262 References 252 Suggested Reading 262 References 262 7 Delamination and Reliability Issues in Packaged Devices 267 Wei-Sheng Lei and Ajay Kumar 7.1 Introduction 267 7.2 Basic Aspects of Delamination Failure 269 7.3 Evaluation of Delamination Initiation in Electronic Packages 280 7.4 Evaluation of Delamination Propagation in Electronic Packages 290 7.5 Summary 304 References 305 8 Investigation of the Mechanisms of Adhesion and Failure in Microelectronic Packages 313 Tanweer Ahsan and Andrew Schoenberg 8.1 Introduction 313 8.2 Thermal Methods of Characterizatio 314 8.3 Stresses in Encapsulated Devices 320 8.4 More on Adhesion of Molding Compounds - Surface Chemical and Morphological Aspects 332 8.5 Summary 337 References 338

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe book provides a comprehensive and easily accessible reference source covering all important aspects of particle adhesion and removal. The core objective is to cover both fundamental and applied aspects of particle adhesion and removal with emphasis on recent developments.Table of ContentsPreface xv Part 1: Particle Adhesion: Fundamentals 1 1 Fundamental Forces in Particle Adhesion 3 Stephen Beaudoin, Priyanka Jaiswal, Aaron Harrison, Jennifer Laster, Kathryn Smith, Melissa Sweat, and Myles Thomas 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Various Forces in Particle Adhesion 4 1.3 Summary 69 References 70 2 Mechanics of Particle Adhesion and Removal 81 Goodarz Ahmadi 2.1 Introduction 81 2.2 Models 83 2.3 Simulations Results 96 2.4 Summary and Conclusions 99 Acknowledgements 100 References 100 3 Microscopic Particle Contact Adhesion Models and Macroscopic Behavior of Surface Modified Particles 105 Katja Mader-Arndt, Zinaida Kutelova, and Jürgen Tomas 3.1 Introduction 105 3.2 Constitutive Contact Models 107 3.3 Macroscopic Powder Behavior – Continuum Mechanics Approach 121 3.4 Surface Modification to Alter the Adhesion Properties 124 3.5 Experimental Measurements of the Adhesion Forces 130 3.6 Summary and Conclusions 146 Acknowledgements 147 List of Symbols 147 References 148 4 Characterization of Single Particle Adhesion: A Review of Recent Progress 157 Armin Saeedi Vahdat and Cetin Cetinkaya 4.1 Introduction 157 4.2 Background 159 4.3 Recent Developments 167 4.4 Conclusions and Remarks 193 Acknowledgments 194 List of Symbols 194 References 196 Part 2: Particle Removal Techniques 201 5 High Intensity Ultrasonic Cleaning for Particle Removal 203 Sami B. Awad and Nadia F. Awad 5.1 Introduction 204 5.2 Ultrasound and Ultrasonics 204 5.3 Cavitation Phenomenon 207 5.4 Generation of Ultrasound - Transducers 211 5.5 Ultrasonic Generators 217 5.6 Principles of Ultrasonic Cleaning for Particle Removal 219 5.7 Determination of Residual Particles on Surfaces 223 5.8 Ultrasonic Aqueous Cleaning Equipment and Process 225 5.9 Precision Cleaning 228 5.10 Contaminants 228 5.11 Ultrasonic Cavitation Forces and Surface Cleaning 230 5.12 Cleaning Chemistry 232 5.13 Mechanism of Cleaning 236 5.14 Cavitation Erosion 238 5.15 Summary 239 References 239 6 Megasonic Cleaning for Particle Removal 243 Manish Keswani, Rajesh Balachandran, and Pierre Deymier 6.1 Introduction 243 6.2 Principles of Megasonic Cleaning 247 6.3 Particle Removal Mechanisms During Megasonic Cleaning 259 6.4 Types of Megasonic Systems 262 6.5 Particle Removal and Feature Damage in Megasonic Cleaning 264 6.6 Summary 274 References 274 7 High Speed Air Jet Removal of Particles from Solid Surfaces 281 Kuniaki Gotoh 7.1 Introduction 281 7.2 Fundamental Characteristics of the Air Jet 282 7.3 Fundamentals of Air Jet Particle Removal 286 7.4 New Methods Using Air Jet 300 7.5 Summary and Prospect 307 List of Symbols 308 References 309 8 Droplet Spray Technique for Particle Removal 313 James T. Snow, Masanobu Sato, and Takayoshi Tanaka 8.1 Introduction 313 8.2 Droplet Impact Phenomena 314 8.3 Cleaning Process Window 318 8.4 Droplet Spray Technique for Semiconductor Wafer Cleaning 324 8.5 Summary 331 References 331 9. Laser-Induced High-Pressure Micro-Spray Process for Nanoscale Particle Removal 337 Daehwan Ahn, Changho Seo, and Dongsik Kim 9.1 Introduction 337 9.2 Concept of Droplet Opto-Hydrodynamic Cleaning (DOC) 340 9.3 Micro-Spray Generation by LIB 343 9.4 Mechanisms of Particle Removal by Laser-Induced Spray Jet 344 9.5 Generation of Micro-Spray Jet 345 9.6 Nanoscale Particle Removal 352 9.7 Summary 360 References 360 10 Wiper-Based Cleaning of Particles from Surfaces 365 Brad Lyon and Jay Postlewaite 10.1 Introduction 366 10.2 Basic Mechanism of Wiping for Cleaning of Particles and Other Contaminants 371 10.3 Various Types of Wipers 379 10.4 Proper Ways to Carry Out Wiping or How to Use Wipers Properly 390 10.5 Characterization of Wipers 396 10.6 Results Obtained Using Wiping 398 10.7 Future Directions 405 10.8 Summary 406 References 408 11 Application of Strippable Coatings for Removal of Particulate Contaminants 411 Rajiv Kohli 11.1 Introduction 411 11.2 Coating Description 412 11.3 Types of Strippable Coatings 413 11.4 Issues with Strippable Coatings 426 11.5 Precision Cleaning Applications 427 11.6 Summary 443 Disclaimer 443 References 443 12 Cryoaerosol Cleaning of Particles from Surfaces 453 Souvik Banerjee 12.1 Introduction 453 12.2 History of Cryoaerosol Cleaning 455 12.3 Thermodynamics of Cryoaerosol Processes 456 12.4 Cleaning Mechanism 461 12.5 Factors Affecting Cleaning Performance 462 12.6 Results Obtained by Cryoaerosol Cleaning 469 12.7 Summary and Prospects 473 References 474 13 Supercritical Carbon Dioxide Cleaning: Relevance to Particle Removal 477 Rajiv Kohli 13.1 Introduction 477 13.2 Surface Cleanliness Levels 478 13.3 Dense Phase Fluids 479 13.4 Principles of Supercritical CO2 Cleaning 489 13.5 Advantages and Disadvantages of Supercritical CO2 Cleaning 493 13.6 Applications 496 13.7 Summary and Conclusions 502 Acknowledgement 503 Disclaimer 503 References 503 14 The Use of Surfactants to Enhance Particle Removal from Surfaces 519 Brian Grady 14.1 Introduction 519 14.2 Solid-Solid Interactions 520 14.3 Introduction to Surfactants 524 14.4 Surfactant Adsorption at Solid Surfaces 529 14.5 Surfactants and Particulate Removal 535 14.6 Prospects 539 14.7 Summary 540 Acknowledgements 540 References 540 Index 543

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis compact handbook describes all the important methods of synthesis employed today for synthesizing inorganic materials.Table of ContentsAuthor Biographies vii Preface ix 1 Introduction 1 2 Common Reactions Employed in Synthesis 7 2.1 Soft-Chemistry Routes, 12 3 Ceramic Methods 17 4 Decomposition of Precursor Compounds 23 5 Combustion Synthesis 33 6 Arc and Skull Methods 37 7 Reactions at High Pressures 41 8 Mechanochemical and Sonochemical Methods 47 8.1 Mechanochemistry, 47 8.2 Sonochemistry, 50 9 Use of Microwaves 53 10 Soft Chemistry Routes 57 10.1 Topochemical Reactions, 57 10.2 Intercalation Chemistry, 64 10.3 Ion Exchange Reactions, 73 10.4 Use of Fluxes, 78 10.5 Sol–Gel Synthesis, 81 10.6 Electrochemical Methods, 86 10.7 Hydrothermal, Solvothermal and Ionothermal Synthesis, 90 11 Nebulized Spray Pyrolysis 97 12 Chemical Vapour Deposition and Atomic Layer Deposition 103 13 Nanomaterials 107 13.1 Nanoparticles, 107 13.2 Core–Shell Nanocrystals, 116 13.3 Nanowires, 119 13.4 Inorganic Nanotubes, 133 13.5 Graphene-like Structures of Layered Inorganic Materials, 137 14 Materials 151 14.1 Metal Borides, Carbides and Nitrides, 151 14.2 Metal Chalcogenides, 157 14.3 Metal Halides, 162 14.4 Metal Silicides and Phosphides, 167 14.5 Intergrowth Structures and Misfit Compounds, 171 14.5.1 Intergrowth structures, 171 14.5.2 Misfit Compounds, 177 14.6 Intermetallic Compounds, 178 14.7 Superconducting Compounds, 182 14.8 Porous Materials, 191 14.8.1 Mesoporous Silica Materials, 191 14.8.2 Aluminophosphates, 194 14.8.3 Metal Organic Frameworks (MOFs), 196 Index 201

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides a highly practical treatment of Glancing Angle Deposition (GLAD), a thin film fabrication technology optimized to produce precise nanostructures from a wide range of materials.Table of ContentsSeries Preface xi Preface xiii 1 Introduction: Glancing Angle Deposition Technology 1 1.1 Nanoscale engineering and glancing angle deposition 1 1.2 GLAD-vantages 4 1.2.1 Nanoscale morphology control 4 1.2.2 Broad material compatibility 6 1.2.3 Novel thin-film material properties 10 1.2.4 Compatibility with standard microfabrication processes 10 1.2.5 Scalable fabrication method 11 1.3 The roots of glancing angle deposition: oblique deposition 12 1.4 The importance of experimental calibration 13 1.5 Computer simulations of glancing angle deposition growth 15 1.6 Major application areas in glancing angle deposition technology 17 1.6.1 Energy and catalysis 17 1.6.2 Sensing applications 19 1.6.3 Optics 20 1.7 Summary and outline of the book 21 2 Engineering Film Microstructure with Glancing Angle Deposition 31 2.1 Introduction 31 2.2 Basics of conventional film growth 32 2.2.1 Physical vapour deposition 32 2.2.2 Nucleation and coalescence 33 2.2.3 Column microstructure 35 2.3 Glancing angle deposition technology: microstructural control via substrate motion 37 2.4 Engineering film morphology with α 41 2.4.1 Controlling microstructure and porosity 41 2.4.2 Directional column growth: column tilt β 44 2.5 Engineering film morphology: column steering via φ rotation 47 2.5.1 Controlling column architecture with φ: helical columns 47 2.5.2 Controlling microstructure with rotation speed: vertical columns 48 2.5.3 Continuous versus discrete substrate rotation 49 2.6 Growth characteristics of glancing angle deposition technology films 53 2.6.1 Evolutionary column growth 53 2.6.2 Column broadening 56 2.6.3 Column bifurcation 57 2.6.4 Anisotropic shadowing and column fanning 59 2.7 Advanced column steering algorithms 60 2.7.1 β variations in zigzag microstructures 61 2.7.2 Spin–pause/two-phase substrate rotation: decoupling β and film density 63 2.7.3 Phisweep motion: competition-resilient structure growth 67 2.8 Additional control over film growth and structure 72 2.8.1 High-temperature glancing angle deposition growth 72 2.8.2 Multimaterial structures: co-deposition processes 75 3 Creating High-Uniformity Nanostructure Arrays 81 3.1 Introduction 81 3.2 Seed layer design 82 3.2.1 Seed spacing and seed height 84 3.2.2 Seed lattice geometry 86 3.2.3 Seed size 87 3.2.4 Planar fill fraction 89 3.2.5 Seed shape 90 3.2.6 Two-dimensional shadow coverage 91 3.2.7 Seed material 94 3.2.8 Design parameter summary 95 3.3 Seed fabrication 95 3.3.1 Conventional techniques 96 3.3.2 Unconventional techniques 97 3.4 Advanced control of local shadowing environment 99 3.4.1 Preventing bifurcation: slow-corner motion 99 3.4.2 Preventing broadening: phisweep and substrate swing 102 4 Properties and Characterization Methods 113 4.1 Introduction 113 4.2 Structural analysis with electron microscopy 113 4.2.1 Practical aspects 114 4.2.2 Scanning electron microscope image analysis 117 4.2.3 Three-dimensional column imaging: tomographic sectioning 122 4.2.4 Characterizing internal column structure with transmission electron microscope imaging 124 4.3 Structural properties of glancing angle deposition films 126 4.3.1 Film surface roughness and evolution 126 4.3.2 Column broadening 128 4.3.3 Intercolumn spacing and column density 133 4.4 Film density 134 4.4.1 Controlling density with α: theoretical models 135 4.4.2 Experimental measurement and control of film density 136 4.5 Porosimetry and surface area determination 140 4.5.1 Surface area enhancement in glancing angle deposition films 141 4.5.2 The pore structure of glancing angle deposition films 144 4.6 Crystallographic texture and evolution 146 4.7 Electrical properties 148 4.7.1 Resistivity in microstructured glancing angle deposition films 148 4.7.2 Anisotropic resistivity 151 4.7.3 Modelling glancing angle deposition film resistivity 153 4.7.4 Individual nanocolumn properties 154 4.8 Mechanical properties 155 4.8.1 α effects on film stress 155 4.8.2 Hardness properties 158 4.8.3 Elastic behaviour of glancing angle deposition films 159 4.8.4 Additional mechanical properties 163 5 Glancing Angle Deposition Optical Films 173 5.1 Introduction 173 5.2 The optics of structured glancing angle deposition films 173 5.2.1 Optical anisotropy in columnar glancing angle deposition films 173 5.2.2 Modelling glancing angle deposition films with effective medium theory 176 5.2.3 The column and void material refractive indices 179 5.2.4 Modelling form birefringence via the depolarization factor 180 5.2.5 Dealing with microstructural uncertainty: bounds on the effective dielectric function 182 5.3 Calibrating optical properties of glancing angle deposition films 182 5.3.1 Basic measurements: isotropic approximations 183 5.3.2 Calibrating anisotropy with polarization-sensitive measurements 185 5.3.3 In-depth characterization with generalized techniques 186 5.3.4 Additional factors 186 5.4 Controlling glancing angle deposition film optical properties 187 5.4.1 Basic refractive index engineering with α 187 5.4.2 Controlling planar birefringence with α 188 5.4.3 Optimizing birefringence with serial bideposition 189 5.4.4 Modulating birefringence with complex φ motions 192 5.4.5 Controlling n with advanced glancing angle deposition motions 195 5.5 Graded-index coatings: design and fabrication 195 5.5.1 General design method for glancing angle deposition graded-index coatings 196 5.5.2 Designing φ motions for high-accuracy graded-index coatings 197 5.5.3 Specific examples 199 5.5.4 Antireflection coatings 199 5.5.5 Rugate interference filters 201 5.5.6 Avoiding high- α growth instabilities in graded-index films 205 5.6 Designing helical structures for circular polarization optics 206 5.6.1 Optics of chiral glancing angle deposition media 206 5.6.2 Engineering basic helical structures 208 5.6.3 Polygonal helical structures 210 5.6.4 Optimization of circular bragg phenomena with serial bideposition 212 5.6.5 Microcavity design in helical structures 213 5.6.6 Fabricating graded-birefringence thin-film designs 214 5.7 Practical information and issues 216 5.7.1 Post-deposition tuning 216 5.7.2 Environmental sensitivity 217 5.7.3 Optical scattering 217 6 Post-Deposition Processing and Device Integration 227 6.1 Introduction 227 6.2 Post-deposition structural control 227 6.2.1 Annealing 227 6.2.2 Chemical composition control 231 6.2.3 Microstructural control via chemical etching 231 6.2.4 Ion-milling structural modification 233 6.2.5 Column surface modifications 235 6.3 Deposition onto nonplanar geometries 236 6.4 Photolithographic patterning of glancing angle deposition thin films 237 6.5 Encapsulation and replanarization of glancing angle deposition films 240 6.5.1 Encapsulation layer substrate motions 240 6.5.2 Film stress in encapsulation layers 242 6.6 Integrating electrical contacts with glancing angle deposition microstructures 244 6.6.1 Planar electrode configurations 244 6.6.2 Parallel-plate electrode configurations 245 6.7 Films in liquid environments 247 6.8 Using glancing angle deposition microstructures as replication templates 251 6.8.1 Single- and double-template fabrication processes 251 6.8.2 Nanotube fabrication via template fabrication 252 7 Glancing Angle Deposition Systems and Hardware 261 7.1 Introduction 261 7.2 Vacuum conditions 261 7.2.1 Vacuum requirements for glancing angle deposition systems 261 7.2.2 Physical vapour deposition process gases and higher pressure deposition 263 7.3 Thickness calibration and deposition rate monitoring 265 7.3.1 Source directionality and tooling factor 265 7.3.2 Thickness calibration at nonzero α: deposition ratios 267 7.3.3 Extended source: effect on collimation 269 7.4 Uniformity calculations for glancing angle deposition processes 270 7.4.1 Calculating geometry variation over a wafer 270 7.4.2 Mapping out thickness variation 272 7.4.3 Calculating parameter variations for moving substrates 274 7.4.4 Calculating thickness uniformity for moving substrates 276 7.4.5 Calculating column orientation uniformity 278 7.5 Substrate motion hardware 281 7.5.1 α motion accuracy and precision 281 7.5.2 φ motion requirements 283 7.5.3 Additional factors to consider 284 7.5.4 Substrate heating and cooling approaches 285 7.6 Scalability to manufacturing 286 References 286 A Selected Patents 289 Index 297

Read more less

Book SynopsisIn control theory, sliding mode control (SMC) is a nonlinear control method that alters the dynamics of a nonlinear system by application of a discontinuous control signal that forces the system to slide along a cross-section of the system''s normal behaviour. In recent years, SMC has been successfully applied to a wide variety of practical engineering systems including robot manipulators, aircraft, underwater vehicles, spacecraft, flexible space structures, electrical motors, power systems, and automotive engines. Sliding Mode Control of Uncertain Parameter-Switching Hybrid Systems addresses the increasing demand for developing SMC technologies and comprehensively presents the new, state-of-the-art sliding mode control methodologies for uncertain parameter-switching hybrid systems. It establishes a unified framework for SMC of Markovian jump singular systems and proposes new SMC methodologies based on the analysis results. A series of problems are solved with new approaches Table of ContentsPreface v Acknowledgements vii List of Notations xi List of Abbreviations xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Sliding Mode Control 1 1.1.1 Fundamental Theory of SMC 1 1.1.2 Overview of SMC Methodologies 12 1.2 Uncertain Parameter-Switching Hybrid Systems 15 1.2.1 Analysis and Synthesis of Switched Hybrid Systems 15 1.2.2 Analysis and Synthesis of Markovian Jump Linear Systems 23 1.3 Contribution of the Book 24 1.4 Outline of the Book 26 Part One SMC of Markovian Jump Singular Systems 33 2 State Estimation and SMC of Markovian Jump Singular Systems 35 2.1 Introduction 35 2.2 System Description and Preliminaries 36 2.3 Stochastic Stability Analysis 37 2.4 Main Results 39 2.4.1 Observer and SMC Law Design 40 2.4.2 Sliding Mode Dynamics Analysis 41 2.5 Illustrative Example 45 2.6 Conclusion 47 3 Optimal SMC of Markovian Jump Singular Systems with Time-Delay 49 3.1 Introduction 49 3.2 System Description and Preliminaries 50 3.3 Bounded L2 Gain Performance Analysis 51 3.4 Main Results 54 3.4.1 Sliding Mode Dynamics Analysis 54 3.4.2 SMC Law Design 58 3.5 Illustrative Example 59 3.6 Conclusion 62 4 SMC of Markovian Jump Singular Systems with Stochastic Perturbation 63 4.1 Introduction 63 4.2 System Description and Preliminaries 64 4.3 Integral SMC 65 4.3.1 Sliding Mode Dynamics Analysis 65 4.3.2 SMC Law Design 67 4.4 Optimal H∞ Integral SMC 69 4.4.1 Performance Analysis and SMC Law Design 69 4.4.2 Computational Algorithm 74 4.5 Illustrative Example 75 4.6 Conclusion 80 Part Two SMC of Switched State-Delayed Hybrid Systems 81 5 Stability and Stabilization of Switched State-Delayed Hybrid Systems 83 5.1 Introduction 83 5.2 Continuous-Time Systems 84 5.2.1 System Description 84 5.2.2 Main Results 85 5.2.3 Illustrative Example 89 5.3 Discrete-Time Systems 90 5.3.1 System Description 90 5.3.2 Main Results 91 5.3.3 Illustrative Example 97 5.4 Conclusion 100 6 Optimal DOF Control of Switched State-Delayed Hybrid Systems 101 6.1 Introduction 101 6.2 Optimal L2-L∞ DOF Controller Design 102 6.2.1 System Description and Preliminaries 102 6.2.2 Main Results 103 6.2.3 Illustrative Example 113 6.3 Guaranteed Cost DOF Controller Design 117 6.3.1 System Description and Preliminaries 117 6.3.2 Main Results 118 6.3.3 Illustrative Example 127 6.4 Conclusion 131 7 SMC of Switched State-Delayed Hybrid Systems: Continuous-Time Case 133 7.1 Introduction 133 7.2 System Description and Preliminaries 134 7.3 Main Results 134 7.3.1 Sliding Mode Dynamics Analysis 134 7.3.2 SMC Law Design 138 7.4 Illustrative Example 142 7.5 Conclusion 148 8 SMC of Switched State-Delayed Hybrid Systems: Discrete-Time Case 149 8.1 Introduction 149 8.2 System Description and Preliminaries 150 8.3 Main Results 151 8.3.1 Sliding Mode Dynamics Analysis 151 8.3.2 SMC Law Design 157 8.4 Illustrative Example 158 8.5 Conclusion 161 Part Three SMC of Switched Stochastic Hybrid Systems 163 9 Control of Switched Stochastic Hybrid Systems: Continuous-Time Case 165 9.1 Introduction 165 9.2 System Description and Preliminaries 166 9.3 Stability Analysis and Stabilization 168 9.4 H∞ Control 172 9.4.1 H∞ Performance Analysis 172 9.4.2 State Feedback Control 174 9.4.3 H∞ DOF Controller Design 175 9.5 Illustrative Example 178 9.6 Conclusion 183 10 Control of Switched Stochastic Hybrid Systems: Discrete-Time Case 185 10.1 Introduction 185 10.2 System Description and Preliminaries 185 10.3 Stability Analysis and Stabilization 187 10.4 H∞ Control 192 10.5 Illustrative Example 196 10.6 Conclusion 200 11 State Estimation and SMC of Switched Stochastic Hybrid Systems 201 11.1 Introduction 201 11.2 System Description and Preliminaries 201 11.3 Main Results 203 11.3.1 Sliding Mode Dynamics Analysis 203 11.3.2 SMC Law Design 204 11.4 Observer-Based SMC Design 205 11.5 Illustrative Example 209 11.6 Conclusion 215 12 SMC with Dissipativity of Switched Stochastic Hybrid Systems 217 12.1 Introduction 217 12.2 Problem Formulation and Preliminaries 218 12.2.1 System Description 218 12.2.2 Dissipativity 219 12.3 Dissipativity Analysis 220 12.4 Sliding Mode Control 224 12.4.1 Sliding Mode Dynamics 224 12.4.2 Sliding Mode Dynamics Analysis 226 12.4.3 SMC Law Design 228 12.5 Illustrative Example 229 12.6 Conclusion 233 References 235 Index 263

Read more less

Book SynopsisGreen Aviation is the first authoritative overview of both engineering and operational measures to mitigate the environmental impact of aviation. It addresses the current status of measures to reduce the environmental impact of air travel. The chapters cover such items as: Engineering and technology-related subjects (aerodynamics, engines, fuels, structures, etc.),Operations (air traffic management and infrastructure)Policy and regulatory aspects regarding atmospheric and noise pollution. With contributions from leading experts, this volume is intended to be a valuable addition, and useful resource, for aerospace manufacturers and suppliers, governmental and industrial aerospace research establishments, airline and aviation industries, university engineering and science departments, and industry analysts, consultants, and researchers.Table of ContentsContributors vii Foreword xi Preface xiii Part 1 Overview 1 1 Aviation and Climate Change – The Continuing Challenge 3 2 Global Atmospheric Chemistry and Impacts from Aviation 15 3 Aviation Emissions 25 4 Emissions and Other Impacts: Introduction 35 5 Avoiding the Predictable Surprise: Early Action Is the Key to Building a Climate-Resilient Aviation Network 39 Part 2 Aerodynamics and Airframe 51 6 Application of Drag Reduction Techniques to Transport Aircraft 53 7 Blended Wing Body Aircraft: A Historical Perspective 63 8 Fuel Burn Reduction Through Wing Morphing 73 Part 3 Combustion-Based Propulsion 81 9 Advances in Turbofan Engines: A US Perspective 83 10 A Rolls-Royce Perspective on Concepts and Technologies for Future Green Propulsion Systems 95 11 Geared TurbofanTM Engine: Driven by Innovation 105 12 Advanced Engine Designs and Concepts Beyond the Geared Turbofan 113 13 Progress in Open Rotor Research 127 Part 4 Alternative Propulsion 145 14 Energy Optimization for Solar-Powered Aircraft 147 15 Hydrogen-Powered Aircraft 165 16 Biofuels for Green Aviation 179 17 Hydrogen Fuel Cells for Auxiliary Power Units 193 18 Electric Drives for Propulsion System of Transport Aircraft 201 19 Lithium-Ion Batteries: Thermomechanics, Performance, and Design Optimization 221 Part 5 Aerodynamics and Aircraft Concepts 239 20 Damage Arresting Composites 241 21 Greener Helicopters 253 Part 6 Noise 265 22 Aircraft Noise: Alleviating Constraints to Airport Operations and Growth 267 23 Aircraft Noise Modeling 277 24 Carbon and Noise Trading in Aviation 287 Part 7 Systems 299 25 Onboard Energy Management 301 26 Impact of Airframe Systems on Green Airliner Operation 311 27 Modern Avionics and ATM Systems for Green Operations 323 Part 8 Operations 341 28 Integrated Assessment Modeling 343 29 Cost Analysis Approach in the Development of Advanced Technologies for Green Aviation Aircraft 355 30 Green Aircraft Operations 369 31 Impact of Airports on Local Air Quality 381 32 A Roadmap for Aviation Research in Australia 391 Part 9 Atmosphere and Climate 401 33 Atmospheric Modeling 403 34 In Plume Physics and Chemistry 413 35 Contrails and Contrail Cirrus 425 36 Radiative Forcing and Climate Change 437 37 Atmospheric Composition 447 38 Meteorology 459 Subject Index 477

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn introduction to the interdisciplinary subject of molecular electronics, revised and updated The revised second edition of Organic and Molecular Electronics offers a guide to the fabrication and application of a wide range of electronic devices based around organic materials and low-cost technologies. Since the publication of the first edition, organic electronics has greatly progressed, as evidenced by the myriad companies that have been established to explore the new possibilities. The text contains an introduction into the physics and chemistry of organic materials, and includes a discussion of the means to process the materials into a form (in most cases, a thin film) where they can be exploited in electronic and optoelectronic devices. The text covers the areas of application and potential application that range from chemical and biochemical sensors to plastic light emitting displays. The updated second edition reflects the recent progress in both Table of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgements xvii Symbols and Abbreviations xix About the Companion Website xxv 1 Scope of Organic and Molecular Electronics 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Organic Materials for Electronics 2 1.3 Molecular Electronics 4 1.4 The Biological World 12 1.5 Future Opportunities 13 1.6 Conclusions 15 Problems 15 References 16 Further Reading 17 2 Materials’ Foundations 19 2.1 Introduction 20 2.2 Electronic Structure 20 2.3 Chemical Bonding 27 2.4 Bonding in Organic Compounds 35 2.5 Crystalline and Non crystalline Materials 43 2.6 Polymers 53 2.7 Soft Matter: Emulsions, Foams, and Gels 58 2.8 Diffusion 59 Problems 60 Reference 60 Further Reading 60 3 Electrical Conductivity 63 3.1 Introduction 64 3.2 Classical Theory 64 3.3 Energy Bands in Solids 71 3.4 Organic Compounds 91 3.5 Low‐Frequency Conductivity 105 3.6 Conductivity at High Frequencies 113 Problems 118 References 118 Further Reading 120 4 Optical Phenomena 121 4.1 Introduction 121 4.2 Electromagnetic Radiation 122 4.3 Refractive Index 123 4.4 Interaction of EM Waves with Organic Molecules 127 4.5 Transmission and Reflection from Interfaces 140 4.6 Wave guiding 145 4.7 Surface Plasmons 146 4.8 Photonic Crystals 151 Problems 155 References 155 Further Reading 156 5 Electroactive Organic Compounds 157 5.1 Introduction 157 5.2 Selected Topics in Chemistry 158 5.3 Conductive Polymers 166 5.4 Charge‐Transfer Complexes 170 5.5 Graphene, Fullerenes, and Nanotubes 173 5.6 Piezoelectricity, Pyroelectricity, and Ferroelectricity 180 5.7 Magnetic Materials 185 Problems 194 References 194 Further Reading 196 6 Tools for Molecular Electronics 197 6.1 Introduction 197 6.2 Direct Imaging 198 6.3 X‐Ray Reflection 202 6.4 Neutron Reflection 206 6.5 Electron Diffraction 206 6.6 Infrared Spectroscopy 208 6.7 Surface Analytical Techniques 213 6.8 Scanning Probe Microscopies 214 6.9 Film Thickness Measurements 217 Problems 218 References 219 Further Reading 220 7 Thin Film Processing and Device Fabrication 221 7.1 Introduction 221 7.2 Established Deposition Methods 222 7.3 Molecular Architectures 239 7.4 Micro‐and Nanofabrication 253 Problems 260 References 260 Further Reading 263 8 Liquid Crystals and Devices 265 8.1 Introduction 265 8.2 Liquid Crystal Phases 266 8.3 Liquid Crystal Polymers 271 8.4 Display Devices 273 8.5 Ferroelectric Liquid Crystals 279 8.6 Polymer‐dispersed Liquid Crystals 281 8.7 Liquid Crystal Lenses 282 8.8 Other Application Areas 283 Problems 284 References 285 Further Reading 286 9 Plastic Electronics 287 9.1 Introduction 288 9.2 Organic Diodes 288 9.3 Metal–Insulator–Semiconductor Structures 292 9.4 Organic Field Effect Transistors 295 9.5 Organic Integrated Circuits 301 9.6 Transparent Conducting Films 303 9.7 Organic Light‐emitting Devices 304 9.8 Organic Photovoltaic Devices 321 9.9 Other Application Areas 328 Problems 331 References 332 Further Reading 336 10 Chemical Sensors and Physical Actuators 337 10.1 Introduction 337 10.2 Sensing Systems 338 10.3 Definitions 339 10.4 Chemical Sensors 341 10.5 Biological Olfaction 360 10.6 Electronic Noses 362 10.7 Physical Sensors and Actuators 363 10.8 Wearable Electronics 369 Problems 369 References 370 Further Reading 371 11 Molecular and Nanoscale Electronics 373 11.1 Introduction 374 11.2 Nano systems 374 11.3 Engineering Materials at the Molecular Level 376 11.4 Molecular Device Architectures 381 11.5 Molecular Rectification 385 11.6 Electronic Switching and Memory Phenomena 387 11.7 Single‐electron Devices 395 11.8 Optical and Chemical Switches 397 11.9 Nanomagnetics 402 11.10 Nanotube and Graphene Electronics 404 11.11 Molecular Actuation 407 11.12 Molecular Logic Circuits 410 11.13 Computing Architectures 412 11.14 Quantum Computing 414 11.15 Evolvable Electronics 415 Problems 416 References 416 Further Reading 420 12 Bioelectronics 421 12.1 Introduction 422 12.2 Biological Building Blocks 422 12.3 Nucleotides 429 12.4 Cells 433 12.5 Genetic Coding 434 12.6 The Biological Membrane 438 12.7 Neurons 443 12.8 Biosensors 445 12.9 DNA Electronics 449 12.10 Photobiology 450 12.11 Molecular Motors 458 Problems 461 References 461 Further Reading 463 Appendix 465 Index 469

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive exposition of the theory and techniques of fault identification and decision theory when applied to complex systems shows how modern computer analysis and diagnostic methods might be applied to launch vehicle design, checkout, and launch the space checkout system is a specialized area which is rarely explored in terms of the intelligent techniques and approaches involved an original view combining modern theory with well-established research material, inviting a contemporary approach to launch dynamics highlights the advanced research works in the field of testing, control and decision-making for space launch presented in a very well organized way and the technical level is very high Trade Review"A comprehensive exposition of the theory and techniques of fault identification and decision theory when applied to complex systems." (Zentralblatt MATH 2016)Table of ContentsIntroductionChapter 1 Overview of Testing and Control for Space LaunchChapter 2 Networks of Testing and Control for Space LaunchChapter 3 Intelligent Analysis and Processing for Testing DataChapter 4 Intelligent Fault Diagnosis for Space Launch and TestingChapter 5 Safety Control of Space Launch and Flight: Modeling and Intelligence DecisionChapter 6 Development Tendency of Space Launch Test and ControlReferencesIndex

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Effects of Sound on Peopleprovides a summary of the latest published research on the effects of sound on people, accompanied by thorough explanations of the technical descriptors typically used in these studies, permitting non-technical readers to understand the issues and be able to judge the validity of the results for themselves.Table of ContentsList of Figures xi List of Tables xiv About the Author xv Series Preface xvi Preface xvii 1 Acoustic Parameters 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Sound generation 1 1.2.1 Frequency 2 1.2.2 Wavelength 4 1.3 Sound Propagation 5 1.3.1 Unimpeded divergence 6 1.3.2 Impeded Propagation 7 Reflection 8 Refraction 8 Diffraction 9 Diffusion 10 1.3.3 Sound Behavior Indoors 10 Echo 11 Room modes 11 Reverberation 13 1.3.4 Sound Behavior Outdoors 14 Atmospheric absorption 14 Atmospheric refraction 15 Ground effects 16 Vegetation effects 17 References 18 2 Sound Description 19 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 The Decibel Scale 19 2.3 Frequency Weighting Networks 21 2.3.1 Loudness 21 2.3.2 Weighting scales 24 2.4 Frequency Band Analysis 26 2.4.1 Noise by color 28 2.5 Common Sound Descriptors 29 2.5.1 Environmental descriptors 29 2.5.2 Sound propagation in terms of sound levels 32 Divergence 32 Refraction and diffraction 33 Reverberation 33 Sound fields 34 References 35 3 Sound Perception 36 3.1 Introduction 36 3.2 Human Hearing Apparatus and mechanism 36 3.2.1 Outer ear 37 3.2.2 Middle ear 38 3.2.3 Inner ear 40 3.2.4 Signal processing in the brain 44 Localization 44 Masking and audibility 45 3.2.5 Vestibular system 46 3.3 Alternate Sound Perception Mechanisms 47 3.3.1 Bone conduction 47 3.3.2 Cartilage hearing 47 3.3.3 Tinnitus 48 3.3.4 Electromagnetic hearing 48 3.4 Hypersensitivities 49 3.4.1 Hyperacusis/misophonia 50 3.4.2 Electrohypersensitivity 50 3.5 Low‐frequency and Infrasound Perception 51 References 53 4 Physiological Effects of Sound Exposure 57 4.1 Introduction 57 4.2 Body Resonance and Damage Potential 57 4.3 Hearing Loss 59 4.3.1 Presbycusis 59 4.3.2 Noise‐induced Hearing Loss 61 4.3.3 Hearing Loss from Illness or Agents 65 4.4 Cardiovascular Disease 66 4.4.1 Hypertension 68 4.4.2 Ischemic Diseases 70 4.5 Vibroacoustic Disease 71 4.6 Low‐frequency Noise Concerns 72 4.7 Infrasound Concerns 74 References 76 5 Psychological Effects of Sound Exposure 81 5.1 Introduction 81 5.2 Annoyance 81 5.3 Stress 85 5.4 Sleep Disturbance 86 5.5 Learning Disabilities 89 5.5.1 Cognitive Development/School Performance 91 5.5.2 Office/Occupational 93 5.6 Emotional Effects 96 References 97 6 Sound Sources Associated with Negative Effects 102 6.1 Introduction 102 6.2 Transportation Sources 102 6.2.1 Roadway Traffic 104 6.2.2 Aircraft 106 Fixed wing 107 Rotary wing 108 6.2.3 Rail 109 6.3 Industry and Utilities 109 6.3.1 Power Plants 110 6.3.2 Wind Farms 111 6.3.3 Electrical Power Systems 116 6.4 Personal/Recreational Sources 116 6.4.1 Firearms 117 6.4.2 Public performances 117 6.4.3 Toys/personal Listening Devices 118 6.4.4 Appliances/Tools 119 6.5 Hums 119 6.6 Acoustic Weapons 121 References 122 7 Positive Effects of Sound 126 7.1 Introduction 126 7.2 Music Psychology 126 7.3 Sound Therapies 129 7.4 Natural Sources/Soundscapes 130 7.5 Using Sound to Influence People 133 References 136 8 Sound Control and Regulation 140 8.1 Introduction 140 8.2 Sound Control Fundamentals 140 8.2.1 Absorption 141 8.2.2 Transmission Control 143 8.2.3 Partial Barriers 149 8.2.4 Cancellation 152 8.2.5 Control at the Source 153 8.2.6 Control in the Path between the Source and Listener 154 8.2.7 Control at the Listener 156 Acoustic Privacy 157 8.3 Regulations and Guidelines 158 8.3.1 Occupational 159 8.3.2 Environmental 161 National 161 Local 165 8.4 Current and Future Research 166 References 167 Glossary 169 Index 181

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book comprehensively addresses surface modification of natural fibers to make them more effective, cost-efficient, and environmentally friendly.Table of ContentsContributors xii Preface xiv 1 Biodegradable Green Composites 1 Sreerag Gopi, Anitha Pius, and Sabu Thomas 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 Biodegradable Polymers 2 1.2.1 Starch 2 1.2.2 Cellulose 4 1.2.3 Chitin and Chitosan 4 1.2.4 Proteins 5 1.3 Nanofillers for Composites 5 1.3.1 Cellulose‐Based Nanofillers 5 1.3.2 Carbon Nanotube 7 1.3.3 Clay 7 1.3.4 Functional Fillers 7 1.4 Nanocomposites from Renewable Resources 8 1.4.1 Cellulose Nanocomposites 9 1.4.2 CNT Nanocomposites 9 1.4.3 Clay Nanocomposites 10 1.4.4 Functional Nanocomposites 10 1.5 Processing of Green Composites 10 1.6 Applications 11 1.6.1 Packaging 11 1.6.2 Electronics, Sensor, and Energy Applications 11 1.6.3 Medicinal Applications 12 1.7 Conclusion 12 References 12 2 Surface Modification of Natural Fibers Using Plasma Treatment 18 Danmei Sun 2.1 Introduction 19 2.1.1 Natural Fiber Materials and their Properties 19 2.1.2 Conventional Modification Methods and Drawbacks 19 2.1.3 Plasma Environment and the Advantages of Plasma Surface Modification 20 2.2 Mechanisms of Plasma Treatment and Types of Plasma Machines 21 2.2.1 Principle of Plasma Surface Modification 21 2.2.2 Interactive Mechanisms between Plasma and Substrates 22 2.2.3 Types of Plasma Treatment Systems 24 2.3 Effects and Applications of Plasma Treatment 27 2.3.1 Surface Morphology and Chemical Composition Change 27 2.3.2 Improved Hydrophilicity and Efficiency in Aqueous Processes 28 2.3.3 Improved Hydrophobicity 31 2.3.4 Mechanical Properties Affected by Plasma Treatment 33 2.3.5 Medical Applications of Plasma Treatment 34 2.3.6 Plasma‐Modified Fibers in Polymer Composites 34 2.3.7 Other Areas of Applications 35 2.4 Conclusions and Industrial Implications 35 References 35 3 Reinforcing Potential of Enzymatically Modified Natural Fibers 40 Levent Onal and Yekta Karaduman 3.1 Introduction 41 3.2 Enzymes 42 3.2.1 A Brief History 42 3.2.2 Classification and Nomenclature 43 3.2.3 Enzyme Structure 43 3.2.4 Enzymatic Catalysis 44 3.3 Natural Fibers as Enzyme Substrates 45 3.3.1 Physical Properties of Lignocellulosic Fibers 46 3.3.2 Chemical Properties and Composition of Lignocellulosic Fibers 47 3.3.2.1 Cellulose 47 3.3.2.2 Hemicellulose 49 3.3.2.3 Lignin 49 3.3.2.4 Pectin 50 3.3.2.5 Other Aromatic Compounds 51 3.3.2.6 Fats, Waxes, and Lipids 51 3.4 Types of Enzymes Used in Natural Fiber Modification 51 3.4.1 Cellulases 51 3.4.2 Xylanases 52 3.4.3 Pectinases 53 3.4.4 Laccases 53 3.5 Effect of Enzymatic Treatment on the Structure and Properties of Natural Fibers 54 3.6 Polymer Composites Reinforced with Enzymatically Modified Natural Fibers 62 3.7 Enzyme‐Assisted Biografting Methods 69 3.8 Conclusions 73 References 74 4 Recent Developments in Surface Modification of Natural Fibers for their use in Biocomposites 80 Jaspreet Kaur Bhatia, Balbir Singh Kaith, and Susheel Kalia 4.1 Introduction 81 4.2 Biocomposites 82 4.2.1 Classification: Biomass Derived and Petroleum‐Derived Matrix 83 4.2.2 Advantage over Traditional Composites 86 4.3 Natural Fiber: Structure and Composition 86 4.4 Surface Modification of Natural Fibers 89 4.4.1 Silylation, Esterification, and other Surface Chemical Modifications 89 4.4.2 Noncovalent Surface Chemical Modifications 93 4.4.3 Cationization 95 4.4.4 Polymer Grafting 95 4.4.5 TEMPO‐Mediated Oxidation 98 4.4.6 Green Modification 100 4.5 Biocomposites: Recent Trends and Opportunities for the Future 100 4.6 Biodegradability of Biocomposites 101 4.7 Conclusions 103 References 105 5 Nanocellulose‐Based Green Nanocomposite Materials 118 Qi Zhou and Núria Butchosa 5.1 Introduction 119 5.2 Nanocellulose 119 5.2.1 Cellulose Nanocrystals 120 5.2.2 Cellulose Nanofibrils 120 5.2.3 Bacterial Cellulose 122 5.3 Composite Matrices 122 5.3.1 Cellulose and Cellulose Derivatives 122 5.3.2 Hemicelluloses and other Polysaccharides 123 5.3.3 Starch 124 5.3.4 Chitin and Chitosan 125 5.3.5 Proteins 126 5.3.6 Polylactic Acid and Poly(ε‐Caprolactone) 127 5.3.7 Inorganic Nanoparticles 128 5.4 Composite Properties 129 5.4.1 Thermal and Mechanical Properties 129 5.4.2 Barrier Properties 130 5.4.3 Antimicrobial Properties 133 5.4.4 Optical Properties 134 5.5 Conclusions 136 References 137 6 Poly(Lactic Acid) Hybrid Green Composites 149 Mahbub Hasan, Azman Hassan, and Zainoha Zakaria 6.1 Introduction 150 6.2 Manufacturing Techniques of PLA Hybrid Green Composites 151 6.2.1 Melt Mixing/Blending 151 6.2.2 Extrusion/Injection Molding 153 6.2.3 Other Techniques 155 6.3 Properties of PLA Hybrid Green Composites 156 6.3.1 Mechanical Properties 156 6.3.1.1 Tensile Properties 156 6.3.1.2 Flexural Properties 157 6.3.1.3 Impact Strength 158 6.3.2 Dynamic Mechanical Properties 158 6.3.3 Thermal Properties 160 6.3.3.1 Thermogravimetric Analysis 160 6.3.3.2 Differential Scanning Calorimetry 162 6.3.4 Surface Morphology 162 6.3.5 Electrical Properties 163 6.4 Applications of PLA Hybrid Green Composites 164 6.5 Conclusions 164 References 164 7 Lignin/Nanolignin and their Biodegradable Composites 167 Anupama Rangan, M.V. Manjula, K.G. Satyanarayana, and Reghu Menon 7.1 Introduction 168 7.1.1 Renewable Bioresources-Sustainability and Biodegradability Issues 168 7.1.2 Nanotechnology and Application of Nanotechnology (Specifically for Cellulose and Lignin) 170 7.2 Lignin 170 7.2.1 Structure, Chemical Nature, Complexity, and Linkage Heterogeneity 170 7.2.2 Types, Structure, Properties, and Uses of Modified/Processed Lignin 172 7.2.2.1 Kraft Lignin 173 7.2.2.2 Soda Lignin 173 7.2.2.3 Lignosulfonates 173 7.2.2.4 Organosolv Lignin 175 7.2.2.5 Hydrolysis Lignin 175 7.3 Nanolignin and Methods of Preparation of Nanolignin 175 7.3.1 Precipitation Method 175 7.3.2 Chemical Modification Method 178 7.3.3 Electrospinning Followed by Surface Modification 178 7.3.4 Freeze Drying Followed by Thermal Stabilization and Carbonization 179 7.3.5 Supercritical Antisolvent Technology 179 7.3.6 Chemomechanical Methods 180 7.3.7 Nanolignin by Self‐Assembly 181 7.3.8 Template‐Mediated Synthesis of Lignin‐based Nanotubes and Nanowires 181 7.4 Characterization of Lignin Nanoparticles 183 7.4.1 Microscopy 183 7.4.2 Thermal Analysis 185 7.4.3 X‐Ray Diffraction 186 7.4.4 Other Methods 186 7.5 Lignin Composites/Nanolignin‐Based “Green” Composites 186 7.5.1 Lignin‐based Thermoplastic Polymer Composites 186 7.5.2 Rubber‐based Lignin Composites 187 7.5.3 Lignin‐reinforced Biodegradable Composites 187 7.5.4 Lignin‐reinforced Foam‐based Composites 188 7.5.5 Lignin‐based Composite Coatings 188 7.5.6 Synthesis of Lignin–PLA Copolymer Composites 190 7.5.7 Nanolignin‐based “Green” Composites 190 7.6 Potential Applications of Lignin/Nanolignin 190 7.7 Perspectives and Concluding Remarks 191 Acknowledgments 192 References 192 Web Site References 198 8 Starch‐Based “Green” Composites 199 K.G. Satyanarayana and V.S. Prasad 8.1 Introduction 200 8.1.1 Starch 200 8.1.1.1 Thermoplastic Starch 202 8.1.1.2 Starch Nanocrystals 203 8.1.1.3 Structure and Properties of Starch/TPS 207 8.2 Starch‐Based Composites 215 8.2.1 Processing Techniques/Methods 215 8.2.1.1 Processing of Starch‐based Microcomposites 215 8.2.1.2 Processing of Starch‐based Nanocomposites 220 8.2.2 Structure and Properties of Starch-Polymer Systems (Blends/Composites) 222 8.2.2.1 Starch-Polymer Systems 222 8.2.2.2 Starch–Natural Materials‐based “Green” Composites 239 8.2.2.3 Starch‐based Nanocomposites 257 8.2.2.4 Starch Nanoparticles in Composites 269 8.3 Applications 272 8.4 Perspectives 275 8.5 Concluding Remarks 275 Acknowledgments 276 References 277 9 Green Composite Materials Based on Biodegradable Polyesters 299 Pramendra Kumar Bajpai 9.1 Introduction 299 9.2 Fabrication Techniques for Green Composites 301 9.2.1 Hand Lay‐Up Fabrication Technique 301 9.2.2 Compression Molding 302 9.2.3 Injection Molding Fabrication Technique 304 9.2.4 Resin Transfer Fabrication Technique 306 9.2.5 Pultrusion Fabrication Technique 307 9.3 Processing of Green Composites Through Microwave Heating 308 9.4 Application of Green Composite 308 9.5 Concluding Remark 309 References 309 10 Applications of Green Composite Materials 312 Koronis Georgios, Arlindo Silva, and Samuel Furtado 10.1 Introduction 313 10.2 Green Composite Materials 313 10.2.1 Reinforcement 314 10.2.2 The Matrix 316 10.3 Consumer Products 317 10.4 Biomedical Applications 319 10.5 Packaging 321 10.6 Transportation Industry 322 10.7 Construction 326 10.8 Energy Industry 327 10.9 Sports and Leisure Industry 327 10.9.1 Boat Hulls and Canoes 328 10.9.2 Snowboards/Skis and Surfboards 328 10.9.3 Toys 329 10.9.4 Musical Instruments 329 10.10 Conclusions 330 References 330 Index 338

Read more less

Book SynopsisModelling of Engineering Materials presents the background that is necessary to understand the mathematical models that govern the mechanical response of engineering materials.Table of ContentsPreface ix Notations xiii Chapter 1 : Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction to material modelling 1 1.2 Complexity of material response in engineering 2 1.3 Classification of modelling of material response 5 1.3.1 Empirical models 6 1.3.2 Micromechanical models 7 1.3.3 Phenomenological models 8 1.4 Limitations of the continuum hypothesis 9 1.5 Focus of this book 10 Chapter 2 : Preliminary Concepts 13 2.1 Introduction 13 2.2 Coordinate frame and system 13 2.3 Tensors 14 2.3.1 Tensors of different orders 15 2.3.2 Notations for tensors 17 2.4 Derivative operators 22 Summary 25 Exercise 25 Chapter 3 : Continuum Mechanics Concepts 29 3.1 Introduction 29 3.2 Kinematics 30 3.2.1 Transformations 34 3.2.1.1 Transformation of line elements 34 3.2.1.2 Transformation of volume elements 35 3.2.1.3 Transformation of area elements 36 3.2.2 Important types of motions 37 3.2.2.1 Isochoric deformations 38 3.2.2.2 Rigid body motion 39 3.2.2.3 Homogeneous deformations 40 3.2.3 Decomposition of deformation gradient 40 3.2.3.1 Polar decomposition theorem 40 3.2.3.2 Stretches 42 3.2.4 Strain measures 42 3.2.4.1 Displacements 43 3.2.4.2 Infinitismal strains 44 3.2.5 Motions 44 3.2.5.1 Velocity gradient 45 3.2.6 Relative deformation gradient 48 3.2.7 Time derivatives viewed from different coordinates 49 3.2.7.1 Co-rotational derivatives 50 3.2.7.2 Convected derivatives 52 3.3 Balance laws 55 3.3.1 Transport theorem 56 3.3.2 Balance of mass 57 3.3.3 Balance of linear momentum 58 3.3.4 Balance of angular momentum 62 3.3.5 Work energy identity 63 3.3.6 Thermodynamic principles 65 3.3.6.1 First law of thermodynamics 65 3.3.6.2 Second law of thermodynamics 67 3.3.6.3 Alternate energy measures in thermodynamics 68 3.3.7 Referential description of balance laws 70 3.3.7.1 Relations between variables in deformed and undeformed configurations 70 3.3.7.2 Statement of the balance laws in reference configuration 72 3.3.8 Indeterminate nature of the balance laws 73 3.3.9 A note on multiphase and multi-component materials 74 3.3.9.1 Chemical potential 75 3.4 Constitutive relations 75 3.4.1 Transformations 76 3.4.1.1 Euclidean transformations 76 3.4.1.2 Galilean transformations 77 3.4.2 Objectivity of mathematical quantities 77 3.4.3 Invariance of motions and balance equations 79 3.4.4 Invariance of constitutive relations 79 3.4.4.1 Frame invariance in a thermoelastic material 81 3.4.4.2 Constitutive relations for thermoelastic materials 82 3.4.4.3 Frame invariance and constitutive relations for a thermoviscous fluid 85 3.4.5 Frame invariance of derivatives 87 Summary 89 Exercise 90 Chapter 4 : Linear Mechanical Models of Material Deformation 95 4.1 Introduction 95 4.2 Linear elastic solid models 96 4.2.1 Small strain assumption of linear elasticity 98 4.2.2 Classes of elastic constants 98 4.2.2.1 General anisotropic linear elastic solid 99 4.2.2.2 Materials with single plane of elastic symmetry 100 4.2.2.3 Materials with two planes of elastic symmetry 100 4.2.2.4 Materials with symmetry about an axis of rotation 101 4.2.2.5 Isotropic materials 102 4.3 Linear viscous fluid models 103 4.3.1 General anisotropic viscous fluid 104 4.3.2 Isotropic viscous fluid 105 4.4 Viscoelastic models 106 4.4.1 Useful definitions for description of viscoelastic behaviour 107 4.4.1.1 Creep compliance and relaxation modulus 107 4.4.1.2 Phase lag, storage modulus and loss modulus 107 4.4.2 Simplistic models of viscoelasticity 110 4.4.2.1 Maxwell model 111 4.4.2.2 Kelvin-Voigt model 118 4.4.2.3 Mechanical analogs for viscoelastic models 119 4.4.3 Time temperature superposition 121 Summary 122 Exercise 122 Chapter 5: Non-linear Models for Fluids 125 5.1 Introduction 125 5.2 Non-linear response of fluids 126 5.2.1 Useful definitions for non-Newtonian fluids 126 5.2.1.1 Steady shear 127 5.2.1.2 Normal stresses 130 5.2.1.3 Material functions in extensional flow 130 5.2.2 Classification of different models 131 5.3 Non-linear viscous fluid models 132 5.3.1 Power law model 134 5.3.2 Cross model 134 5.4 Non-linear viscoelastic models 135 5.4.1 Differential-type viscoelastic models 135 5.4.2 Integral -type viscoelastic models 137 5.5 Case study: rheological behaviour of asphalt 138 5.5.1 Material description 138 5.5.2 Experimental methods 139 5.5.3 Constitutive models for asphalt 140 5.5.3.1 Non-linear viscous models 141 5.5.3.2 Linear viscoelastic models 141 5.5.3.3 Non-linear viscoelastic models 142 Summary 147 Exercise 147 Chapter 6 : Non-linear Models for Solids 149 6.1 Introduction 149 6.2 Non-linear elastic material response 149 6.2.1 Hyperelastic material models 151 6.2.2 Non-linear hyperelastic models for finite deformation 152 6.2.2.1 Network models of rubber elasticity 153 6.2.2.2 Mooney-Rivlin model for rubber elasticity 154 6.2.2.3 Ogden’s model for rubber elasticity 155 6.2.2.4 Non-linear hyperelastic models in infinitismal deformation 156 6.2.3 Cauchy elastic models 156 6.2.3.1 First order Cauchy elastic models 157 6.2.3.2 Second order Cauchy elastic models 158 6.2.4 Use of non-linear elastic models 158 6.3 Non-linear inelastic models 159 6.3.1 Hypo-elastic material models 160 6.4 Plasticity models 161 6.4.1 Typical response of a plastically deforming material 163 6.4.2 Models for monotonic plastic deformation 165 6.4.3 Models for incremental plastic deformation 170 6.4.4 Material response under cyclic loading 174 6.4.5 Generalized description of plasticity models 181 6.5 Case study of cyclic deformation of soft clayey soils 183 6.5.1 Material description 183 6.5.2 Experimental characterization 184 6.5.3 Constitutive model development for monotonic and cyclic behaviour 185 6.5.4 Comparison of model predictions with experimental results 187 Summary 189 Exercise 190 Chapter 7 : Coupled Field Response of Special Materials 193 7.1 Introduction 193 7.1.1 Field variables associated with coupled field interactions 194 7.2 Electromechanical fields 195 7.2.1 Basic definitions of variables associated with electric fields 195 7.2.2 Balance laws in electricity - Maxwell’s equations 196 7.2.3 Modifications to mechanical balance laws in the presence of electric fields 197 7.2.4 General constitutive relations associated with electromechanical fields 198 7.2.5 Linear constitutive relations associated with electromechanical fields 199 7.2.6 Biased piezoelectric (Tiersten’s) model 200 7.3 Thermomechanical fields 201 7.3.1 Response of shape memory materials 202 7.3.1.1 Response of shape memory alloys 202 7.3.1.2 Response of shape memory polymers 203 7.3.2 Microstructural changes in shape memory materials 204 7.3.2.1 Microstructural changes associated with shape memory alloys 205 7.3.2.2 Microstructural changes associated with shape memory polymers 206 7.3.3 Constitutive modelling of shape memory materials 208 7.3.3.1 Constitutive models for shape memory alloys 208 7.3.3.2 Constitutive models for shape memory polymers 209 Summary 210 Exercise 210 Chapter 8 : Concluding Remarks 213 8.1 Introduction 213 8.2 Features of models summarized in this book 214 8.3 Current approaches for constitutive modelling 215 8.4 Numerical simulation of system response using continuum models 218 8.5 Observations on system response 220 8.6 Challenges for the future 222 Summary 232 Exercise 232 Appendix 225 Bibliography 233 Index 235

Read more less

Book Synopsis Unifies existing and emerging concepts concerning multi-objective control and stochastic control with engineering-oriented phenomena Establishes a unified theoretical framework for control and filtering problems for a class of discrete-time nonlinear stochastic systems with consideration to performance Includes case studies of several nonlinear stochastic systems Investigates the phenomena of incomplete information, including missing/degraded measurements, actuator failures and sensor saturations Considers both time-invariant systems and time-varying systems Exploits newly developed techniques to handle the emerging mathematical and computational challenges Table of ContentsPreface vii Acknowledgements ix List of Abbreviations xi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Analysis and Synthesis of Nonlinear Stochastic Systems 2 1.1.1 Nonlinear Systems 3 1.1.2 Stochastic Systems 4 1.2 Multi-Objective Control and Filtering with Variance Constraints 5 1.2.1 Covariance Control Theory 5 1.2.2 Multiple Performance Requirements 7 1.2.3 Design Techniques for Nonlinear Stochastic Systems with Variance Constraints 9 1.2.4 A Special Case of Multi-Objective Design: Mixed H2/H1 Control/Filtering 11 1.3 Outline 12 2 Robust H1 Control with Variance Constraints 17 2.1 Problem Formulation 18 2.2 Stability, H1 Performance and Variance Analysis 20 2.2.1 Stability, H1 Performance Analysis 21 2.2.2 Variance Analysis 23 2.3 Robust Controller Design 27 2.4 Numerical Example 30 2.5 Summary 33 3 Robust Mixed H2=H1 Filtering 41 3.1 System Description and Problem Formulation 42 3.2 Algebraic Characterizations for Robust H2=H1 Filtering 44 3.2.1 Robust H2 Filtering 44 3.2.2 Robust H1 Filtering 50 3.3 Robust H2=H1 Filter Design Techniques 51 3.4 An Illustrative Example 60 3.5 Summary 62 4 Filtering with Missing Measurements 63 4.1 Problem Formulation 64 4.2 Stability and Variance Analysis 67 4.3 Robust Filter Design 71 4.4 Numerical Example 75 4.5 Summary 78 5 Robust Fault-Tolerant Control 87 5.1 Problem Formulation 88 5.2 Stability and Variance Analysis 90 5.3 Robust Controller Design 92 5.4 Numerical Example 98 5.5 Summary 103 6 Robust H2 SMC 105 6.1 The System Model 106 6.2 Robust H2 Sliding Mode Control 107 6.2.1 Switching Surface 107 6.2.2 Performances of the Sliding Motion 108 6.2.3 Computational Algorithm 114 6.3 Sliding Mode Controller 115 6.4 Numerical Example 116 6.5 Summary 118 7 Dissipative Control with Degraded Measurements 125 7.1 Problem Formulation 126 7.2 Stability, Dissipativity and Variance Analysis 129 7.3 Observer-Based Controller Design 134 7.3.1 Solvability of Multi-Objective Control Problem 134 7.3.2 Computational Algorithm 139 7.4 Numerical Example 140 7.5 Summary 142 8 Variance-Constrained H1 Control with Multiplicative Noises 145 8.1 Problem Formulation 146 8.2 Stability, H1 Performance, Variance Analysis 147 8.2.1 Stability 148 8.2.2 H1 performance 150 8.2.3 Variance analysis 152 8.3 Robust State Feedback Controller Design 153 8.4 A Numerical Example 156 8.5 Summary 157 9 Robust Finite-Horizon H1 Control 159 9.1 Problem Formulation 160 9.2 Performance Analysis 162 9.2.1 H1 Performance 162 9.2.2 Variance Analysis 164 9.3 Robust Finite Horizon Controller Design 167 9.4 Numerical Example 171 9.5 Summary 173 10 Finite-Horizon Filtering with Degraded Measurements 177 10.1 Problem Formulation 178 10.2 Performance Analysis 181 10.2.1 H1 Performance Analysis 181 10.2.2 System Covariance Analysis 186 10.3 Robust Filter Design 187 10.4 Numerical Example 190 10.5 Summary 191 11 Mixed H2=H1 Control with Randomly Occurring Nonlinearities: the Finite-Horizon Case 197 11.1 Problem Formulation 199 11.2 H1 Performance 200 11.3 Mixed H2=H1 Controller Design 204 11.3.1 State-Feedback Controller Design 204 11.3.2 Computational Algorithm 207 11.4 Numerical Example 207 11.5 Summary 211 12 Finite-Horizon H2=H1 Control of MJSs with Sensor Failures 213 12.1 Problem Formulation 214 12.2 H1 Performance 216 12.3 Mixed H2=H1 Controller Design 220 12.3.1 Controller Design 220 12.3.2 Computational Algorithm 224 12.4 Numerical Example 224 12.5 Summary 227 13 Finite-Horizon Control with ROSF 229 13.1 Problem Formulation 230 13.2 H1 And Covariance Performances Analysis 234 13.2.1 H1 Performance 234 13.2.2 Covariance Analysis 238 13.3 Robust Finite-Horizon Controller Design 240 13.3.1 Controller Design 240 13.3.2 Computational Algorithm 243 13.4 Numerical Example 243 13.5 Summary 244 14 Finite-Horizon H2=H1 Control with Actuator Failures 247 14.1 Problem Formulation 248 14.2 H1 Performance 251 14.3 Multi-Objective Controller Design 253 14.3.1 Controller Design 253 14.3.2 Computational Algorithm 256 14.4 Numerical Example 257 14.5 Summary 259 15 Conclusions and Future Topics 261 References 263

Read more less

Book SynopsisFundamental guidanceincluding concepts, models, and methodologyfor better understanding the dynamic behavior of materials and for designing for objects and structures under impact or intensive dynamic loading This book introduces readers to the dynamic response of structures with important emphasis on the material behavior under dynamic loadings. It utilizes theoretical modelling and analytical methods in order to provide readers with insight into the various phenomena. The content of the book is an introduction to the fundamental aspects, which underpin many important industrial areas. These areas include the safety of various transportation systems and a range of different structures when subjected to various impact and dynamic loadings, including terrorist attacks. Presented in three partsStress Waves in Solids, Dynamic Behaviors of Materials Under High Strain Rate, and Dynamic Response of Structures to Impact and Pulse LoadingIntroduction to Impact Dynamics covers elastic waves,Table of ContentsPreface xi Introduction to Impact Dynamics xiii Part 1 Stress Waves in Solids 1 1 Elastic Waves 3 1.1 Elastic Wave in a Uniform Circular Bar 3 1.1.1 The Propagation of a Compressive Elastic Wave 3 1.2 Types of Elastic Wave 6 1.2.1 Longitudinal Waves 6 1.2.2 Transverse Waves 7 1.2.3 Surface Wave (Rayleigh Wave) 7 1.2.4 Interfacial Waves 8 1.2.5 Waves in Layered Media (Love Waves) 8 1.2.6 Bending (Flexural) Waves 8 1.3 Reflection and Interaction of Waves 9 1.3.1 Mechanical Impedance 9 1.3.2 Waves When they Encounter a Boundary 10 1.3.3 Reflection and Transmission of 1D Longitudinal Waves 11 Questions 1 17 Problems 1 18 2 Elastic-Plastic Waves 19 2.1 One-Dimensional Elastic-Plastic Stress Wave in Bars 19 2.1.1 A Semi-Infinite Bar Made of Linear Strain-Hardening Material Subjected to a Step Load at its Free End 21 2.1.2 A Semi-Infinite Bar Made of Decreasingly Strain-Hardening Material Subjected to a Monotonically Increasing Load at its Free End 22 2.1.3 A Semi-Infinite Bar Made of Increasingly Strain-Hardening Material Subjected to a Monotonically Increasing Load at its Free End 23 2.1.4 Unloading Waves 25 2.1.5 Relationship Between Stress and Particle Velocity 26 2.1.6 Impact of a Finite-Length Uniform Bar Made of Elastic-Linear Strain-Hardening Material on a Rigid Flat Anvil 28 2.2 High-Speed Impact of a Bar of Finite Length on a Rigid Anvil (Mushrooming) 31 2.2.1 Taylor’s Approach 31 2.2.2 Hawkyard’s Energy Approach 36 Questions 2 38 Problems 2 38 Part 2 Dynamic Behavior of Materials under High Strain Rate 39 3 Rate-Dependent Behavior of Materials 41 3.1 Materials’ Behavior under High Strain Rates 41 3.2 High-Strain-Rate Mechanical Properties of Materials 44 3.2.1 Strain Rate Effect of Materials under Compression 44 3.2.2 Strain Rate Effect of Materials under Tension 44 3.2.3 Strain Rate Effect of Materials under Shear 47 3.3 High-Strain-Rate Mechanical Testing 48 3.3.1 Intermediate-Strain-Rate Machines 48 3.3.2 Split Hopkinson Pressure Bar (SHPB) 53 3.3.3 Expanding-Ring Technique 61 3.4 Explosively Driven Devices 62 3.4.1 Line-Wave and Plane-Wave Generators 63 3.4.2 Flyer Plate Accelerating 65 3.4.3 Pressure-Shear Impact Configuration 66 3.5 Gun Systems 67 3.5.1 One-Stage Gas Gun 67 3.5.2 Two-Stage Gas Gun 68 3.5.3 Electric Rail Gun 69 Problems 3 69 4 Constitutive Equations at High Strain Rates 71 4.1 Introduction to Constitutive Relations 71 4.2 Empirical Constitutive Equations 72 4.3 Relationship between Dislocation Velocity and Applied Stress 76 4.3.1 Dislocation Dynamics 76 4.3.2 Thermally Activated Dislocation Motion 81 4.3.3 Dislocation Drag Mechanisms 85 4.3.4 Relativistic Effects on Dislocation Motion 85 4.3.5 Synopsis 86 4.4 Physically Based Constitutive Relations 87 4.5 Experimental Validation of Constitutive Equations 90 Problems 4 90 Part 3 Dynamic Response of Structures to Impact and Pulse Loading 91 5 Inertia Effects and Plastic Hinges 93 5.1 Relationship between Wave Propagation and Global Structural Response 93 5.2 Inertia Forces in Slender Bars 94 5.2.1 Notations and Sign Conventions for Slender Links and Beams 95 5.2.2 Slender Link in General Motion 96 5.2.3 A Summary of the Methodology 102 5.3 Plastic Hinges in a Rigid-Plastic Free–Free Beam under Pulse Loading 102 5.3.1 Dynamic Response of Rigid-Plastic Beams 102 5.3.2 A Free–Free Beam Subjected to a Concentrated Step Force 104 5.3.3 Remarks on a Free–Free Beam Subjected To A Step Force At Its Midpoint 108 5.4 A Free Ring Subjected to a Radial Load 109 5.4.1 Comparison between a Supported Ring and a Free Ring 112 Questions 5 112 Problems 5 112 6 Dynamic Response of Cantilevers 115 6.1 Response to Step Loading 115 6.2 Response to Pulse Loading 120 6.2.1 Rectangular Pulse 120 6.2.2 General Pulse 125 6.3 Impact on a Cantilever 126 6.4 General Features of Traveling Hinges 133 Problems 6 136 7 Effects of Tensile and Shear Forces 139 7.1 Simply Supported Beams with no Axial Constraint at Supports 139 7.1.1 Phase I 139 7.1.2 Phase II 142 7.2 Simply Supported Beams with Axial Constraint at Supports 144 7.2.1 Bending Moment and Tensile Force in a Rigid-Plastic Beam 144 7.2.2 Beam with Axial Constraint at Support 146 7.2.3 Remarks 151 7.3 Membrane Factor Method in Analyzing the Axial Force Effect 151 7.3.1 Plastic Energy Dissipation and the Membrane Factor 151 7.3.2 Solution using the Membrane Factor Method 153 7.4 Effect of Shear Deformation 155 7.4.1 Bending-Only Theory 156 7.4.2 Bending-Shear Theory 158 7.5 Failure Modes and Criteria of Beams under Intense Dynamic Loadings 161 7.5.1 Three Basic Failure Modes Observed in Experiments 161 7.5.2 The Elementary Failure Criteria 163 7.5.3 Energy Density Criterion 165 7.5.4 A Further Study of Plastic Shear Failures 166 Questions 7 168 Problems 7 168 8 Mode Technique, Bound Theorems, and Applicability of the Rigid-Perfectly Plastic Model 169 8.1 Dynamic Modes of Deformation 169 8.2 Properties of Modal Solutions 170 8.3 Initial Velocity of the Modal Solutions 172 8.4 Mode Technique Applications 174 8.4.1 Modal Solution of the Parkes Problem 174 8.4.2 Modal Solution for a Partially Loaded Clamped Beam 176 8.4.3 Remarks on the Modal Technique 179 8.5 Bound Theorems for RPP Structures 180 8.5.1 Upper Bound of Final Displacement 180 8.5.2 Lower Bound of Final Displacement 181 8.6 Applicability of an RPP Model 183 Problems 8 186 9 Response of Rigid-Plastic Plates 187 9.1 Static Load-Carrying Capacity of Rigid-Plastic Plates 187 9.1.1 Load Capacity of Square Plates 188 9.1.2 Load Capacity of Rectangular Plates 190 9.1.3 Load-Carrying Capacity of Regular Polygonal Plates 192 9.1.4 Load-Carrying Capacity of Annular Plate Clamped at its Outer Boundary 194 9.1.5 Summary 196 9.2 Dynamic Deformation of Pulse-Loaded Plates 196 9.2.1 The Pulse Approximation Method 196 9.2.2 Square Plate Loaded by Rectangular Pulse 197 9.2.3 Annular Circular Plate Loaded by Rectangular Pulse Applied on its Inner Boundary 201 9.2.4 Summary 204 9.3 Effect of Large Deflection 204 9.3.1 Static Load-Carrying Capacity of Circular Plates In Large Deflection 205 9.3.2 Dynamic Response of Circular Plates with Large Deflection 209 Problems 9 210 10 Case Studies 213 10.1 Theoretical Analysis of Tensor Skin 213 10.1.1 Introduction to Tensor Skin 213 10.1.2 Static Response to Uniform Pressure Loading 213 10.1.3 Dynamic Response of Tensor Skin 217 10.1.4 Pulse Shape 218 10.2 Static and Dynamic Behavior of Cellular Structures 219 10.2.1 Static Response of Hexagonal Honeycomb 221 10.2.2 Static Response of Generalized Honeycombs 223 10.2.3 Dynamic Response of Honeycomb Structures 228 10.3 Dynamic Response of a Clamped Circular Sandwich Plate Subject to Shock Loading 233 10.3.1 An Analytical Model for the Shock Resistance of Clamped Sandwich Plates 234 10.3.2 Comparison of Finite Element and Analytical Predictions 238 10.3.3 Optimal Design of Sandwich Plates 239 10.4 Collision and Rebound of Circular Rings and Thin-Walled Spheres on Rigid Target 241 10.4.1 Collision and Rebound of Circular Rings 241 10.4.2 Collision and Rebound of Thin-Walled Spheres 249 10.4.3 Concluding Remarks 257 References 259 Index 265

Read more less

Book SynopsisCeramic Engineering and Science Proceedings Volume 35, Issue 1, 74th Conference on Glass Problems S.K. Sundaram, Editor In continuing the tradition that dates back to 1934, this volume is a collection of 25 papers presented at the 74th Glass Problems Conference, October 1417, 2013 in Columbus, Ohio. These papers are essential reading for all who need to stay abreast of the latest research in the glass manufacturing field. Content is grouped into the below five sections: Batching and Forming Glass Melting Modeling, Sensing and Control Refractories I Refractories II Table of ContentsForeword ix Preface xi Acknowledgments xiii Batching and Forming Long Term Results of Oxy Fuel Forehearth, Heating Technology for E-Glass Fibers 3Christian Windhoevel, Chendhil Periasarny, George Todd, Justin Wang, Bertrand Leroux, and Youssef Joumani Glass Production Losses Originating from Contaminants in Cullet and Raw Materials 15J. Terry Fisk Developing a Better Understanding of Boron Emissions from Industrial Glass Furnaces 25Andrew Zamurs, Tim Batson, David Lever, Simon Cook, and Suresh Donthu New Developments Batch Briquetting 33Khaled Al Harndan, Heiko Hessenkemper, and Sven Wiltzach Application of Self-Supporting Precious Metal Stirrers in the Melting of Soda-Lime Glass 43Alexander Fuchs Glass Melting Application of an Energy Balance Model for Improving the Energy Efficiency of Glass Melting Furnaces 53Adriaan Lankhorst, Luuk Thielen, Johan van der Dennen, and Miriam del Hoyo Arroyo Observation of Batch Melting and Glass Melt Fining and Evolved Gas Analysis 69Penny Marson, Ruud Beerkens, and Mathi Rongen Thermochemical Recuperation to Increase Glass Furnace Energy Efficiency 81David Rue, Aleksandr Kozlov, Mark Khinkis, and Harry Kurek Dry Batch Optimizer-Gain All Benefits of Water-Wetting While Reducing the Drawbacks 93F. Philip Yu, Tom Hughes, and Blaine Krause Modeling, Sensing, and Control In-Situ CO and O2 Laser Sensor for Burner Control in Glass Furnaces 103A.J. Faberm M. van Kersbergen, and H. van Limpt Radiation Impact on the Two-Dimensional Modeling of Glass Sheet Sagging and Tempering 109Dominique Lochegnies, Fabien Béchet, Norbert Sledow, and Philippe Moreau An Advanced Expert Control System and Batch Imaging Software for an Improved Automatic Melter Operation 117H.P.H. (Erik) Muijsenberg, Robert Bodi, Menno Eisenga, and Glenn Neff How Can Predictive Strategies Contribute to Improved Power Management and Decreased Energy Comsumption? 133Rene Meuleman How Many Chambers are Enough? - A Float Furnace Modeling Study 141Matthias Lindig Two-Dimensional Modeling of the Entire Glass Sheet Forming Process, Including Radiative Effects 147Fabien Bechet, Norbert Siedow, and Dominique Lochegnies Refractories I Hot Bottom Repairs: Global Impact, Performance Case Study and Development for the Americas 165S. Cristina Sánchez Franco, Kevin Pendleton, Dennis Cawthom, and Bryn Snow Process Improvements with Bonded Alumina Channels 177Elmer Sperry and Laura Lowe Bonded Refractories for Extreme Conditions in the Top of Regenerators 189Rongxing Bei, Klaus Santowski, Christian Majcenovic, Goetz Heilemann, and Mathew Wheeler New Fused Cast Refractory for Metal Line Protection 197Olivier Bories, Isabelle Cabodi, Michael Gaubil, and Bruno Malphettes Ancorro-Refinement Technology for Refractory in Glass Melt Contact 203Rolf Weigand, Heiko Hessenkemper, Anne-Katrin Rössel, David Tritschel, and Romy Kühne Refractories II An Update on the Technological Evolution (Or Lack Thereof) of Chinese Manufacturers of Fused Cast Refractories and the Value vs. Cost Proposition 211P. Carlo Ratto Monolithic Crown and Its Benefits, Colloidal Silica Bonded Refractories Technology 217Ali Farhadi, Tom Fisher, Alonso Gonzalez Rodriguez, and Marlo Estrada High Emissivity Coatings in Glass Furnaces 225Tom Kleeb and Bill Fausey New Recycling Solution for Refractories from Insulation Glass Furnaces 233O. Citti, C. Linnot, T. Champion, and P. Lenfant Furnace Repair after a Hurrican Flooding at Monterrey, Mexico 245Roberto Cabrera Author Index 251

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis proceedings contains 78 papers from the 8th International Conference on High Temperature Ceramic Matrix Composites, held September 22-26, 2013 in Xi''an, Shaanxi, China. Chapters include: Ceramic Genome, Computational Modeling, and Design Advanced Ceramic Fibers, Interfaces, and Interphases Nanocomposite Materials and Systems Polymer Derived Ceramics and Composites Fiber Reinforced Ceramic MatrixComposites Carbon-Carbon Composites: Materials, Systems, and Applications Ultra High Temperature Ceramics and MAX Phase Materials Thermal and Environmental Barrier Coatings Table of ContentsIntroduction xiii Preface xv Symposia Organizers xvii Ceramic Genome, Computational Modeling, and Design Design of New Gradient Cemented Carbides and Hard Coatings through Ceramic Genome 3 Weibin Zhang, Yong Du, Li Chen, Yingbiao Peng, Peng Zhou, Weimin Chen, Kaiming Cheng, Lijun Zhang, Wen Xie, Guanghua Wen, and Shequan Wang The Effects of Nesting and Stacking Sequence on the Structural and Gas Transport Properties of Plain Woven Composites during Chemical Vapor Infiltration Process 15 Kang Guan, Laifei Cheng, Qingfeng Zeng, Yunfang Liu, Haitao Ren, and Litong Zhang An Efficient Approach to Determine the Effective Properties of Random Heterogeneous Materials 23 Yatao Wu and Yufeng Nie Contribution of Image Processing Techniques to the Simulation of Chemical Vapor Infiltration of SiC in CMCs 29 G. L. Vignoles, C. ChapoullIé, W. Ros, C. Mulat, G. Couégnat, C. Germain, J.-P. Da Costa, M. Cataldi, and C. Descamps Image-Based Numerical Simulation of Thermal Expansion in C/C Composites 39 Olivier Caty, Guillaume Couégnat, Morgan Charron, Thomas Agulhon, and Gerard Louis Vignoles Analysis and Molecular Modeling of Pyrolytic Carbons Nanotextures 45 Jean-Marc Leyssale, Baptiste Farbos, Jean-Pierre Da Costa, Patrick Weisbecker, Georges Chollon, and Gerard Louis Vignoles A New Kinetic Monte-CarloA/olume-of-Fluid Solver for the Anisotropic Surface Recession of C/C Composites by Ablation 55 A. Delehouzé, G. L. Vignoles, J.-F. Epherre, and F. Rebillat Numerical Simulation of Oxidation-Assisted Failure of CMC-SiC at Intermediate Temperature 65 Yingjie Xu and Weihong Zhang Advanced Ceramic Fibers, Interfaces, and Interphases Suppression of a-AI203 Formation from Alumina Gel Fibers by Urea-Catalyzed TEOS-Derived Silica 79 Jing He and Lifu Chen Ceramix Matrix Microcomposites Prepared by P-RCVD within the (Ti-Si-B-C) System 91 Sylvain Jacques Fabrication and Properties of Zr/SiC and Zr/Si3N4 Laminated Composites 99 Liangjun Li, Laifei Cheng, Shangwu Fan, YuPeng Xie, and Litong Zhang Silicon Carbide Fibers Made from Nano-Powders 105 Antoine Malinge, Yann Le Petitcorps, and Rene Pailler Composition and Reactivity of Various Silicon Carbide Fibers 113 S. Mazerat, G. Puyoo, G. Chollon, F. Teyssandier, and R. Pailler The Investigation of Pyrolytic Coating on Carbon Monofilament by Cold Wall CVD using Ethanol as Precursor 125 Song Zhao, Yonghui Zhang, Zhichao Xiao, Junming Su, and Lang Liu Nanocomposite Materials and Systems Carbon Nanotube-Reinforced Ceramic Matrix Composites: Processing and Properties 133 Konstantinos G. Dassios Fabrication of ZAO Ceramic Target and Effect on the Photoelectric Properties of Its Film 159 Meikang Han, Jueming Yang, Xiaowei Yin, and Jianping Li Mechanical Properties of Carbon Nanotube Reinforced Composites: A Review 167 Qianglai Bai, Hui Mei, Tianming Ji, Yuyao Sun, Haiqing Li, and Laifei Cheng Effect of the Electrodeposition Parameters on Deposition Morphologies of CNTs on Carbon Fibers 179 Hui Mei, Huwei Wang, Haiqing Li, Hui Ding, Nan Zhang, Yuetang Wang, Qianglai Bai, and Laifei Cheng Microstructure and Growth Mechanism of SiC Whiskers Synthesized by Carbothermal Reduction of Silicon Nitride 185 Ying Zhang, Junzhan Zhang, Mingxue Jiang, and Minsheng Liu Polymer Derived Ceramics and Composites High Temperature Dielectric and Microwave Absorption Properties of Polymer Derived SiCN Ceramic in X Band 195 Quan Li, Xiaowei Yin, Luo Kong, Wenyan Duan, Litong Zhang, and Laifei Cheng SiCN-Nanowhiskers Self-Reinforcing CMC Quasi-3D Structure Forming by PIP 203 I. A. Timofeev, O. G. Ryzhova, P. A. Timofeev, S. V. Zhukova, and K. V. Mikhailovski Ablation Behavior of C/C-ZrB2-SiC Carbon-Ceramic Composites 209 Xiang-Li Meng, Lian-Sheng Yan, Hong Cui, Xing Yang, and Qiang Zhang Fiber Reinforced Ceramic Matrix Composites Effect of Heat Exposure on the Flexural Strength of Reinforced Carbon and Glass Fibers Geopolymer Matrix Composites 219 Sotya Astutiningsih, Yulianto Sulistyo Nugroho, Shankar M. L. Sastry, and Dwi Marta Nurjaya Reaction Mechanism of Titanium with Carbon during Reactive Melt Infiltration of a Carbon Fiber Reinforced TiC and Carbon Composite 227 Shuxin Bai, Yonggang Tong, Hong Zhang, and Yicong Ye Modelling the Behavior of CMC using Damage Mechanics 237 Emmanuel Baranger MMS Technology: First Results and Prospects 243 Evgeniy Bogachev, Anton Lakhin, and Anatoly Timofeev Effect of Oxidation Damage on the Total Emissivity of 2D C/SiC Composites 255 Fuyuan Wang, Laifei Cheng, and Litong Zhang Effect of Water Vapor on the Oxidation Behavior of CVD-BCX 261 Weihua Zhang, Laifei Cheng, Yongsheng Liu, and Xin'gang Luan Microstructure and Mechanical Properties of the 2D C/SiC/TC4 Joints Brazed with Cu-Ti + Mo 271 Hongmei Yang, Shangwu Fan, Xing Wang, LaiFei Cheng, and Litong Zhang Uniaxial Macro-Mechanical Property and Failure Analysis of a 2D-Woven SiC/SiC Composite 279 Hongbao Guo, Bo Wang, and Chengpeng Yang A Biaxial Flexural Test for Short Carbon Fiber-Reinforced SiC-Matrix Composites 287 Shuqi Guo C/C-SiC Materials based on Melt Infiltration —Manufacturing Methods and Experiences from Serial Production 295 Bemhard Heidenreich, Severin Hofmann, Markus Keck, Raouf Jemmali, Martin FrieB, and Dietmar Koch Internal Friction Behavior of SiC Ceramics Subjected to Water Vapor Corrosion 311 Zhiliang Hong, Laifei Cheng, Chunnian Zhao, Xiufeng Han, Litong Zhang, and Yiguang Wang Fatigue Behavior of C/SiC Ceramic Matrix Composites at Room and Elevated Temperatures 317 Longbiao Li and Yingdong Song The Effects Originated from Low Earth Orbit Thermal Cycling and Atomic Oxygen on C/SiC Composites 327 Bi-feng Zhang, Song Wang, Wei Li, and Zhao-hui Chen Processing and Properties of the C/SiBCN Ceramic Matrix Composites Prepared by PIP 335 Wei Liu, Lamei Cao, Caihong Xu, Ling Wang, and Xiaosu Yi Analysis and Characterization of Amorphous Boron Carbide Coatings Deposited from BCI3-CH4-H2 Mixtures 345 Yongsheng Liu, Nan Chai, Litong Zhang, and Laifei Cheng Chemical Vapor Deposition of Boron-Doped Carbon Coating from BCI3-C3H6-H2-Ar Gas Mixture 357 Yongsheng Liu, JiaJia Wan, Litong Zhang, and Laifei Cheng Preparation and Mechanical Properties of 3D-Cf/Mullite Composites Fabricated by Sol-Gel Process 371 Kewei Dai, Haijun Peng, Qingsong Ma, and Haitao Liu An Alternative to Ceramic Matrix Composites 377 S. T. Mileiko, N.I. Novokhatskaya, Yu. N. Shmotin, D.V. Karelin, and S.A. Grlshikhin Fabrication of Short Fiber Reinforced SiCN by Injection Molding of Preceramic Polymers 381 A. Muller-Kohn, J. Janik, A. Neubrand, H. Klemm, T. Morltz, and A. Michaelis X-CVI (with X = I or P), a Unique Process for the Engineering and Infiltration of the Interphase in SiC-Matrix Composites: An Overview 391 R. Naslain, R. Pailler, F. Langlais, A. Guette, and S. Jacques Temperature Effect on C/SiC Composite with SiC Nanowires Grown In Situ 403 Bingbing Pei, Yunzhou Zhu, and Zhengren Huang Evaluation of Different Carbon Precursors for the Liquid Silicon Infiltration Process 409 Kristina Roder, Andreas Todt, Daisy Nestler, and Bernhard Wielage Microstructure and Mechanical Properties of C/C-SiC Composites Reinforced with Fibers Treated at Elevated Temperatures 417 J. J. Sha, J. X. Dai, Z. F. Zhang, Z. Q. Wei, J. Li, J-M. Hausherr, and W. Krenkel Oxidation Behavior of C/C-SiC Composites with Varied Matrix Composition 425 J. X. Dai, J. J. Sha, Z. F. Zhang, J-M. Hausherr, and W. Krenkel Evaluation and Validation of Elastic Properties and a Failure Criterion for an Oxide Wound Ceramic Composite Material 433 Yuan Shi, Severin Hofmann, Stefan Hackemann, and Dietmar Koch Mechanical and Ablation Properties of Ultra-High Temperature Composites with a Variable Matrix-Composition 443 Chenglong Hu, Shengyang Pang, Sufang Tang, Shijun Wang, and Hongtao Huang Carbon-Carbon Composites: Materials, Systems, and Applications Effects of Preform Structures on Rhenium Coating Prepared on C/C Composites by Chemical Vapor Deposition 453 Jiangfan Wang, Shuxin Bai, Hong Zhang, and Yicong Ye Application Status of C/C Composites for Thermal Protection System in Re-Entry Spacecraft 461 Sun Guoling and Zhou Ji Techniques about Fabrication of Thin-Wall Preforms with Complex Shape for Ceramic Composites 465 Lingling Ji, Alin Ji, Xia Bai, and Lingling Wang Carbon/Carbon Greenbodies for Space Mirrors and Their Thermal Performance 473 Jin Li, Hong Cui, and Ruizhen Li Oxidation Behavior of SiC Reinforced ZrB2 Composite Coating Prepared by Low Pressure Plasma Spray 481 Cui Hu, Yaran Niu, Hong Li, Xuebin Zheng, Chuanxian Ding, and Jinliang Sun Structural Analysis of Carbon-Fiber/Pyrolytic Carbon Matrix Composites 487 Boris Reznik Preparation of β-Sialon Anti-Oxidation Ceramic Coating for C/C Composites and Infrared Stealthy Characteristic 491 Yang Wang and Zhaofeng Chen Ultra High Temperature Ceramics and Max Phase Materials Effect of Carbon Content on the Formation of Ti3SiC2 in the Liquid Silicon Infiltration Process 501 Xiaomeng Fan, Xiaowei Yin, Lei Wang, Litong Zhang, and Laifei Cheng Modification of Titanium Carbide Powders by Silicidation with Gaseous SiO 509 Elena Istomina, Pavel Istomin, Alexander Nadutkin, and Vladislav Grass Combustion Synthesis of Ti3SiC2-Based Ceramic Matrix Composites Using Non-Powder Reactant Solids 515 Pavel Istomin, Alexander Nadutkin, and Vladislav Grass Microstructure Evolution of α-SiC in the Liquid Phase Sintering Process 523 Hanqin Liang, Xiumin Yao, Xuejian Liu, and Zhengren Huang Mechanical Properties and Thermal Shock Resistance of Anisotropic ZrB2-SiC-Graphite Ceramic 529 Lingling Wang, Jun Liang, and Xiaoyang Wan Ablation Behavior of ZrB2/SiC Composite by Oxyacetylene Flame 535 Mingfu Wang, Facheng Liu, Qin Wang, and Xuesong Ma Synthesis of ZrC-ZrB2 Composite Powders by PIRAC Method 541 Shoujun Wu, Yiguang Wang, and Danming Gui Thermal and Environmental Barrier Coatings Formation of Fine Ceramics Layer and Intermetallics Network by Thermal Nanoparticles Spraying and Pattering 549 Soshu Kirihara Formation of Inter-splat Bonding and Intra-splat Microstructure during Plasma Spraying of Ceramic Coating 557 Chang-Jiu Li, Er-Juan Yang, Guan-Jun Yang, and Cheng-Xin Li Preparation and Ablation Properties of ZrC-TaC Co-Deposition Coating for Carbon-Carbon Composites 569 Guo-dong Li, Min Wu, Xiang Xiong, Ya-lei Wang, and Gang-yi Yang Phase Stabilities and Corrosion/Recession Properties of Rare Earth Silicates under High Speed Steam Jet 579 Shunkichi Ueno, Hua-Tay Lin, and Tatsuki Ohji Integration Technologies, Component Testing, and Evaluation Wettability in Joining of Advanced Ceramics and Composites: Issues and Challenges 591 Rajiv Asthana, and Natalia Sobczak Study on the Ablation Behavior of 3D Needled C/SiC in the Rocket Combustion Environments 601 Chao Chen, Bo Chen, Litong Zhang, Laifei Cheng, and Xiaoying Liu The Degradation of Hi-Nicalon Monofilament after Proton Irradiation 607 Xiaochong Liu, Laifei Cheng, Litong Zhang, Xiaowei Yin, Bo Chen, Qing Zhang, and Ning Dong Damage Evaluation in Glass-Ceramic Matrix Composites Via Combined Infrared Thermography and Acoustic Emission 615 Konstantinos G. Dassios, Evangelos Z. Kordatos, Dimitris G. Aggelis, and Theodore E. Matikas Hybrid Ceramic—Metallic Composite Pipes for High Temperature Power Plant Application 633 Min Huang, Karl Berreth, and Karl Maile An Experimental Investigation on Shear Behaviors of Single-Lap Four-Pin 2D C/SiC Joints 639 Yi Zhang, Litong Zhang, Xiaoying Liu, Yongsheng Liu, and Bo Chen The Effect of Dimension Parameters on the Tensile Properties of a C/SiC Pipe 645 Hui Mei, Lidong Zhang, Zhenye Xu, and Laifei Cheng The Application Research of New Testing Technique on Mechanical Experiment for Large-Size CMC Structure 653 Zhiyong Tan, Xujun Zhan, and Xu Han Joining of Glassy Carbon with a C/C-SiC Composite by Brazing for an Innovative High Temperature Sensor 661 Andreas Todt, Kristina Roder, Daisy Nestler, and Bernhard Wielage Strengthening/Toughening of Laminated (SiCw+SiCp)/SiC Ceramic Composites 669 Yupeng Xie, Laifei Cheng, Jie Jian, Yanan Xie, and Litong Zhang Mechanical Properties of Carbon/Silicon Carbide Composites Materials Bolts 675 Donglin Zhao, Litong Zhang, Laifei Cheng, and Xiang Chen Development of Full Scale Ramjet Nozzle with C/SiC Ceramic Matrix Composite 681 Riheng Zheng, Zhiyong Li, Jingmin Chen, Lihan Li, Jianmei Li, Litong Zhang, Laifei Cheng, Xiaoying Liu, Chao Chen, and Hui Mei Author Index 695

Read more less

Book SynopsisPlate and Shell Structures: Selected Analytical and Finite Element Solutions Maria Radwañska, Anna Stankiewicz, Adam Wosatko, Jerzy Pamin Cracow University of Technology, Poland Comprehensively covers the fundamental theory and analytical and numerical solutions for different types of plate and shell structures Plate and Shell Structures: Selected Analytical and Finite Element Solutions not only provides the theoretical formulation of fundamental problems of mechanics of plates and shells, but also several examples of analytical and numerical solutions for different types of shell structures. The book contains advanced aspects related to stability analysis and a brief description of modern finite element formulations for plates and shells, including the discussion of mixed/hybrid models and locking phenomena. Key features: 52 example problems solved and ilTable of ContentsPreface xvii Notation xix Part 1 Fundamentals: Theory and Modelling 1 1 General Information 3 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Review of Theories Describing Elastic Plates and Shells 6 1.3 Description of Geometry for 2D Formulation 9 1.4 Definitions and Assumptions for 2D Formulation 16 1.5 Classification of Shell Structures 21 References 24 2 Equations for Theory of Elasticity for 3D Problems 26 Reference 30 3 Equations of Thin Shells According to the Three-Parameter Kirchhoff–Love Theory 31 3.1 General Equations for Thin Shells 31 3.2 Specification of Lame Parameters and Principal Curvature Radii for Typical Surfaces 38 3.3 Transition from General Shell Equations to Particular Cases of Plates and Shells 42 3.4 Displacement Equations for Multi-Parameter Plate and Shell Theories 45 3.5 Remarks 47 References 47 4 General Information about Models and Computational Aspects 48 4.1 Analytical Approach to Statics, Buckling and Free Vibrations 49 4.2 Approximate Approach According to the Finite Difference Method 51 4.3 Computational Analysis by Finite Element Method 54 4.4 Computational Models – Summary 55 Reference 55 5 Description of Finite Elements for Analysis of Plates and Shells 56 5.1 General Information on Finite Elements 56 5.2 Description of Selected FEs 58 5.3 Remarks on Displacement-based FE Formulation 69 References 70 Part 2 Plates 73 6 Flat Rectangular Membranes 75 6.1 Introduction 75 6.2 Governing Equations 76 6.3 Square Membrane under Unidirectional Tension 81 6.4 Square Membrane under Uniform Shear 83 6.5 Pure In-Plane Bending of a Square Membrane 85 6.6 Cantilever Beam with a Load on the Free Side 88 6.7 Rectangular Deep Beams 94 6.8 Membrane with Variable Thicknesses or Material Parameters 97 References 101 7 Circular and Annular Membranes 102 7.1 Equations of Membranes – Local and Global Formulation 102 7.2 Equations for the Axisymmetric Membrane State 104 7.3 Annular Membrane 105 References 109 8 Rectangular Plates under Bending 110 8.1 Introduction 110 8.2 Equations for the Classical Kirchhoff–Love Thin Plate Theory 110 8.3 Derivation of Displacement Equation for a Thin Plate from the Principle of Minimum Potential Energy 117 8.4 Equation for a Plate under Bending Resting on a Winkler Elastic Foundation 118 8.5 Equations of Mindlin–Reissner Moderately Thick Plate Theory 119 8.6 Analytical Solution of a Sinusoidally Loaded Rectangular Plate 122 8.7 Analysis of Plates under Bending Using Expansions in Double or Single Trigonometric Series 127 8.8 Simply Supported or Clamped Square Plate with Uniform Load 131 8.9 Rectangular Plate with a Uniform Load and Various Boundary Conditions – Comparison of STSM and FEM Results 135 8.10 Uniformly Loaded Rectangular Plate with Clamped and Free Boundary Lines – Comparison of STSM and FEM Results 139 8.11 Approximate Solution to a Plate Bending Problem using FDM 143 8.12 Approximate Solution to a Bending Plate Problem using the Ritz Method 151 8.13 Plate with Variable Thickness 153 8.14 Analysis of Thin and Moderately Thick Plates in Bending 155 References 159 9 Circular and Annular Plates under Bending 160 9.1 General State 160 9.2 Axisymmetric State 162 9.3 Analytical Solution using a Trigonometric Series Expansion 164 9.4 Clamped Circular Plate with a Uniformly Distributed Load 166 9.5 Simply Supported Circular Plate with a Concentrated Central Force 169 9.6 Simply Supported Circular Plate with an Asymmetric Distributed Load 171 9.7 Uniformly Loaded Annular Plate with Static and Kinematic Boundary Conditions 174 References 177 Part 3 Shells 179 10 Shells in the Membrane State 181 10.1 Introduction 181 10.2 General Membrane State in Shells of Revolution 182 10.3 Axisymmetric Membrane State 183 10.4 Hemispherical Shell 186 10.5 Open Conical Shell under Self Weight 193 10.6 Cylindrical Shell 195 10.7 Hemispherical Shell with an Asymmetric Wind Action 199 References 204 11 Shells in the Membrane-Bending State 205 11.1 Cylindrical Shells 205 11.2 Spherical Shells 221 11.3 Cylindrical and Spherical Shells Loaded by a Uniformly Distributed Boundary Moment and Horizontal Force 229 11.4 Cylindrical Shell with a Spherical Cap – Analytical and Numerical Solution 232 11.5 General Case of Deformation of Cylindrical Shells 237 11.6 Cylindrical Shell with a Semicircular Cross Section under Self Weight – Analytical Solution of Membrane State 238 11.7 Cylindrical Scordelis-Lo Roof in the Membrane-Bending State – Analytical and Numerical Solution 242 11.8 Single-Span Clamped Horizontal Cylindrical Shell under Self Weight 246 References 254 12 Shallow Shells 256 12.1 Equations for Shallow Shells 256 12.2 Pucher’s Equations for Shallow Shells in the Membrane State 260 12.3 Hyperbolic Paraboloid with Rectangular Projection 262 12.4 Remarks on Engineering Applications 266 References 267 13 Thermal Loading of Selected Membranes, Plates and Shells 268 13.1 Introduction 268 13.2 Uniform Temperature Change along the Thickness 270 13.3 Linear Temperature Change along the Thickness – Analytical Solutions 275 References 286 Part 4 Stability and Free Vibrations 287 14 Stability of Plates and Shells 289 14.1 Overview of Plate and Shell Stability Problems 289 14.2 Basis of Linear Buckling Theory, Assumptions and Computational Models 291 14.3 Description of Physical Phenomena and Nonlinear Simulations in Stability Analysis 298 14.4 Analytical and Numerical Buckling Analysis for Selected Plates and Shells 301 14.5 Snap-Through and Snap-Back Phenomena Observed for Elastic Shallow Cylindrical Shells in Geometrically Nonlinear Analysis 319 References 321 15 Free Vibrations of Plates and Shells 323 15.1 Introduction 323 15.2 Natural Transverse Vibrations of a Thin Rectangular Plate 325 15.3 Parametric Analysis of Free Vibrations of Rectangular Plates 328 15.4 Natural Vibrations of Cylindrical Shells 333 15.5 Remarks 337 References 338 Part 5 Aspects of FE Analysis 339 16 Modelling Process 341 16.1 Advantages of Numerical Simulations 341 16.2 Complexity of Shell Structures Affecting FEM 342 16.3 Particular Requirements for FEs in Plate and Shell Discretization 343 References 346 17 Quality of FEs and Accuracy of Solutions in Linear Analysis 347 17.1 Order of Approximation Function versus Order of Numerical Integration Quadrature 347 17.2 Assessment of Element Quality via Spectral Analysis 347 17.3 Numerical Effects of Shear Locking and Membrane Locking 350 17.4 Examination of Element Quality – One-Element and Patch Tests 354 17.5 Benchmarks for Membranes and Plates 357 17.6 Benchmarks for Shells 359 17.7 Comparison of Analytical and Numerical Solutions, Application of Various FE Formulations 361 References 362 18 Advanced FE Formulations 365 18.1 Introduction 365 18.2 Link between Variational Formulations and FE Models 366 18.3 Advanced FEs 373 References 383 A List of Boxes with Equations 387 B List of Boxes with Data and Results for Examples 389 Index 391

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis two volume set reviews the key issues in processing and characterization of nanoscale ferroelectrics and multiferroics, and provides a comprehensive description of their properties, with an emphasis in differentiating size effects of extrinsic ones like boundary or interface effects.Table of ContentsPreface List of Contributors Why nanoscale ferroelectrics and multiferroics? Miguel Algueró, J. Marty Gregg and Liliana Mitoseriu Part A Nanostructuring: bulk 1 Incorporation mechanism and functional properties of Ce-doped BaTiO3 ceramics derived from nanopowders prepared by the modified-Pechini method Adelina-Carmen Ianculescu, Daniela C. Berger, Catalina A. Vasilescu, Marius Olariu, Bogdan S. Vasile, Lavinia P. Curecheriu, Andreja Gajović and Roxana Truşcă 2 Synthesis and ceramic nanostructuring of ferroic and multiferroic low tolerance factor perovskite oxides Teresa Hungria, Covadonga Correas and Alicia Castro 3 Core-shell heterostructures: from particle synthesis to bulk dielectric, ferroelectric and multiferroic composite materials Vincenzo Buscaglia and Maria Teresa Buscaglia 4 Modeling of colloidal suspensions for the synthesis of the ferroelectric oxides with complex chemical composition Gregor Trefalt, Bosiljka Tadić and Barbara Malič Nanostructuring: thin films 5 Self-assemblage and patterning of thin film ferroic nanostructures Theodor Schneller 6 Thin film porous ferroic nanostructures: Strategies and characterization Alichandra Castro, Paula Ferreira, Stella Skiadopoulou, Paula M. Vilarinho, Liliana P. Ferreira, Margarida Godinho and Brian J. Rodriguez 7 Low-temperature photo-chemical solution deposition of ferroelectric and multiferroic thin films Christopher De Dobbelaere, An Hardy, Marlies K. Van Bael, Iñigo Bretos, Ricardo Jiménez and M. Lourdes Calzada Nanostructuring: fibers and wires 8 Synthesis and properties of ferroelectric nanotubes and nanowires. A review Vincenzo Buscaglia and Maria Teresa Buscaglia 9 Fabrication of one dimensional ferroelectric nano and micro structures by different spinning techniques and their characterization Tony Lusiola and Frank Clemens PART B Characterization (of the nanostructured materials): crystal structure 10 Structural characterization of ferroelectric and multiferroic nanostructures by advanced TEM techniques Etienne Snoeck, Axel Lubk and César Magén 11 Raman spectroscopy of nanostructured ferroelectric materials Marco Deluca and Andreja Gajovic 12 Neutron and synchrotron X-ray scattering studies of bulk and nanostructured multiferroic and ferroelectric materials Evagelia G. Moshopoulou, Pascale Foury-Leylekian, Katharine Page, C. Doubrovsky, Martha Greenblatt and Alan J. Hurd Characterization (of the nanostructured materials): domains 13 Advanced characterization of multiferroic materials by scanning probe methods and scanning electron microscopy Michael R. Koblischka and Anjela Koblischka-Veneva 14 Electrostatic and Kelvin probe force microscopy for domain imaging of ferroic systems Brian J. Rodriguez PART C Nanoscale effects: bulk properties 15 Nanostructured barium titanate ceramics. Intrinsic vs. extrinsic size effects Liliana Mitoseriu and Lavinia P. Curecheriu 16 The effects of ceramic nanostructuring in high sensitivity piezoelectrics Harvey Amorín, Ricardo Jiménez, Jesús Ricote, Alicia Castro and Miguel Algueró 17 Correlation between microstructure and electrical properties of ferroelectric relaxors J.D. Bobic, J. Macutkevic, R. Grigalaitis, Maksim Ivanov, M.M. Vijatovic Petrovic, Juras Banys and Biljana D. Stojanovic 18 Local field engineering approach for tuning dielectric and ferroelectric properties in nanostructured ferroelectrics and composites Leontin Padurariu and Liliana Mitoseriu Nanoscale effects: thin film properties 19 Ferroelectric phase transitions in epitaxial perovskite films Marina Tyunina 20 Interfaces in epitaxial ferroelectric layers/multilayers and their effect on the macroscopic electrical properties Lucian Pintilie, Andra G. Boni, Cristina Chirila, Luminita M. Hrib, Alin Iuga, Lucian Trupina, Ioana Pintilie, Iuliana Pasuk, Raluca Negrea, Corneliu Ghica, Mihaela Botea, Nicoleta Apostol and Cristian M. Teodorescu 21 Electric-field control of magnetism based on elastically coupled ferromagnetic and ferroelectric domains Kévin J. A. Franke, Tuomas H. E. Lahtinen, Arianna Casiraghi, Diego López González, Sampo J. Hämäläinen and Sebastiaan van Dijken Nanoscale effects: novel phenomena and applications 22 Ferroelectric vortices and related configurations Sergei Prosandeev, Ivan I. Naumov, Huaxiang Fu, Laurent Bellaiche, Michael P. D. Campbell, Raymond G. P. McQuaid, Li-Wu Chang, Alina Schilling, Leo. J. McGilly, Amit Kumar and J. Marty Gregg 23 Reentrant phenomena in relaxors Alexei A. Bokov and Zuo-Guang Ye 24 Functional twin boundaries: Multiferroicity in confined spaces Ekhard. K. H. Salje and Xiangdong Ding 25 Novel approaches for genuine single phase room temperature magnetoelectric multiferroics Lynette Keeney, Michael Schmidt, Andreas Amann, Tuhin Maity, Nitin Deepak, Ahmad Faraz, Nikolay Petkov, Saibal Roy, Martyn E. Pemble and Roger W. Whatmore 26 Semiconducting and photovoltaic ferroelectrics and multiferroics Andrew R. Akbashev and Jonathan E Spanier Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe history of the business and technology that was responsible for the enormous growth of the global polyethylene industry from the laboratory discovery in 1933 to reach an annual production of over 75 million metric tons in 2012 and become the leading plastic material worldwide. This book is an in-depth look at the history of the scientists and engineers that created the catalysts and the methods used for the modern commercial manufacture of polyethylene and its products. The book outlines the processes used for the manufacture of polyethylene are reviewed which include the high-pressure process and the three low-pressure processes; slurry, solution and the gas-phase methods. The techniques used to fabricate polyethylene into end-use products are reviewed with a discussion of blow-molding, injection molding, rotational molding, blown-film, cast-film and thermoforming are also discussed in detail.Table of ContentsPreface xviii 1. Global Polyethylene Business Overview 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 The Business of Polyethylene 2 1.3 Cyclical Nature of the Polyethylene Business 2 1.4 Early History of Ethylene and Polyethylene Manufacturing 6 References 44 2. Titanium-Based Ziegler Catalysts for the Production of Polyethylene 47 2.1 Introduction 47 2.2 Titanium-Based Catalyst Developments 47 2.3 Titanium-Based Catalysts for the Manufacture of Polyethylene 52 2.4 Second Generation Ziegler Catalyst for the Manufacture of Polyethylene 62 2.5 Catalysts Prepared on Silica 76 2.6 Characterization of Catalysts Prepared with Calcined Silica, Dibutylmagnesium or Triethylaluminum and TiCl4 82 2.7 Kinetic Mechanism in the Multi-site Mg/Ti High-Activity Catalysts 96 References 104 Appendix 2.1 107 3. Chromium-Based Catalysts 109 3.1 Part I - The Phillips Catalyst 109 3.2 Part II - Chromium-Based Catalysts Developed by Union Carbide 126 3.3 Next Generation Chromium-Based Ethylene Polymerization Catalysts for Commercial Operations 164 References 165 4. Single-Site Catalysts Based on Titanium or Zirconium for the Production of Polyethylene 167 4.1 Overview of Single-Site Catalysts 167 4.2 Polyethylene Structure Attained with a Single-Site Catalyst 169 4.3 Historical Background 172 4.4 Single-Site Catalyst Based on (BuCp)2ZrCl2/MAO and Silica for the Gas-Phase Manufacture of Polyethylene 193 4.5 Activation of the Metallocenes Cp2ZrCl2 or (BuCp)2ZrCl2 by Solid Acid Supports 197 4.6 Dow Chemical Company Constrained Geometry Single-Site Catalysts (CGC) 202 4.7 Novel Ethylene Copolymers Based on Single-Site Catalysts 205 4.8 Non-Metallocene Single-Site Catalysts 207 4.9 New Ethylene Copolymers Based on Single-Site Catalysts 211 4.10 Compatible Metallocene/Ziegler Catalyst System 215 4.11 Next Generation Catalysts 217 References 219 Appendix 4.I 222 5. Commercial Manufacture of Polyethylene 223 5.1 Introduction 223 5.2 Commercial Process Methods 226 5.3 Global Polyethylene Consumption 228 5.4 High-Pressure Polyethylene Manufacturing Process 229 5.5 Free-Radical Polymerization Mechanism for High-Pressure Polyethylene 243 5.6 Organic Peroxides as Free-Radical Source for Initiation Process 246 5.7 Structure of High-Pressure LDPE 248 5.8 Low-Pressure Process 255 5.9 Gas-Phase Process 274 5.10 Gas-Phase Process Licensors 290 5.11 Solution Process 294 5.12 DuPont Sclair Process 295 5.13 Solution Process (2012) 298 References 300 6 Fabrication of Polyethylene 303 6.1 Introduction 303 6.2 Early History of Polyethylene Fabrication (1940-1953) 308 6.3 Stabilization of Polyethylene 310 6.4 Historical Overview of Some Common Polyethylene Additives 316 6.5 Examples of Additives Presently Used in the Polyethylene Industry (2012) 318 6.6 Rheological Properties of Polyethylene 326 6.7 Fabrication of Film 327 6.8 Blown Film Extrusion 328 6.9 Fabrication of Polyethylene with Molding Methods 341 6.10 Rotational Molding 355 6.11 Thermoforming 357 References 359 7. Experimental Methods for Polyethylene Research Program 361 7.1 Introduction 361 7.2 Experimental Process 363 7.3 Important Considerations for Laboratory Slurry (Suspension) Polymerization Reactors 368 7.4 Polymerization Reactor Design for High-Throughput Methods 391 7.5 Polymer Characterization 393 7.6 Process Models 393 References 394

Read more less

Book SynopsisIt is intended that the book will be a practical guide to provide any reader with the basic information to help them understand what is necessary in order to produce a good barrier coated web or to improve the quality of any existing barrier product. After providing an introduction, where the terminology is outlined and some of the science is given (keeping the mathematics to a minimum), including barrier testing methods, the vacuum deposition process will be described. In theory a thin layer of metal or glass-like material should be enough to convert any polymer film into a perfect barrier material. The reality is that all barrier coatings have their performance limited by the defects in the coating. This book looks at the whole process from the source materials through to the post deposition handling of the coated material. This holistic view of the vacuum coating process provides a description of the common sources of defects and includes the possible methods of limiting tTable of ContentsBiography Acknowledgements Preface 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Packaging 5 1.1.1 Opaque Barrier 6 1.1.2 Transparent Barrier 8 1.2 Markets 10 References 16 2 Terminology 192.1 Hansen Solubility Parameter 29 2.2 Permeability Models 33 2.3 Barrier Improvement Factor 39 2.4 Tortuous Path Model 40 2.5 Terminology Summary 44 References 45 3 Measurements 51 3.1 Permeation Measurements 52 3.2 Durability Testing 60 3.3 Adhesion 65 3.4 Pinholes 67 3.5 Surface Energy 69 3.6 Coefficient of Friction 74 3.7 Coating Thickness 76 3.8 Coating Conductivity or Resistivity 79 3.9 Transmittance, Reflectance and Ellipseometry 80 3.10 Standard Test Methods 81 3.10.1 Permeability Tests 81 3.10.2 Other Mechanical or Optical Performance Tests 82 References 83 4 Materials 89 References 100 5 Packaging Materials Calculations 103 5.1 Demonstration Calculations 108 References 1126 Substrates, Surfaces, Quality and Defects 115 6.1 Substrates 115 6.1.1 Oligomers 120 6.1.2 Additives 121 6.1.3 Contamination 126 6.1.4 Surface Quality 132 6.2 Substrate Cleaning 134 6.3 Substrate Plasma Treatments 139 6.4 Wetting and Adhesion 149 6.5 Subbing or Planarisation Layers and Over-Coatings 157 References 161 7 Vacuum Deposition Processing 171 7.1 Nucleation, Growth and Modification 171 7.2 Managing the Substrate Heat Load 185 7.3 Web Winding in Vacuum 205 7.4 Troubleshooting 222 References 224 8 Vacuum Deposition 231 8.1 Resistance Heated Evaporation 232 8.2 Plasma Enhanced Chemical Vapour Deposition (PECVD) 249 8.3 Electron Beam Evaporation Sources 251 8.4 Induction Heated Evaporation Source 254 8.5 Magnetron Sputter Deposition Sources 255 8.6 Atomic Layer Deposition (ALD) 265 8.7 Other Deposition Processes 271 References 272 9 Summary 285 9.1 Cleanliness 285 9.2 Substrates 286 9.3 Coatings 287 9.4 Over Coatings 288 9.5 Multilayers 288 9.6 Conclusion 288

Read more less

Book SynopsisPROJECT MANAGEMENT 2.0 MASTER PROJECT MANAGEMENT FOR A VIRTUAL WORLD In this full color guide, Project Management expert Harold Kerzner provides much needed guidance on today's changing project management mechanics, especially the growing importance of value metrics and key performance indicators. In Project Management 2.0, Kerzner explains how PM 2.0 offers better outcomes with a focus on new tools, better governance, and improved collaboration. Kerzner also compares various methodologies and examines how PM 2.0 facilitates problem solving and decision making. You'll find essential background on PM 2.0, as well as a detailed examination of web-based project management tools and how to use them. Improve project governance and collaboration with stakeholders Achieve more meaningful information reporting with KPIs, metrics, and dashboards Discover easier ways for teams to work together from different locations Gain an understaTable of ContentsPreface ix Acknowledgment xi Foreword xiii Why This Story Makes Sense xiv Through The Looking Glass At A Chaotic Future Is It Half Empty Or Half Full Or Just Plain Complicated? xvi So What Does All This Mean To You? xvii Chapter 1 Project Management 2.0 1 1.0 Introduction: Changing Times 1 1.1 Characteristics of PM 1.0 1 1.2 Other Critical Issues with PM 1.0 2 1.3 Project Management 2.0 4 1.4 Criticism of PM 2.0 7 1.5 Project Management 2.0 : Technological Blessing or Curse? 7 1.6 Policing PM 2.0 12 1.7 Working with Stakeholders in PM 2.0 13 Today’s View of Stakeholder Relations Management 14 Need for Meaningful Information 15 All That Glitters Is Not Gold 15 1.8 Finding the Information 16 1.9 Percent Complete Dilemma 17 1.10 Information Overload 18 1.11 Customer Satisfaction Headache 18 1.12 Determining Project Health 19 1.13 Dashboard Rules for Displaying Data 20 1.14 Reduction in Cost of Paperwork 21 1.15 Reduction in Executive Meddling 22 1.16 Project Management Skills 23 1.17 Contingency Planning 23 Discussion Questions 24 Chapter 2 A Peek into the Future of Project Management 25 2.0 Changing Times 25 2.1 Impact of Recessions 25 2.2 Executive View of Project Management 26 2.3 Engagement Project Management 28 2.4 Growth of More Complex Projects 30 2.5 Need for Additional Metrics 31 2.6 New Developments in Project Management 32 2.7 Project Manager’s Tool Box 33 2.8 Need for Continuous Improvement 34 2.9 Conclusions 34 Discussion Questions 34 Chapter 3 Understanding Success and Failure 37 3.0 Introduction 37 3.1 Project Management—Early Years: 1945–1960 38 3.2 Project Management Begins to Grow: 1970–1985 39 3.3 Growth in Competing Constraints 40 3.4 Rule of Inversion 42 3.5 Growth in Measurement Techniques 43 3.6 Trade-Offs 44 3.7 Putting Together Components of Success 45 3.8 New Definition of Success 46 3.9 Understanding Project Failure 47 3.10 Causes of Project Failure 50 Discussion Questions 52 Chapter 4 Value-Driven Project Management 53 4.0 Introduction 53 4.1 Understanding Today’s View of Value 54 4.2 Value Modeling 56 4.3 Value and Leadership Changes for PM 2.0 58 4.4 Value-Based Trade-Offs 62 4.5 Need for Value Metrics 64 4.6 Creating a Value Metric 64 4.7 Displaying Value Metrics in a Dashboard 71 4.8 Selecting Value Attributes 72 4.9 Additional Complexities with Value Metrics 73 Discussion Questions 76 Chapter 5 Growing Importance of Metrics with PM 2.0 77 5.0 Introduction 77 5.1 Enterprise Resource Planning 77 5.2 Need for Better Project Metrics 78 5.3 Causes for Lack of Support for Metrics Management 80 5.4 Characteristics of a Metric 81 5.5 Metrics Selection 82 5.6 Key Performance Indicators 83 Need for KPIs 84 Using KPIs 86 Anatomy of a KPI 86 KPI Characteristics 88 KPI Failures 89 5.7 Dashboards and Scorecards 90 5.8 Business Intelligence 93 5.9 Growth in Dashboard Information Systems 93 5.10 Selecting an Infographics Designer 94 5.11 Project Health Check Metrics 95 5.12 Maintaining Project’s Direction 99 5.13 Metrics and Virtual Teams 99 5.14 Metric Mania 100 5.15 Metric Training Sessions 101 5.16 Metric Owners 102 5.17 Answering Metric Questions 103 Discussion Questions 103 Chapter 6 Project Management Methodologies: 1.0 versus 2.0 105 6.0 Introduction 105 6.1 PM 2.0 Definition of Project Management Excellence 105 6.2 Need for A Methodology 106 6.3 Need for AN Enterprisewide Methodology 108 Light Methodologies 109 Heavy Methodologies 110 6.4 Benefits of A Standardized Methodology 112 6.5 Critical Components 114 6.6 From Methodologies to Framework 116 6.7 Life-Cycle Phases 116 6.8 Drivers for PM 2.0 Client-Centered Flexibility 117 6.9 Understanding Moving Targets 118 6.10 Need for Client-Specific Metrics 119 6.11 Business Case Development 119 6.12 Validating Assumptions 120 Types of Assumptions 121 Documenting Assumptions 122 6.13 Design Freezes 123 6.14 Customer Approvals 124 6.15 Agile Project Management Methodology 125 6.16 Implementing Methodology 127 6.17 Implementation Blunders 128 6.18 Overcoming Development and Implementation Barriers 128 6.19 Using Crisis Dashboards with Methodologies 129 Understanding Targets 130 Defining a Crisis 131 Crisis Dashboard Images 134 Conclusions 138 6.20 Shutting Down the Project 138 Discussion Questions 139 Chapter 7 Project Governance 141 7.0 Introduction 141 7.1 Need for Governance 141 7.2 Defining Project Governance 142 7.3 Project versus Corporate Governance 143 7.4 Roles, Responsibilities, and Decision-Making Authority 144 7.5 Governance Frameworks 145 7.6 Three Pillars of Project Governance 146 Core Project Governance Principles 147 7.7 Misinterpretation of Information 151 7.8 Filtering the Information 152 7.9 Understanding Politics in Project Environment 152 Political Risks 153 Reasons for Playing Politics 154 Situations Where Political Games Will Occur 154 Governance Committee 155 Friends and Foes 156 Attack or Retreat 156 Need for Effective Communications 158 Power and Influence 158 Managing Project Politics 159 7.10 Managing Global Stakeholder Relations 160 7.11 Failure of Project Governance 161 7.12 Saving Distressed Projects 162 Discussion Questions 163 Chapter 8 Role of Project Manager in Strategic Planning and Portfolio Management 165 8.0 Introduction 165 8.1 Why Strategic Plans Often Fail 166 8.2 Project Management: Executive Perspective 167 8.3 Strategic Planning: Project Management Perspective 167 8.4 Generic Strategic Planning 169 8.5 Benefits of Project Management 172 8.6 Dispelling Myths 173 8.7 Ways That Project Management Helps Strategic Planning 176 8.8 Transformational Project Management Leadership 179 8.9 Project Manager’s Role in Portfolio Management 183 8.10 Value Management and Benefits Realization 184 Understanding the Terminology 185 Life-Cycle Phases 186 Understanding Value 192 8.11 Benefits Realization Metrics 193 8.12 Portfolio Management Governance 195 Discussion Questions 197 Chapter 9 R&D Project Management 199 9.0 Introduction 199 9.1 Role of R&D in Strategic Planning 200 9.2 Product Portfolio Analysis 202 9.3 Marketing Involvement with R&D Project Managers 205 First to Market 205 Follow the Leader 206 Application Engineering 207 “Me Too” 207 9.4 Product Life Cycles 208 9.5 R&D Project Planning According to Market Share 208 9.6 Classification of R&D Projects 209 9.7 Research versus Development 210 9.8 R&D Ratio 211 Manufacturing and Sales 211 Human Behavior 212 9.9 Offensive-versus-Defensive R&D 212 9.10 Modeling R&D Planning Function 213 9.11 Priority Setting 216 Working with Marketing 216 9.12 Contract R&D 218 9.13 Nondisclosure Agreements, Secrecy Agreements, and Confidentiality Agreements 219 9.14 Government Influence 219 9.15 Sources of Ideas 220 9.16 Economic Evaluation of Projects 223 9.17 R&D Project Readjustments 225 9.18 Project Termination 227 9.19 Tracking R&D Performance 228 Discussion Questions 228 Chapter 10 Problem Solving and Decision Making 229 10.0 Introduction 229 10.1 Understanding Concepts 230 Necessity for Problem Solving and Decision Making 230 Research Techniques in Basic Decision-Making Process 230 Facts about Problem Solving and Decision Making 231 Information Overload 231 Getting Access to Right Information 232 Lack of Information 233 Project versus Business Problem Solving and Decision Making 233 10.2 Project Environment: Its Impact on Problem Solving and Decision Making 234 Impact of Constraints on Project Problem Solving and Decision Making 234 Impact of Assumptions on Project Problem Solving and Decision Making 235 Understanding Project Environment 235 Selecting Right Project Manager 236 10.3 Conceptual Problem-Solving and Decision-Making Process 236 Determining the Steps 237 10.4 Identifying and Understanding a Problem 238 Real Problems versus Personality Problems 238 Not All Problems Can Be Solved 239 Complexity of Problems 240 Technique for Problem Identification 240 Individual Problem Solving Conducted in Secret 241 Team Problem Solving Conducted in Secret 241 10.5 Gathering Problem-Related Data 242 Reason for Data Gathering 242 Data-Gathering Techniques 242 Setting Limits on Problem Solving and Decision Making 243 Identifying Boundary Conditions 243 Determining Who Should Attend Problem-Solving Meeting 244 Determining Who Should Attend Decision-Making Meeting 244 Creating Framework for Meeting 245 Understanding How People React in Meetings 245 Working with Participants during Meetings 246 Leadership Techniques during Meetings 246 Handling Problem-Solving and Decision-Making Conflicts 247 Continuous Solutions versus Enhancement Project Solutions 247 Problem Solving versus Scope Creep 248 Problem Solving and Decision Making during Crisis Projects 248 10.6 Analyzing Data 249 Questions to Ask 249 10.7 Developing Alternative Solutions 249 Variables to Consider during Alternative Analyses 250 Understanding Features That Are Part of Alternatives 251 Developing Hybrid Alternatives 251 Trade-Offs 251 Common Mistakes When Developing Alternatives 252 10.8 Problem-Solving Tools and Techniques 252 Root-Cause Analysis 252 General Principles of RCA 253 Corrective Actions Using RCA 254 RCA Techniques 254 Brainstorming 255 Rules for Brainstorming 255 Critical Steps in Brainstorming 256 Conducting Brainstorming Session: Process 257 Conducting Brainstorming Session: Evaluation 257 Brainstorming Sessions: Nominal Group Technique 257 Group-Passing Technique 258 Team Idea-Mapping Method 258 Electronic Brainstorming 258 Directed Brainstorming 259 Individual Brainstorming 259 Question Brainstorming 260 10.9 Creativity and Innovation 260 Creativity, Innovation, and Value 261 Negative Innovation 261 Types of Innovative Solutions 262 Problem-Solving and Decision-Making Attributes That Are Difficult to Teach 262 Creative Roadblocks 263 10.10 Decision Making: Selecting Best Solution 263 Understanding How Decisions Are Made 263 Routine Decision Making 264 Adaptive Decision Making 264 Innovative Decision Making 265 Pressured Decision Making 265 Decision-Making Meetings 266 Decision-Making Stages 266 Decision-Making Steps 266 Advantages of Group Decision Making 267 Disadvantages of Group Decision Making 267 Rational versus Intuitive Thinking 268 Divergent versus Convergent Thinking 268 Polarity Management 269 Fear of Decision Making: Mental Roadblocks 269 Danger of Hasty Decisions 270 Decision-Making Styles 270 Autocratic Decision Maker 271 Fearful Decision Maker 271 Circular Decision Maker 272 Democratic Decision Maker 272 Self-Serving Decision Maker 273 10.11 Decision Making: Tools and Methods 273 SWOT Analysis 274 Pareto Analysis 274 Multiple-Criteria Decision Analysis 275 Paired-Comparison Analysis 275 Influence Diagrams 276 Affinity Diagrams 276 Game Theory 277 Cost–Benefit Analysis 277 Nominal Work Groups 278 Delphi Techniques 278 Other Decision-Making Tools 279 10.12 Evaluating Decision and Taking Corrective Action 279 Time to Implement Solution 281 Discussion Questions 282 Chapter 11 Need for Project Management 283 11.0 Background to Project Management Maturity Models 283 11.1 Some Benefits of Using a Maturity Model 284 11.2 Determining Amount of Maturity Needed 284 11.3 Getting Started 285 11.4 Things Can Go Wrong 285 11.5 Choosing Right Maturity Model 285 11.6 Estimating Time to Reach Maturity 286 11.7 Strategic Planning for Project Management Maturity 286 11.8 Project Management Maturity Model 287 11.9 PM 2.0 Input into PMMM 291 Discussion Questions 292 Chapter 12 Using the PMO to Spearhead PM 2.0 295 12.0 Introduction 295 12.1 Traditional Project Office 295 12.2 Traditional PMO 296 12.3 Implementation Risks 297 12.4 Specialized PMO 298 12.5 Strategic PMO 299 12.6 Networking PMOs 300 12.7 Trust of Project Governance 300 12.8 Ways a PMO Can Fail 301 Unclear Mission Statement 301 Failing to Focus on Impact to Business 302 Failing to Gain Implementation Support 302 Discussion Questions 309 Index 311

Read more less

Book SynopsisComprehensively introduces linear and nonlinear structural analysis through mesh generation, solid mechanics and a new numerical methodology called c-type finite element method Takes a self-contained approach of including all the essential background materials such as differential geometry, mesh generation, tensor analysis with particular elaboration on rotation tensor, finite element methodology and numerical analysis for a thorough understanding of the topics Presents for the first time in closed form the geometric stiffness, the mass, the gyroscopic damping and the centrifugal stiffness matrices for beams, plates and shells Includes numerous examples and exercises Presents solutions for locking problems Trade Review"Comprehensively introduces linear and nonlinear structural analysis through mesh generation, solid mechanics and a new numerical methodology called c-type finite element method." (Zentralblatt MATH 2016)Table of ContentsAcknowledgements xi 1 Introduction: Background and Motivation 1 1.1 What This Book Is All About 1 1.2 A Brief Historical Perspective 2 1.3 Symbiotic Structural Analysis 9 1.4 Linear Curved Beams and Arches 9 1.5 Geometrically Nonlinear Curved Beams and Arches 10 1.6 Geometrically Nonlinear Plates and Shells 11 1.7 Symmetry of the Tangent Operator: Nonlinear Beams and Shells 12 1.8 Road Map of the Book 14 References 15 Part I ESSENTIAL MATHEMATICS 19 2 Mathematical Preliminaries 21 2.1 Essential Preliminaries 21 2.2 Affine Space, Vectors and Barycentric Combination 33 2.3 Generalization: Euclidean to Riemannian Space 36 2.4 Where We Would Like to Go 40 3 Tensors 41 3.1 Introduction 41 3.2 Tensors as Linear Transformation 44 3.3 General Tensor Space 46 3.4 Tensor by Component Transformation Property 50 3.5 Special Tensors 57 3.6 Second-order Tensors 62 3.7 Calculus Tensor 74 3.8 Partial Derivatives of Tensors 74 3.9 Covariant or Absolute Derivative 75 3.10 Riemann–Christoffel Tensor: Ordered Differentiation 78 3.11 Partial (PD) and Covariant (C.D.) Derivatives of Tensors 79 3.12 Partial Derivatives of Scalar Functions of Tensors 80 3.13 Partial Derivatives of Tensor Functions of Tensors 81 3.14 Partial Derivatives of Parametric Functions of Tensors 81 3.15 Differential Operators 82 3.16 Gradient Operator: GRAD(∙) or ∇(∙) 82 3.17 Divergence Operator: DIV or ∇∙ 84 3.18 Integral Transforms: Green–Gauss Theorems 87 3.19 Where We Would Like to Go 90 4 Rotation Tensor 91 4.1 Introduction 91 4.2 Cayley’s Representation 100 4.3 Rodrigues Parameters 107 4.4 Euler – Rodrigues Parameters 112 4.5 Hamilton’s Quaternions 115 4.6 Hamilton–Rodrigues Quaternion 119 4.7 Derivatives, Angular Velocity and Variations 125 Part II ESSENTIAL MESH GENERATION 133 5 Curves: Theory and Computation 135 5.1 Introduction 135 5.2 Affine Transformation and Ratios 136 5.3 Real Parametric Curves: Differential Geometry 139 5.4 Frenet–Serret Derivatives 145 5.5 Bernstein Polynomials 148 5.6 Non-rational Curves Bezier–Bernstein–de Casteljau 154 5.7 Composite Bezier–Bernstein Curves 181 5.8 Splines: Schoenberg B-spline Curves 185 5.9 Recursive Algorithm: de Boor–Cox Spline 195 5.10 Rational Bezier Curves: Conics and Splines 198 5.11 Composite Bezier Form: Quadratic and Cubic B-spline Curves 215 5.12 Curve Fitting: Interpolations 229 5.13 Where We Would Like to Go 245 6 Surfaces: Theory and Computation 247 6.1 Introduction 247 6.2 Real Parametric Surface: Differential Geometry 248 6.3 Gauss–Weingarten Formulas: Optimal Coordinate System 272 6.4 Cartesian Product Bernstein–Bezier Surfaces 280 6.5 Control Net Generation: Cartesian Product Surfaces 296 6.6 Composite Bezier Form: Quadratic and Cubic B-splines 300 6.7 Triangular Bezier–Bernstein Surfaces 306 Part III ESSENTIAL MECHANICS 323 7 Nonlinear Mechanics: A Lagrangian Approach 325 7.1 Introduction 325 7.2 Deformation Geometry: Strain Tensors 326 7.3 Balance Principles: Stress Tensors 337 7.4 Constitutive Theory: Hyperelastic Stress–Strain Relation 351 Part IV A NEW FINITE ELEMENT METHOD 365 8 C-type Finite Element Method 367 8.1 Introduction 367 8.2 Variational Formulations 369 8.3 Energy Precursor to Finite Element Method 386 8.4 c-type FEM: Linear Elasticity and Heat Conduction 402 8.5 Newton Iteration and Arc Length Constraint 438 8.6 Gauss–Legendre Quadrature Formulas 446 Part V APPLICATIONS: LINEAR AND NONLINEAR 457 9 Application to Linear Problems and Locking Solutions 459 9.1 Introduction 459 9.2 c-type Truss and Bar Element 460 9.3 c-type Straight Beam Element 465 9.4 c-type Curved Beam Element 484 9.5 c-type Deep Beam: Plane Stress Element 498 9.6 c-type Solutions: Locking Problems 509 10 Nonlinear Beams 523 10.1 Introduction 523 10.2 Beam Geometry: Definition and Assumptions 530 10.3 Static and Dynamic Equations: Engineering Approach 534 10.4 Static and Dynamic Equations: Continuum Approach – 3D to 1D 539 10.5 Weak Form: Kinematic and Configuration Space 555 10.6 Admissible Virtual Space: Curvature, Velocity and Variation 560 10.7 Real Strain and Strain Rates from Weak Form 570 10.8 Component or Operational Vector Form 580 10.9 Covariant Derivatives of Component Vectors 587 10.10 Computational Equations of Motion: Component Vector Form 590 10.11 Computational Derivatives and Variations 596 10.12 Computational Virtual Work Equations 607 10.13 Computational Virtual Work Equations and Virtual Strains: Revisited 614 10.14 Computational Real Strains 627 10.15 Hyperelastic Material Property 630 10.16 Covariant Linearization of Virtual Work 639 10.17 Material Stiffness Matrix and Symmetry 655 10.18 Geometric Stiffness Matrix and Symmetry 658 10.19 c-type FE Formulation: Dynamic Loading 673 10.20 c-type FE Implementation and Examples: Quasi-static Loading 685 11 Nonlinear Shell 721 11.1 Introduction 721 11.2 Shell Geometry: Definition and Assumptions 727 11.3 Static and Dynamic Equations: Continuum Approach – 3D to 2D 746 11.4 Static and Dynamic Equations: Continuum Approach – Revisited 763 11.5 Static and Dynamic Equations: Engineering Approach 771 11.6 Weak Form: Kinematic and Configuration Space 783 11.7 Admissible Virtual Space: Curvature, Velocity and Variation 788 11.8 Real Strain and Strain Rates from Weak Form 799 11.9 Component or Operational Vector Form 810 11.10 Covariant Derivatives of Component Vectors 817 11.11 Computational Equations of Motion: Component Vector Form 820 11.12 Computational Derivatives and Variations 830 11.13 Computational Virtual Work Equations 841 11.14 Computational Virtual Work Equations and Virtual Strains: Revisited 851 11.15 Computational Real Strains 861 11.16 Hyperelastic Material Property 864 11.17 Covariant Linearization of Virtual Work 877 11.18 c-type FE Formulation: Dynamic Loading 891 11.19 c-type FE Formulation: Quasi-static Loading 914 11.20 c-type FE Implementation and Examples: Quasi-static Loading 930 Index 967

Read more less

Book SynopsisGraphene Materials: Fundamentals and Emerging Applications brings together innovative methodologies with research and development strategies to provide a detailed state-of-the-art overview of the processing, properties, and technology developments of graphene materials and their wide-ranging applications. The applications areas covered are biosensing, energy storage, environmental monitoring, and health. The book discusses the various methods that have been developed for the preparation and functionalization of single-layered graphene nanosheets. These form the essential building blocks for the bottom-up architecture of various graphene materials because they possess unique physico-chemical properties such as large surface areas, good conductivity and mechanical strength, high thermal stability and desirable flexibility. The electronic behavior in graphene, such as dirac fermions obtained due to the interaction with the ions of the lattice, has led to the discovery of Table of ContentsPreface xv Foreword by Rosita Yakimova xix Part 1: Fundamentals of Graphene and Graphene-Based Nanocomposites 1 1 Graphene and Related Two-Dimensional Materials 3Manas Mandal, Anirban Maitra, Tanya Das and Chapal Kumar Das 1.1 Introduction 4 1.2 Preparation of Graphene Oxide by Modified Hummer’s Method 6 1.3 Dispersion of Graphene Oxide in Organic Solvents 6 1.4 Paper-like Graphene Oxide 7 1.5 Thin Films of Graphene Oxide and Graphene 7 1.6 Nanocomposites of Graphene Oxide 8 1.7 Graphene-Based Materials 9 1.8 Graphene-like 2D Materials 10 1.8.1 Tungsten Sulfide 10 1.8.2 Molybdenum Sulfide 14 1.8.3 Tin Sulfide 15 1.8.4 Tin Selenide 17 1.8.5 Manganese Dioxide 17 1.8.6 Nickel Oxide 18 1.8.7 Boron Nitride 19 1.9 Conclusion 20 References 20 2 Surface Functionalization of Graphene 25Mojtaba Bagherzadeh and Anahita Farahbakhsh 2.1 Introduction 25 2.2 Noncovalent Functionalization of Graphene 27 2.3 Covalent Functionalization of Graphene 34 2.3.1 Nucleophilic Substitution Reaction 34 2.3.2 Electrophilic Substitution Reaction 41 2.3.3 Condensation Reaction 42 2.3.4 Addition Reaction 50 2.4 Graphene–Nanoparticles 51 2.4.1 Metals NPs: Au, Pd, Pt, Ag 54 2.4.2 Metal oxide NPs: ZnO, SnO2, TiO2, SiO2,RuO2, Mn3O4, Co3O4, and Fe3O4 54 2.4.3 Semiconducting NPs: CdSe, CdS, ZnS, CdTe and Graphene QD 56 2.5 Conclusion 58 References 58 3 Architecture and Applications of Functional Th ree-dimensional Graphene Networks 67Ramendra Sundar Dey and Qijin Chi 3.1 Introduction 68 3.1.1 Synthesis of 3D Porous Graphene-Based Materials 69 3.1.2 Overview of 3DG Structures 73 3.2 Applications 77 3.2.1 Supercapacitor 77 3.2.2 Fuel Cells 91 3.2.3 Sensors 92 3.2.4 Other Applications 93 3.3 Summary, Conclusion, Outlook 93 Abbreviations 94 References 94 4 Covalent Graphene-Polymer Nanocomposites 101Horacio J. Salavagione 4.1 Introduction 101 4.2 Properties of Graphene for Polymer Reinforcement 102 4.3 Graphene and Graphene-like Materials 103 4.4 Methods of Production 104 4.5 Chemistry of Graphene 108 4.6 Conventional Graphene Based Polymer Nanocomposites 109 4.7 Covalent Graphene-polymer Nanocomposites 112 4.8 Grafting-From Approaches 114 4.8.1 Living Radical Polymerizations 115 4.8.2 Other Approaches 123 4.9 Grafting-to Approaches 126 4.9.1 Graphene Oxide-based Chemistry 127 4.9.2 Crosslinking Reactions 130 4.9.3 Click Chemistry 131 4.9.4 Other Grafting-to Approaches 137 4.10 Conclusions 140 References 141 Part 2: Emerging Applications of Graphene in Energy, Health, Environment and Sensors 151 5 Magnesium Matrix Composites Reinforced with Graphene Nanoplatelets 153Muhammad Rashad, Fusheng Pan and Muhammad Asif 5.1 Introduction 154 5.1.1 Magnesium 154 5.1.2 Metal Matrix Composites 154 5.1.3 Graphene Nanoplatelets (GNPs) 155 5.2 Effect of Graphene Nanoplatelets on Mechanical Properties of Pure Magnesium 156 5.2.1 Introduction 156 5.2.2 Synthesis 157 5.2.3 Microstructural Characterization 157 5.2.4 Crystallographic Texture Measurements 158 5.2.5 Mechanical Characterization 160 5.2.6 Conclusions 163 5.3 Synergetic Effect of Graphene Nanoplatelets (GNPs) and Multi-walled Carbon Nanotube (MW-CNTs) on Mechanical Properties of Pure Magnesium 164 5.3.1 Introduction 164 5.3.2 Synthesis 165 5.3.3 Microstructure Characterization 166 5.3.4 Mechanical Characterization 169 5.3.5 Conclusions 174 5.4 Effect of Graphene Nanoplatelets (GNPs) Addition on Strength and Ductility of Magnesium-Titanium Alloys 175 5.4.1 Introduction 175 5.4.2 Synthesis 176 5.4.3 Microstructure Characterization 176 5.4.4 Mechanical Characterization 178 5.4.5 Conclusions 179 5.5 Effect of Graphene Nanoplatelets on Tensile Properties of Mg–1%Al–1%Sn Alloy 180 5.5.1 Introduction 180 5.5.2 Synthesis 180 5.5.3 Microstructure Characterization 180 5.5.4 Mechanical Characterization 181 5.5.5 Conclusions 184 Acknowledgments 184 References 185 6 Graphene and Its Derivatives for Energy Storage 191Malgorzata Aleksandrzak and Ewa Mijowska 6.1 Introduction 191 6.2 Graphene in Lithium Batteries 192 6.2.1 Lithium Ion Batteries 193 6.2.2 Lithium-Oxygen Batteries 201 6.2.3 Lithium-Sulfur Batteries 206 6.3 Graphene in Supercapacitors 212 6.4 Summary 218 References 218 7 Graphene-Polypyrrole Nanocomposite: An Ideal Electroactive Material for High Performance Supercapacitors 225Alagiri Mani, Khosro Zangene Kamali, Alagarsamy Pandikumar, Lim Yee Seng, Lim Hong Ngee and Huang Nay Ming 7.1 Introduction 226 7.2 Renewable Energy Sources 226 7.3 Importance of Energy Storage 227 7.4 Supercapacitors 228 7.5 Principle and Operation of Supercapacitiors 228 7.6 Electrode Materials for Supercapacitors 230 7.7 Graphene-based Supercapacitors and Th eir Limitations 231 7.8 Graphene-Polymer-Composite-based Supercapacitors 232 7.9 Graphene-Polypyrrole Nanocomposite-based Supercapacitiors 233 7.10 Fabrication of Graphene-Polypyrrole Nanocomposite for Supercapacitiors 233 7.11 Performance of Graphene-Polypyrrole Nanocomposite-based Supercapacitors 239 7.12 Summary and Outlooks 240 References 243 8 Hydrophobic ZnO Anchored Graphene Nanocomposite Based Bulk Hetro-junction Solar Cells to Improve Short Circuit Current Density 245Rajni Sharma, Firoz Alam, A.K. Sharma, V. Dutta and S.K. Dhawan 8.1 Introduction 246 8.2 Economic Expectations of OPV 248 8.3 Device Architecture 253 8.3.1 Bulk-heterojunction Structure 252 8.4 Operational Principles 253 8.4.1 Series and Shunt Resistance 255 8.4.2 Standard Test Conditions 256 8.5 Experimental procedure for synthesis of hydrophobic nanomaterials 258 8.5.1 Zinc Oxide Nanoparticles 258 8.5.2 ZnO Nanoparticle Decorated Graphene (Z@G) Nanocomposite 259 8.6 Characterization of Synthesized ZnO Nanoparticles and ZnO Decorated Graphene (Z@G) Nanocomposite 259 8.6.1 Structural Analysis 259 8.6.2 Morphological Analysis 260 8.6.3 Optical Analysis 262 8.6.4 FTIR (Fourier Transform Infrared) Spectroscopy 263 8.6.5 Raman Spectroscopy 265 8.6.6 Hydrophobicity Measurement 266 8.7 Hybrid Solar Cell Fabrication and Characterization 267 8.7.1 Device Fabrication 267 8.7.2 J-V (Current density-Voltage) Characteristics 267 8.8. Conclusion 272 Acknowledgement 273 References 273 9 Three-dimensional Graphene Bimetallic Nanocatalysts Foam for Energy Storage and Biosensing 277Chih-Chien Kung, Liming Dai, Xiong Yu and Chung-Chiun Liu 9.1 Background and Introduction 278 9.1.1 Biosensors 278 9.1.2 Fuel Cells 280 9.1.3 Bimetallic Nanocatalysts 282 9.1.4 Carbon Supported Materials 282 9.1.5 Rotating Disk Electrode 284 9.1.6 Cyclic Voltammetry and Chronoamperometric Techniques 286 9.1.7 Methods of Estimating Limit of Detection (LOD) 288 9.1.8 CO Stripping for the Estimation of the Catalyst Surface Area 288 9.1.9 Brunauer, Emmett and Teller (BET) Measurement 288 9.1.10 Motivations of the Study 289 9.2 Preparation and Characterization of Three Dimensional Graphene Foam Supported Platinum-Ruthenium Bimetallic Nanocatalysts for Hydrogen Peroxide Based Electrochemical Biosensors 290 9.2.1 Introduction 290 9.2.2 Experimental 291 9.2.3 Results and Discussion 294 9.2.4 Conclusion for H2O2 Detection in Biosensing 307 9.3 Three dimensional graphene Foam Supported Platinum–Ruthenium Bimetallic Nanocatalysts for Direct Methanol and Direct Ethanol Fuel Cell Applications 307 9.3.1 Introduction 308 9.3.2 Experimental 309 9.3.3 Results and Discussion 311 9.3.4 Conclusion for Methanol and Ethanol Oxidation Reactions in Energy Storage 319 9.4 Conclusions 319 Acknowledgments 320 References 320 10 Electrochemical Sensing and Biosensing Platforms Using Graphene and Graphene-based Nanocomposites 325Sandeep Kumar Vashist and John H.T. Luong 10.1 Introduction 326 10.2 Fabrication of Graphene and Its Derivatives 328 10.2.1 Exfoliation 328 10.2.2 Chemical Vapor Deposition (CVD) 330 10.2.3 Miscellaneous Techniques 331 10.3 Properties of Graphene and Its Derivatives 332 10.4 Electrochemistry of Graphene 333 10.5 Graphene and Graphene-Based Nanocomposites as Electrode Materials 335 10.6 Electrochemical Sensing/Biosensing 336 10.6.1 Glucose 336 10.6.2 DNA/Proteins/Cells 341 10.6.3 Other Small Electroactive Analytes 344 10.7 Challenges and Future Trends 347 References 351 11 Applications of Graphene Electrodes in Health and Environmental Monitoring 361Georgia-Paraskevi Nikoleli, Susana Campuzano, José M. Pingarrón and Dimitrios P. Nikolelis 11.1 Biosensors Based on Nanostructured Materials 362 11.2 Graphene Nanomaterials Used in Electrochemical (bio) Sensors Fabrication 363 11.3 Miniaturized Graphene Nanostructured Biosensors for Health Monitoring 365 11.3.1 Graphene in Bio-field-eff ect Transistors 365 11.3.2 Graphene Impedimetric Biosensors 367 11.3.3 Graphene in Electrochemical Biosensors 368 11.4 Miniaturized Graphene Nanostructured Biosensors for Environmental Monitoring 377 11.4.1 Detection of Toxic Gases in Air 377 11.4.2 Detection of Heavy Metal Ions 379 11.4.3 Detection of Organic Pollutants 381 11.5 Conclusions and Future Prospects 384 Acknowledgements 386 References 386 Index 393

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides an overview for understanding an organization s working culture and provides guidance on why a good culture is essential for safe, cost-effective, and high quality operations.Table of ContentsSupplemental Material Available on the Web XIII Acronyms and Abbreviations XV Glossary XVII Acknowledgements XIX Preface XXIII Nomenclature XXVII Executive Summary XXIX 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Importance of Process Safety Culture 1 1.2 Definition of Process Safety Culture 2 1.3 Warning Signs of Poor Process Safety Culture 11 1.4 Leadership and Management Roles and Responsibilities 13 1.5 Organizational Culture, Process Safety Culture, and Business Success 15 1.6 Corporate Climate and Chemistry 17 1.7 Summary 17 1.8 References 20 2 Process Safety Culture Core Principles 23 2.1 Establish an Imperative for Process Safety 25 2.2 Provide Strong Leadership 29 2.3 Foster Mutual Trust 32 2.4 Ensure Open and Frank Communications 35 2.5 Maintain a Sense of Vulnerability 42 2.6 Understand and Act Upon Hazards/Risks 49 2.7 Empower Individuals to Successfully Fulfill their Process Safety Responsibilities 54 2.8 Defer to Expertise 57 2.9 Combat the Normalization of Deviance 59 2.10 Learn to Assess and Advance the Culture 67 2.11 Summary 72 2.12 References 73 3 Leadership for Process Safety Culture within the Organizational Structure 77 3.1 Definition of Process Safety Leadership 77 3.2 Characteristics of Leadership and Management in Process Safety Culture 83 3.3 Leadership Vs. Management 96 3.4 Consistency of Process Safety Messages 97 3.5 Turnover of Leadership, Succession Planning, and Organizational Management of Change 98 3.6 Summary 103 3.7 References 104 4 Applying the Core Principles of Process Safety Culture 107 4.1 Human Behavior and Process Safety Culture 107 4.2 Process Safety Culture and Compensation 109 4.3 Process Safety Culture and Ethics 113 4.4 External Influences on Culture 124 4.6 Summary 153 4.7 References 154 5 Aligning Culture with PSMS Elements 157 5.1 Senior Leader Element Grouping 160 5.2 Risk Management-Related Element Grouping 170 5.3 Process-Related Element Grouping 181 5.4 Worker-Related Element Grouping 190 5.5 References 201 6 Where Do You Start? 203 6.1 Introduction 203 6.2 Assess the Organization’s Process Safety Culture 204 6.3 Improving the Process Safety Culture of the Organization 225 6.4 Summary 236 6.5 References 237 7 Sustaining Process Safety Culture 239 7.2 Sustainability of Process Safety Culture 241 7.3 Process Safety Culture and Operational Excellence 248 7.4 Summary 251 7.5 References 253 Appendices 255 Appendix A: Echo Strategies White Paper 257 Appendix B: Other Safety & Process Safety Culture Frameworks 259 B.1 The Seven Basic Rules of the USA. Naval Nuclear Propulsion Program 259 B.2 Advancing Safety in the Oil and Gas Industry –Statement on Safety Culture (Canadian National Energy Board) 261 B.3 References 271 Appendix C: As Low as Reasonably Practicable 273 C.1 ALARP Principle 273 C.2 References 275 Appendix D High Reliability Organizations 277 D.1 The HRO Concept 277 D.2 References 286 Appendix E: Process Safety Culture Case Histories 287 E.1 Minimalist PSMS 287 E.2 – Peer Pressure to Startup 288 E.3 Taking a Minimalist Approach to Regulatory Applicability 290 E.4 Not Taking a Minimalist Approach to Process Safety Applicability 291 E.5 What Gets Measured Can Get Corrupted 291 E.6 KPIs That Always Satisfy 293 E.7 Abusing ITPM Extensions/Deferrals 295 E.8 The VPP Defense 296 E.9 Double Jeopardy 297 E.10 Best Case Consequences 298 E.11 New Kid in Town 299 E.12 The Blame Game 299 E.13 Conflicts of Interest 300 E.14 No Incidents? Not Always Good News 301 E.15 Check-the-Box Process Safety Management Systems 302 E.16 There’s No Energy for That Here 302 E.17 Not Invented Here 303 E.18 PHA Silos 304 E.19 Knowing What You Don’t Know 305 E.20 Bad News is Bad 306 E.21 The Co-Employment Trap 306 E.22 Stop Work Authority/Initiating an Emergency Shutdown 307 E.23 SWPs by the Numbers 308 E.24 Incomplete MOC 309 E.25 Post-MOCs 310 E.26 Mergers & Acquisitions 310 E.27 Poor Understanding of Hazard/Risk Leads to an Even Worse Normalization of Deviance 311 E.28 How Many Explosions Does It Take to Create a Sense of Vulnerability? 313 E.29 Disempowered to Perform Safety Responsibilities by “Omniscient“ Software 315 E.30 What We Have Here is a Failure to Communicate 316 E.31 Becoming the Best 317 E.32 High Sense of Vulnerability to One Dangerous Material Overwhelms the Sense of Vulnerability to Others 319 E.33 Not Empowered to Fulfill Safety Responsibilities? Maybe You Were All Along 321 E.34 Normalization of Ignorance 323 E.35 – Spark and Air Will Find Fuel 324 E.36 Operating Blind 325 E.37 Playing Jenga® with Process Safety Culture 327 E.38 Failure of Imagination? 328 E.39 Playing the Odds 329 E.40 Shutdown and Unsafe 331 E.41 Who, me? Yeah, you. Couldn’t be. Then who? 332 E.42 Blindness to Chemical Reactive Hazards Outside the Chemical Industry 334 E.43 Dominos, Downed-Man “Nos” 336 E.44 Mr. Potato Head Has Landed 337 E.45 Sabotage, Perhaps. But of the Plant or the Culture? 338 E.46 This is the Last Place I Thought We’d Have an Incident 339 E.47 References 341 Appendix F: Process Safety Culture Assessment Protocol 343 F.1 Introduction 343 F.2 Culture Assessment Protocol 343 F.3 References 380 Appendix G: Process Safety Culture & Human Behavior 381

Read more less

Book SynopsisComprehensively covers new and existing methods for the design and analysis of composites structures with damage present Provides efficient and accurate approaches for analysing structures with holes and impact damage Introduces a new methodology for fatigue analysis of composites Provides design guidelines, and step by step descriptions of how to apply the methods, along with evaluation of their accuracy and applicability Includes problems and exercises Accompanied by a website hosting lecture slides and solutions Trade Review"This will help the readers – engineers who will be designing the next generation of airframe structures – to develop not only better understanding of underlying damage mechanisms, but also critical thinking andopen-mindedness needed for evaluation of any new simplified approaches that may emerge in the future" Professor Maria Kashtalyan, University of Aberdeen on behalf of the Aeronautical Journal, Oct 2017Table of ContentsSeries Preface ix Preface xi 1 Damage in Composite Structures: Notch Sensitivity 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Notch Insensitivity 2 1.3 ‘Complete’ Notch Sensitivity 4 1.4 Notch Sensitivity of Composite Materials 5 Exercises 6 References 7 2 Holes 9 2.1 Stresses around Holes 13 2.2 Using the Anisotropic Elasticity Solution to Predict Failure 16 2.3 The Role of the Damage Zone Created Near a Hole 17 2.4 Simplified Approaches to Predict Failure in Laminates with Holes: the Whitney–Nuismer Criteria 19 2.5 Other Approaches to Predict Failure of a Laminate with a Hole 24 2.6 Improved Whitney–Nuismer Approach 25 2.7 Application: Finding the Stacking Sequence Which Results in Good OHT Performance 34 Exercises 35 References 39 3 Cracks 41 3.1 Introduction 41 3.2 Modelling a Crack in a Composite Laminate 42 3.3 Finite-Width Effects 45 3.4 Other Approaches for Analysis of Cracks in Composites 46 3.5 Matrix Cracks 49 Exercises 52 References 56 4 Delaminations 57 4.1 Introduction 57 4.2 Relation to Inspection Methods and Criteria 60 4.3 Modelling Different Structural Details in the Presence of Delaminations 63 4.3.1 Buckling of a Through-Width Delaminating Layer 63 4.3.2 Buckling of an Elliptical Delaminating Layer 69 4.3.3 Application – Buckling of an Elliptical Delamination under Combined Loads 73 4.3.4 Onset of Delamination at a Straight Free Edge of a Composite Laminate 75 4.3.5 Delamination at a Flange–Stiffener Interface of a Composite Stiffened Panel 84 4.3.6 Double Cantilever Beam and End Notch Flexure Specimen 88 4.3.7 The Crack Closure Method 92 4.4 Strength of Materials Versus Fracture Mechanics – Use of Cohesive Elements 96 4.4.1 Use of Cohesive Elements 99 Exercises 100 References 103 5 Impact 105 5.1 Sources of Impact and General Implications for Design 105 5.2 Damage Resistance Versus Damage Tolerance 109 5.3 Modelling Impact Damage as a Hole 111 5.4 Modelling Impact Damage as a Delamination 114 5.5 Impact Damage Modelled as a Region of Reduced Stiffness 117 5.6 Application: Comparison of the Predictions of the Simpler Models with Test Results 121 5.6.1 Modelling BVID as a Hole 122 5.6.2 Modelling BVID as a Single Delamination 123 5.6.3 Modelling BVID as an Elliptical Inclusion of Reduced Stiffness 124 5.6.4 Comparisons of Analytical Predictions to Test Results – Sandwich Laminates 124 5.7 Improved Model for Impact Damage Analysed as a Region of Reduced Stiffness 125 5.7.1 Type and Extent of Damage for Given Impact Energy 125 5.7.2 Model for Predicting CAI Strength 148 Exercises 163 References 168 6 Fatigue Life of Composite Structures: Analytical Models 171 6.1 Introduction 171 6.2 Needed Characteristics for an Analytical Model 175 6.3 Models for the Degradation of the Residual Strength 177 6.3.1 Linear Model 177 6.3.2 Nonlinear Model 180 6.4 Model for the Cycles to Failure 183 6.4.1 Extension to Spectrum Loading 196 6.5 Residual Strength and Wear-Out Model Predictions Compared to Test Results 200 6.5.1 Residual Strength Predictions Compared to Test Results 200 6.5.2 Cycles to Failure Predictions Compared to Test Results (Constant Amplitude) 202 6.5.3 Cycles to Failure Predictions Compared to Test Results (Spectrum Loading) 204 6.6 A Proposal for the Complete Model: Accounting for Larger Scale Damage 206 6.6.1 First Cycle, Tension Portion 207 6.6.2 First Cycle, Compression Portion 207 6.6.3 Subsequent Load Cycles 208 6.6.4 Discussion 208 6.6.5 Application: Tension–Compression Fatigue of Unidirectional Composites 209 6.6.6 Application: Tension–Tension Fatigue of Cross-Ply Laminates 214 Exercises 218 References 219 7 Effect of Damage in Composite Structures: Summary and Useful Design Guidelines 221 Index 227

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn Essential Guide to Electronic Material Surfaces and Interfaces is a streamlined yet comprehensive introduction that covers the basic physical properties of electronic materials, the experimental techniques used to measure them, and the theoretical methods used to understand, predict, and design them. Starting with the fundamental electronic properties of semiconductors and electrical measurements of semiconductor interfaces, this text introduces students to the importance of characterizing and controlling macroscopic electrical properties by atomic-scale techniques. The chapters that follow present the full range of surface and interface techniques now being used to characterize electronic, optical, chemical, and structural properties of electronic materials, including semiconductors, insulators, nanostructures, and organics. The essential physics and chemistry underlying each technique is described in sufficient depth for students to master the fundamental principlTable of ContentsPreface xiii About the Companion Websites xv 1. Why Surfaces and Interfaces of Electronic Materials 1 1.1 The Impact of Electronic Materials 1 1.2 Surface and Interface Importance as Electronics Shrink 1 1.3 Historical Background 5 1.4 Next Generation Electronics 10 1.5 Problems 10 References 11 Further Reading 13 2. Semiconductor Electronic and Optical Properties 14 2.1 The Semiconductor Band Gap 14 2.2 The Fermi Level and Energy Band Parameters 15 2.3 Band Bending at Semiconductor Surfaces and Interfaces 17 2.4 Surfaces and Interfaces in Electronic Devices 17 2.5 Effects of Localized States: Traps, Dipoles, and Barriers 19 2.6 Summary 19 2.7 Problems 20 References 20 Further Reading 21 3. Electrical Measurements of Surfaces and Interfaces 22 3.1 Sheet Resistance and Contact Resistivity 22 3.2 Contact Measurements: Schottky Barrier Overview 23 3.3 Heterojunction Band Offsets: Electrical Measurements 35 3.4 Summary 38 3.5 Problems 38 References 39 Further Reading 41 4. Localized States at Surfaces and Interfaces 42 4.1 Interface State Models 42 4.2 Intrinsic Surface States 43 4.3 Extrinsic Surface States 49 4.4 The Solid State Interface: Changing Perspectives 52 4.5 Problems 52 References 53 Further Reading 54 5. Ultrahigh Vacuum Technology 55 5.1 Ultrahigh Vacuum Chambers 55 5.2 Pumps 57 5.3 Manipulators 61 5.4 Gauges 61 5.5 Residual Gas Analysis 62 5.6 Deposition Sources 62 5.7 Deposition Monitors 64 5.8 Summary 65 5.9 Problems 65 References 65 Further Reading 66 6. Surface and Interface Analysis 67 6.1 Surface and Interface Techniques 67 6.2 Excited Electron Spectroscopies 70 6.3 Principles of Surface Sensitivity 72 6.4 Multi-technique UHV Chambers 73 6.5 Summary 75 6.6 Problems 75 References 75 Further Reading 75 7. Surface and Interface Spectroscopies 76 7.1 Photoemission Spectroscopy 76 7.2 Auger Electron Spectroscopy 89 7.3 Electron Energy Loss Spectroscopy 98 7.4 Rutherford Backscattering Spectrometry 104 7.5 Surface and Interface Technique Summary 112 7.6 Problems 113 References 116 Further Reading 117 8. Dynamical Depth-Dependent Analysis and Imaging 118 8.1 Ion Beam-Induced Surface Ablation 118 8.2 Auger Electron Spectroscopy 119 8.3 X-Ray Photoemission Spectroscopy 121 8.4 Secondary Ion Mass Spectrometry 122 8.5 Spectroscopic Imaging 128 8.6 Depth-Resolved and Imaging Summary 129 8.7 Problems 129 References 130 Further Reading 130 9. Electron Beam Diffraction and Microscopy of Atomic-Scale Geometrical Structure 131 9.1 Low Energy Electron Diffraction – Principles 131 9.2 Reflection High Energy Electron Diffraction 141 9.3 Scanning Electron Microscopy 144 9.4 Transmission Electron Microscopy 145 9.5 Electron Beam Diffraction and Microscopy Summary 148 9.6 Problems 149 References 150 Further Reading 151 10. Scanning Probe Techniques 152 10.1 Atomic Force Microscopy 152 10.2 Scanning Tunneling Microscopy 155 10.3 Ballistic Electron Energy Microscopy 162 10.4 Atomic Positioning 163 10.5 Summary 164 10.6 Problems 164 References 165 Further Reading 165 11. Optical Spectroscopies 166 11.1 Overview 166 11.2 Optical Absorption 166 11.3 Modulation Techniques 168 11.4 Multiple Surface Interaction Techniques 169 11.5 Spectroscopic Ellipsometry 171 11.6 Surface Enhanced Raman Spectroscopy 171 11.7 Surface Photoconductivity 174 11.8 Surface Photovoltage Spectroscopy 175 11.9 Photoluminescence Spectroscopy 180 11.10 Cathodoluminescence Spectroscopy 181 11.11 Summary 190 11.12 Problems 191 References 192 Further Reading 192 12. Electronic Material Surfaces 193 12.1 Geometric Structure 193 12.2 Chemical Structure 196 12.3 Electronic Structure 203 12.4 Summary 209 12.5 Problems 210 References 211 Further Reading 212 13. Surface Electronic Applications 213 13.1 Charge Transfer and Band Bending 213 13.2 Oxide Gas Sensors 216 13.3 Granular Gas Sensors 217 13.4 Nanowire Sensors 217 13.5 Chemical and Biosensors 217 13.6 Surface Electronic Temperature, Pressure, and Mass Sensors 220 13.7 Summary 220 13.8 Problems 221 References 222 Further Reading 222 14. Semiconductor Heterojunctions 223 14.1 Geometrical Structure 223 14.2 Chemical Structure 230 14.3 Electronic Structure 232 14.4 Conclusions 245 14.5 Problems 246 References 247 Further Reading 248 15. Metal–Semiconductor Interfaces 249 15.1 Overview 249 15.2 Metal–Semiconductor Interface Dipoles 249 15.3 Interface States 251 15.4 Self-Consistent Electrostatic Calculations 258 15.5 Experimental Schottky Barriers 259 15.6 Interface Barrier Height Engineering 264 15.7 Atomic-Scale Control 266 15.8 Summary 272 15.9 Problems 272 References 273 Further Reading 275 16. Next Generation Surfaces and Interfaces 276 16.1 Current Status 276 16.2 Current Device Challenges 278 16.3 Emerging Directions 279 16.4 The Essential Guide Conclusions 282 Appendices Appendix A: Glossary of Commonly Used Symbols 283 Appendix B: Table of Acronyms 286 Appendix C: Table of Physical Constants and Conversion Factors 290 Appendix D: Semiconductor Properties 291 Index 293

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides an introduction to basic thermodynamic engine cycle simulations, and provides a substantial set of results. Key features includes comprehensive and detailed documentation of the mathematical foundations and solutions required for thermodynamic engine cycle simulations. The book includes a thorough presentation of results based on the second law of thermodynamics as well as results for advanced, high efficiency engines. Case studies that illustrate the use of engine cycle simulations are also provided. Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Reasons for Studying Engines 1 1.2 Engine Types and Operation 2 1.3 Reasons for Cycle Simulations 3 1.3.1 Educational Value 3 1.3.2 Guide Experimentation 3 1.3.3 Only Technique to Study Certain Variables 4 1.3.4 Complete Extensive Parametric Studies 4 1.3.5 Opportunities for Optimization 4 1.3.6 Simulations for Real]time Control 4 1.3.7 Summary 5 1.4 Brief Comments on the History of Simulations 5 1.5 Overview of Book Content 6 2 Overview of Engines and Their Operation 9 2.1 Goals of Engine Designs 9 2.2 Engine Classifications by Applications 10 2.3 Engine Characteristics 11 2.4 Basic Engine Components 12 2.5 Engine Operating Cycles 12 2.6 Performance Parameters 12 2.6.1 Work, Power, and Torque 12 2.6.2 Mean Effective Pressure 15 2.6.3 Thermal Efficiencies 16 2.6.4 Specific Fuel Consumption 17 2.6.5 Other Parameters 17 2.7 Summary 18 3 Overview of Engine Cycle Simulations 19 3.1 Introduction 19 3.2 Ideal (Air Standard) Cycle Analyses 19 3.3 Thermodynamic Engine Cycle Simulations 21 3.4 Quasi]dimensional Thermodynamic Engine Cycle Simulations 22 3.5 Multi]dimensional Simulations 23 3.6 Commercial Products 24 3.6.1 Thermodynamic Simulations 24 3.6.2 Multi]dimensional Simulations 25 3.7 Summary 26 Appendix 3.A: A Brief Summary of the Thermodynamics of the “Otto” Cycle Analysis 29 4 Properties of the Working Fluids 37 4.1 Introduction 37 4.2 Unburned Mixture Composition 37 4.2.1 Oxygen]containing Fuels 40 4.2.2 Oxidizers 41 4.2.3 Fuels 41 4.3 Burned Mixture (“Frozen” Composition) 42 4.4 Equilibrium Composition 43 4.5 Determinations of the Thermodynamic Properties 46 4.6 Results for the Thermodynamic Properties 47 4.7 Summary 61 5 Thermodynamic Formulations 63 5.1 Introduction 63 5.2 Approximations and Assumptions 64 5.3 Formulations 65 5.3.1 One]Zone Formulation 65 5.3.2 Two]Zone Formulation 67 5.3.3 Three]Zone Formulation 72 5.4 Comments on the Three Formulations 77 5.5 Summary 77 6 Items and Procedures for Solutions 79 6.1 Introduction 79 6.2 Items Needed to Solve the Energy Equations 79 6.2.1 Thermodynamic Properties 79 6.2.2 Kinematics 80 6.2.3 Combustion Process (Mass Fraction Burned) 82 6.2.4 Cylinder Heat Transfer 85 6.2.5 Mass Flow Rates 86 6.2.6 Mass Conservation 89 6.2.7 Friction 89 6.2.8 Pollutant Calculations 94 6.2.9 Other Sub]models 94 6.3 Numerical Solution 94 6.3.1 Initial and Boundary Conditions 95 6.3.2 Internal Consistency Checks 96 6.4 Summary 96 7 Basic Results 99 7.1 Introduction 99 7.2 Engine Specifications and Operating Conditions 99 7.3 Results and Discussion 101 7.3.1 Cylinder Volumes, Pressures, and Temperatures 102 7.3.2 Cylinder Masses and Flow Rates 106 7.3.3 Specific Enthalpy and Internal Energy 108 7.3.4 Molecular Masses, Gas Constants, and Mole Fractions 110 7.3.5 Energy Distribution and Work 114 7.4 Summary and Conclusions 116 8 Performance Results 119 8.1 Introduction 119 8.2 Engine and Operating Conditions 119 8.3 Performance Results (Part I)—Functions of Load and Speed 119 8.4 Performance Results (Part II)—Functions of Operating/Design Parameters 129 8.4.1 Combustion Timing 129 8.4.2 Compression Ratio 131 8.4.3 Equivalence Ratio 133 8.4.4 Burn Duration 135 8.4.5 Inlet Temperature 135 8.4.6 Residual Mass Fraction 136 8.4.7 Exhaust Pressure 136 8.4.8 Exhaust Gas Temperature 140 8.4.9 Exhaust Gas Recirculation 142 8.4.10 Pumping Work 145 8.5 Summary and Conclusions 149 9 Second Law Results 153 9.1 Introduction 153 9.2 Exergy 153 9.3 Previous Literature 154 9.4 Formulation of Second Law Analyses 154 9.5 Results from the Second Law Analyses 158 9.5.1 Basic Results 158 9.5.2 Parametric Results 163 9.5.3 Auxiliary Comments 174 9.6 Summary and Conclusions 176 10 Other Engine Combustion Processes 179 10.1 Introduction 179 10.2 Diesel Engine Combustion 179 10.3 Best Features from SI and CI Engines 180 10.4 Other Combustion Processes 181 10.4.1 Stratified Charge Combustion 181 10.4.2 Low Temperature Combustion 181 10.5 Challenges of Alternative Combustion Processes 182 10.6 Applications of the Simulations for Other Combustion Processes 183 10.7 Summary 184 11 Case Studies: Introduction 187 11.1 Case Studies 187 11.2 Common Elements of the Case Studies 188 11.3 General Methodology of the Case Studies 189 12 Combustion: Heat Release and Phasing 191 12.1 Introduction 191 12.2 Engine and Operating Conditions 191 12.3 Part I: Heat Release Schedule 191 12.3.1 Results for the Heat Release Rate 197 12.4 Part II: Combustion Phasing 205 12.4.1 Results for Combustion Phasing 206 12.5 Summary and Conclusions 221 13 Cylinder Heat Transfer 225 13.1 Introduction 225 13.2 Basic Relations 226 13.3 Previous Literature 227 13.3.1 Woschni Correlation 228 13.3.2 Summary of Correlations 229 13.4 Results and Discussion 230 13.4.1 Conventional Engine 230 13.4.2 Engines Utilizing Low Heat Rejection Concepts 241 13.4.3 Engines Utilizing Adiabatic EGR 247 13.5 Summary and Conclusions 250 14 Fuels 253 14.1 Introduction 253 14.2 Fuel Specifications 254 14.3 Engine and Operating Conditions 255 14.4 Results and Discussion 255 14.4.1 Assumptions and Constraints 255 14.4.2 Basic Results 255 14.4.3 Engine Performance Results 259 14.4.4 Second Law Results 266 14.5 Summary and Conclusions 268 Appendix 14.A: Energy and Exergy Distributions for the Eight Fuels at the Base Case Conditions (bmep = 325 kPa, 2000 rpm, ϕ = 1.0 and MBT timing) 269 15 Oxygen]Enriched Air 275 15.1 Introduction 275 15.2 Previous Literature 276 15.3 Engine and Operating Conditions 277 15.4 Results and Discussion 277 15.4.1 Strategy for This Study 278 15.4.2 Basic Thermodynamic Properties 278 15.4.3 Base Engine Performance 280 15.4.4 Parametric Engine Performance 283 15.4.5 Nitric Oxide Emissions 289 15.5 Summary and Conclusions 291 16 Overexpanded Engine 295 16.1 Introduction 295 16.2 Engine, Constraints, and Approach 296 16.2.1 Engine and Operating Conditions 296 16.2.2 Constraints 296 16.2.3 Approach 296 16.3 Results and Discussion 297 16.3.1 Part Load 297 16.3.2 Wide]Open Throttle 304 16.4 Summary and Conclusions 309 17 Nitric Oxide Emissions 311 17.1 Introduction 311 17.2 Nitric Oxide Kinetics 312 17.2.1 Thermal Nitric Oxide Mechanism 312 17.2.2 “Prompt” Nitric Oxide Mechanism 312 17.2.3 Nitrous Oxide Route Mechanism 313 17.2.4 Fuel Nitrogen Mechanism 313 17.3 Nitric Oxide Computations 313 17.3.1 Kinetic Rates 315 17.4 Engine and Operating Conditions 316 17.5 Results and Discussion 317 17.5.1 Basic Chemical Kinetic Results 317 17.5.2 Time]Resolved Nitric Oxide Results 320 17.5.3 Engine Nitric Oxide Results 324 17.6 Summary and Conclusions 329 18 High Efficiency Engines 333 18.1 Introduction 333 18.2 Engine and Operating Conditions 334 18.3 Results and Discussion 336 18.3.1 Overall Assessment 336 18.3.2 Effects of Individual Parameters 343 18.3.3 Emissions and Exergy 347 18.3.4 Effects of Combustion Parameters 351 18.4 Summary and Conclusions 353 19 Summary: Thermodynamics of Engines 355 19.1 Summaries of Chapters 355 19.2 Fundamental Thermodynamic Foundations of IC Engines 356 Item 1: Heat Engines versus Chemical Conversion Devices 356 Item 2: Air]Standard Cycles 357 Item 3: Importance of Compression Ratio 357 Item 4: Importance of the Ratio of Specific Heats 359 Item 5: Cylinder Heat Transfer 360 Item 6: The Potential of a Low Heat Rejection Engine 360 Item 7: Lean Operation and the Use of EGR 361 Item 8: Insights from the Second Law of Thermodynamics 361 Item 9: Timing of the Combustion Process 362 Item 10: Technical Assessments of Engine Concepts 362 19.3 Concluding Remarks 362 Index 363

Read more less

Book SynopsisSystematically describes the physical and materials properties of copper-based quaternary chalcogenide semiconductor materials, enabling their potential for photovoltaic device applications. Intended for scientists and engineers, in particular, in the fields of multinary semiconductor physics and a variety of photovoltaic and optoelectronic devices.Trade ReviewThis book focuses on inorganic semiconductors made of nontoxic and abundant materials...The introductory chapter defines, with sample calculations, parameters such as abundance values, spectral efficiency, effective cubic lattice constant (used in later chapters to correlate properties of these 27 semiconductors), the effective medium approximation, and interpolation schemes...This book is an authoritative source of information due to the in-depth discussions and adequate references, figures, tables, and appendices (MRS Bulletin-December 2016)Table of ContentsPreface ix Abbreviations and Acronyms xi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Natural Abundance of Elements in the Earth’s Crust 1 1.1.1 Chemical Elements 1 1.1.2 Solar Cells and Earth-Abundant Materials 4 1.2 Solar Radiation Spectrum 5 1.3 Shockley–Queisser Efficiency Limit 6 1.4 Fundamental Properties of Photovoltaic Semiconductor Materials 8 1.5 Solar Cell Device Characteristics 11 1.6 Prediction of Physical Properties for Complex Material System 13 1.6.1 An Effective Medium Approximation 13 1.6.2 An Interpolation Scheme 15 References 19 2 Structural Properties 21 2.1 Grimm–Sommerfeld Rule 21 2.2 Crystal Structure and Phase Stability 22 2.2.1 Crystal Structure 22 2.2.2 Theoretical Phase Stability 24 2.3 Lattice Constant and Related Parameters 25 2.3.1 Bulk Material 25 2.3.2 Nanocrystalline Material 52 2.4 Structural Phase Transition 58 References 61 3 Thermal Properties 67 3.1 Phase Diagram 67 3.1.1 Cu2Zn–IV–VI4 Quaternary 67 3.1.2 Cu2Cd–IV–VI4 Quaternary 72 3.1.3 Cu2Hg–IV–VI4 Quaternary 75 3.1.4 Cu2–II–IV–VI4 Solid Solution 78 3.2 Melting Point 81 3.3 Specific Heat 86 3.4 Debye Temperature 88 3.5 Thermal Expansion Coefficient 89 3.6 Thermal Conductivity 92 3.6.1 Quaternary Material 92 3.6.2 Alloy Material 101 3.7 Thermal Diffusivity 107 References 107 4 Elastic, Mechanical, and Lattice Dynamic Properties 111 4.1 Elastic Constant 111 4.1.1 General Remark 111 4.1.2 Theoretical Value 113 4.1.3 Young’s Modulus, Poisson’s Ratio, and Similar 115 4.1.4 Sound Velocity 118 4.2 Microhardness 121 4.3 Lattice Dynamic Properties 124 4.3.1 Phonon Dispersion Relation 124 4.3.2 Raman Scattering: Tetragonal Lattice 126 4.3.3 Raman Scattering: Orthorhombic Lattice 133 4.3.4 Effect of Atomic Mass on Phonon Frequency 136 4.3.5 Raman Scattering: Solid Solution 137 4.3.6 Raman Scattering: Excitation Wavelength Dependence 143 4.3.7 Far-IR Spectroscopy 148 4.3.8 External Perturbation Effect 150 4.3.9 Nanocrystalline Material 156 References 166 5 Electronic Energy-Band Structure 173 5.1 General Remark 173 5.1.1 Energy-Band Structure 173 5.1.2 Γ-Point Energy-Band Scheme 180 5.1.3 Band-Gap Energy: External Perturbation and Doping Effects 183 5.1.4 Effective Mass: External Perturbation and Doping Effects 185 5.2 Lowest Indirect and Direct Band-Gap Energies 185 5.2.1 Quaternary Material 185 5.2.2 Solid Solution 201 5.3 Higher-Lying Band-Gap Energy 205 5.4 External Perturbation Effect on the Band-Gap Energy: Experimental Data 205 5.5 Effective Mass 211 5.5.1 Electron Effective Mass 211 5.5.2 Hole Effective Mass 217 5.6 Nanocrystalline Band-Gap Energy 218 5.6.1 Quaternary Material 218 5.6.2 Solid Solution 222 5.7 Heterojunction Band Offset 223 5.7.1 General Consideration 223 5.7.2 Theoretical Value 224 5.7.3 Experimental Value 225 5.8 Electron Affinity 233 5.9 Schottky Barrier Height 235 References 236 6 Optical Properties 245 6.1 General Remark 245 6.1.1 Dielectric Permittivity: Tensor Representation 245 6.1.2 Optical Dispersion Relation 246 6.1.3 Optical Spectrum: Classification into Several Regions 250 6.2 The Reststrahlen Region 253 6.2.1 Static and High-Frequency Dielectric Constants 253 6.2.2 Reststrahlen Spectrum 254 6.3 At or Near the Fundamental Absorption Edge 257 6.3.1 Exciton Parameter 257 6.3.2 Optical Absorption 261 6.3.3 Refractive Index 271 6.4 The Interband Transition Region 276 6.4.1 Model Dielectric Function 276 6.4.2 Optical Spectrum and MDF Analysis 279 6.4.3 Optical Absorption Spectrum 288 6.4.4 Optical Constant in the 0–10 000 eV Spectral Region 288 References 296 7 Carrier Transport Properties 301 7.1 Electron Transport Properties 301 7.2 Hole Hall Mobility 303 7.2.1 General Remark 303 7.2.2 Room-Temperature Value 304 7.2.3 Temperature Dependence 312 7.2.4 Effect of Stoichiometry, Alloying, and Foreign Atom Doping 319 7.3 Electrical Resistivity 327 7.3.1 Free-Hole Conduction 327 7.3.2 Hopping Conduction 332 7.3.3 Transport in Degenerate Band 334 7.3.4 Insulator-to-Metal Transition 335 7.4 Minority-Carrier Transport 339 7.4.1 Minority-Electron Mobility 339 7.4.2 Minority-Electron Lifetime and Diffusion Length 342 7.5 Effect of Grain Boundary 350 7.6 Proposal: Graded-Absorber Solar Cell Structure 352 7.7 Proposal: Controlling Transport Properties of Bulk Material by Heat Treatment 353 References 354 Appendix A Summary: Physical Properties of CZTS and CZTSe 363 Appendix B Summary: Physical Properties of c-CdS, w-CdS, and ZnO 369 References 376 Appendix C Optical Constants of Some Cu2–II–IV–VI4 Quaternary Semiconductors 379 References 414 Appendix D Optical Constants of c-CdS, w-CdS, and ZnO 415 References 441 Index 443

Read more less

Book Synopsis

Read more less

Book SynopsisCovers a wide range of advanced materials and technologies for CO2 capture As a frontier research area, carbon capture has been a major driving force behind many materials technologies. This book highlights the current state-of-the-art in materials for carbon capture, providing a comprehensive understanding of separations ranging from solid sorbents to liquid sorbents and membranes. Filled with diverse and unconventional topics throughout, it seeks to inspire students, as well as experts, to go beyond the novel materials highlighted and develop new materials with enhanced separations properties. Edited by leading authorities in the field, Materials for Carbon Capture offers in-depth chapters covering: CO2 Capture and Separation of Metal-Organic Frameworks; Porous Carbon Materials: Designed Synthesis and CO2 Capture; Porous Aromatic Frameworks for Carbon Dioxide Capture; and Virtual Screening of Materials for Carbon Capture. Other chapters look at Ultrathin Membranes for Gas SeparatiTable of ContentsList of Contributors xi Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii 1 Introduction 1 De-en Jiang, Shannon M. Mahurin and Sheng Dai References 3 2 CO2 Capture and Separation of Metal–Organic Frameworks 5 Xueying Ge and Shengqian Ma 2.1 Introduction 5 2.1.1 CO2 Capture Process 7 2.1.2 Introduction to MOFs for CO2 Capture and Separation 7 2.2 Evaluation Theory 8 2.2.1 Isosteric Heat of Adsorption (Qst) 8 2.2.1.1 The Virial Method 1 9 2.2.1.2 The Virial Method 2 9 2.2.1.3 The Langmuir–Freundlich Equation 9 2.2.2 Ideal Adsorbed Solution Theory (IAST) 10 2.3 CO2 Capture Ability in MOFs 10 2.3.1 Open Metal Site 10 2.3.2 Pore Size 11 2.3.3 Polar Functional Group 13 2.3.4 Incorporation 14 2.4 MOFs in CO2 Capture in Practice 14 2.4.1 Single-Component CO2 Capture Capacity 14 2.4.2 Binary CO2 Capture Capacity and Selectivity 16 2.4.3 Other Related Gas-Selective Adsorption 19 2.5 Membrane for CO2 Capture 19 2.5.1 Pure MOF Membrane for CO2 Capture 20 2.5.2 MOF-Based Mixed Matrix Membranes for CO2 Capture 20 2.6 Conclusion and Perspectives 21 Acknowledgments 21 References 21 3 Porous Carbon Materials 29 Xiang-Qian Zhang and An-Hui Lu 3.1 Introduction 29 3.2 Designed Synthesis of Polymer-Based Porous Carbons as CO2 Adsorbents 30 3.2.1 Hard-Template Method 31 3.2.1.1 Porous Carbons Replicated from Porous Silica 31 3.2.1.2 Porous Carbons Replicated from Crystalline Microporous Materials 33 3.2.1.3 Porous Carbons Replicated from Colloidal Crystals 35 3.2.1.4 Porous Carbons Replicated from MgO Nanoparticles 36 3.2.2 Soft-Template Method 38 3.2.2.1 Carbon Monolith 38 3.2.2.2 Carbon Films and Sheets 45 3.2.2.3 Carbon Spheres 48 3.2.3 Template-Free Synthesis 49 3.3 Porous Carbons Derived from Ionic Liquids for CO2 Capture 53 3.4 Porous Carbons Derived from Porous Organic Frameworks for CO2 Capture 56 3.5 Porous Carbons Derived from Sustainable Resources for CO2 Capture 61 3.5.1 Direct Pyrolysis and/or Activation 63 3.5.2 Sol–Gel Process and Hydrothermal Carbonization Method 64 3.6 Critical Design Principles of Porous Carbons for CO2 Capture 67 3.6.1 Pore Structures 67 3.6.2 Surface Chemistry 72 3.6.2.1 Nitrogen-Containing Precursors 72 3.6.2.2 High-Temperature Reaction and Transformation 76 3.6.2.3 Oxygen-Containing or Sulfur-Containing Functional Groups 77 3.6.3 Crystalline Degree of the Porous Carbon Framework 81 3.6.4 Functional Integration and Reinforcement of Porous Carbon 83 3.7 Summary and Perspective 88 References 89 4 Porous Aromatic Frameworks for Carbon Dioxide Capture 97 Teng Ben and Shilun Qiu 4.1 Introduction 97 4.2 Carbon Dioxide Capture of Porous Aromatic Frameworks 98 4.3 Strategies for Improving CO2 Uptake in Porous Aromatic Frameworks 98 4.3.1 Improving the Surface Area 98 4.3.2 Heteroatom Doping 99 4.3.3 Tailoring the Pore Size 102 4.3.4 Post Modification 103 4.4 Conclusion and Perspectives 114 References 114 5 Virtual Screening of Materials for Carbon Capture 117 Aman Jain, Ravichandar Babarao and Aaron W. Thornton 5.1 Introduction 118 5.2 Computational Methods 118 5.2.1 Monte Carlo-Based Simulations 118 5.2.2 MD Simulation 122 5.2.3 Density Functional Theory 122 5.2.4 Empirical, Phenomenological, and Fundamental Models 123 5.2.4.1 Langmuir and Others 124 5.2.4.2 Ideal Adsorbed Solution Theory (IAST) 124 5.2.5 Materials Genome Initiative 126 5.2.6 High-Throughput Screening 127 5.3 Adsorbent-Based CO2 Capture 129 5.3.1 Direct Air Capture 130 5.4 Membrane-Based CO2 Capture 131 5.5 Candidate Materials 131 5.5.1 Metal Organic Frameworks 131 5.5.2 Zeolites 132 5.5.3 Zeolitic Imidiazolate Frameworks 133 5.5.4 Mesoporous Carbons 133 5.5.5 Glassy and Rubbery Polymers 133 5.6 Porous Aromatic Frameworks 134 5.7 Covalent Organic Frameworks 135 5.8 Criteria for Screening Candidate Materials 135 5.8.1 CO2 Uptake 135 5.8.2 Working Capacity 136 5.8.3 Selectivity 137 5.8.4 Diffusivity 137 5.8.5 Regenerability 138 5.8.6 Breakthrough Time in PSA 138 5.8.7 Heat of Adsorption 138 5.9 In-Silico Insights 138 5.9.1 Effect of Water Vapor 138 5.9.2 Effect of Metal Exchange 141 5.9.3 Effect of Ionic Exchange 142 5.9.4 Effect of Framework Charges 142 5.9.5 Effect of High-Density Open Metal Sites 144 5.9.6 Effect of Slipping 145 References 145 6 Ultrathin Membranes for Gas Separation 153 Ziqi Tian, Song Wang, Sheng Dai and De-en Jiang 6.1 Introduction 153 6.2 Porous Graphene 155 6.2.1 Proof of Concept 155 6.2.2 Experimental Confirmation 156 6.2.3 More Realistic Simulations to Obtain Permeance 158 6.2.4 Further Simulations of Porous Graphene 160 6.2.5 Effect of Pore Density on Gas Permeation 161 6.3 Graphene-Derived 2D Membranes 163 6.3.1 Poly-phenylene Membrane 163 6.3.2 Graphyne and Graphdiyne Membranes 165 6.3.3 Graphene Oxide Membranes 166 6.3.4 2D Porous Organic Polymers 166 6.4 Porous Carbon Nanotube 168 6.5 Porous Porphyrins 172 6.6 Flexible Control of Pore Size 174 6.6.1 Ion-Gated Porous Graphene Membrane 174 6.6.2 Bilayer Porous Graphene with Continuously Tunable Pore Size 176 6.7 Summary and Outlook 178 Acknowledgments 179 References 179 7 Polymeric Membranes 187 Jason E. Bara and W. Jeffrey Horne 7.1 Introduction 187 7.1.1 Overview of Post-Combustion CO2 Capture 187 7.1.2 Polymer Membrane Fundamentals and Process Considerations 189 7.2 Polymer Types 193 7.2.1 Poly(Ethylene Glycol) 193 7.2.2 Polyimides and Thermally Rearranged Polymers 195 7.2.3 Polymers of Intrinsic Microporosity (PIMs) 196 7.2.4 Poly(Ionic Liquids) 197 7.2.5 Other Polymer Materials 198 7.3 Facilitated Transport 199 7.4 Polymer Membrane Contactors 202 7.5 Summary and Perspectives 203 References 204 8 Carbon Membranes for CO2 Separation 215 Kuan Huang and Sheng Dai 8.1 Introduction 215 8.2 Theory 216 8.3 Graphene Membranes 217 8.4 Carbon Nanotube Membranes 221 8.5 Carbon Molecular Sieve Membranes 222 8.6 Conclusions and Outlook 230 Acknowledgments 230 References 231 9 Composite Materials for Carbon Capture 237 Sunee Wongchitphimon, Siew Siang Lee, Chong Yang Chuah, Rong Wang and Tae-Hyun Bae 9.1 Introduction 237 9.1.1 Technologies for CO2 Capture 238 9.1.2 Composite Materials for Adsorptive CO2 Capture 239 9.1.3 Composite Materials for Membrane-Based CO2 Capture 240 9.2 Fillers for Composite Materials 242 9.2.1 Zeolites 242 9.2.2 Metal–Organic Frameworks 243 9.2.3 Other Particulate Materials – Carbon Molecular Sieves and Mesoporous Silica 247 9.2.4 1-D Materials – Carbon Nanotubes 247 9.2.5 2-D Materials – Layered Silicate and Graphene 248 9.3 Non-Ideality of Filler/Polymer Interfaces 250 9.3.1 Sieve-in-a-Cage 251 9.3.2 Polymer Matrix Rigidification 253 9.3.3 Plugged Filler Pores 253 9.4 Composite Adsorbents 253 9.5 Composite Membranes (Mixed-Matrix Membranes) 255 9.6 Conclusion and Outlook 256 References 260 10 Poly(Amidoamine) Dendrimers for Carbon Capture 267 Ikuo Taniguchi 10.1 Introduction 267 10.2 Poly(Amidoamine) in CO2 Capture 269 10.2.1 A Brief History 269 10.2.2 Immobilization of PAMAM Dendrimers 270 10.2.2.1 Immobilization in Crosslinked Chitosan 270 10.2.2.2 Immobilization in Crosslinked Poly(Vinyl Alcohol) 273 10.2.2.3 Immobilization in Crosslinked PEG 275 10.3 Factors to Determine CO2 Separation Properties 276 10.3.1 Visualization of Phase-Separated Structure 276 10.3.2 Effect of Humidity 280 10.3.3 Effect of Phase-Separated Structure 281 10.4 CO2-Selective Molecular Gate 284 10.5 Enhancement of CO2 Separation Performance 286 10.6 Conclusion and Perspectives 288 Acknowledgments 291 References 291 11 Ionic Liquids for Chemisorption of CO2 297 Mingguang Pan and Congmin Wang 11.1 Introduction 297 11.2 PILs for Chemisorption of CO2 299 11.3 Aprotic Ionic Liquids for Chemisorption of CO2 300 11.3.1 N as the Absorption Site 300 11.3.1.1 Amino-Containing Ionic Liquids 300 11.3.1.2 Azolide Ionic Liquids 302 11.3.2 O as the Absorption Site 303 11.3.3 Both N, O as Absorption Sites 303 11.3.4 C as the Absorption Site 306 11.4 Metal Chelate ILs for Chemisorption of CO2 307 11.5 IL-Based Mixtures for Chemisorption of CO2 307 11.6 Supported ILs for Chemisorption of CO2 308 11.7 Conclusion and Perspectives 309 Acknowledgments 309 References 310 12 Ionic Liquid-Based Membranes 317 Chi-Linh Do-Thanh, Jennifer Schott, Sheng Dai and Shannon M. Mahurin 12.1 Introduction 317 12.1.1 Transport in Ionic Liquids 320 12.1.2 Facilitated Transport 321 12.2 Supported IL Membranes 323 12.2.1 Microporous Supports and Nanoconfinement 327 12.2.2 Hollow-Fiber Supports 328 12.3 Polymerizable ILs 330 12.4 Mixed-Matrix ILs 332 12.5 Conclusion and Outlook 336 References 336 Index 347

Read more less

Book SynopsisA complete, up-to-date, introductory guide to fuel cell technology and application Fuel Cell Fundamentalsprovides a thorough introduction to the principles and practicalities behind fuel cell technology. Beginning with the underlying concepts, the discussion explores fuel cell thermodynamics, kinetics, transport, and modeling before moving into the application side with guidance on system types and design, performance, costs, and environmental impact. This new third edition has been updated with the latest technological advances and relevant calculations, and enhanced chapters on advanced fuel cell design and electrochemical and hydrogen energy systems. Worked problems, illustrations, and application examples throughout lend a real-world perspective, and end-of chapter review questions and mathematical problems reinforce the material learned. Fuel cells produce more electricity than batteries or combustion engines, with far fewer emissions. This book is the esseTable of ContentsPREFACE xi ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xiii NOMENCLATURE xvii I FUEL CELL PRINCIPLES 1 Introduction 3 1.1 What Is a Fuel Cell? / 3 1.2 A Simple Fuel Cell / 6 1.3 Fuel Cell Advantages / 8 1.4 Fuel Cell Disadvantages / 11 1.5 Fuel Cell Types / 12 1.6 Basic Fuel Cell Operation / 14 1.7 Fuel Cell Performance / 18 1.8 Characterization and Modeling / 20 1.9 Fuel Cell Technology / 21 1.10 Fuel Cells and the Environment / 21 1.11 Chapter Summary / 22 Chapter Exercises / 23 2 Fuel Cell Thermodynamics 25 2.1 Thermodynamics Review / 25 2.2 Heat Potential of a Fuel: Enthalpy of Reaction / 34 2.3 Work Potential of a Fuel: Gibbs Free Energy / 37 2.4 Predicting Reversible Voltage of a Fuel Cell under Non-Standard-State Conditions / 47 2.5 Fuel Cell Efficiency / 60 2.6 Thermal and Mass Balances in Fuel Cells / 65 2.7 Thermodynamics of Reversible Fuel Cells / 67 2.8 Chapter Summary / 71 Chapter Exercises / 72 3 Fuel Cell Reaction Kinetics 77 3.1 Introduction to Electrode Kinetics / 77 3.2 Why Charge Transfer Reactions Have an Activation Energy / 82 3.3 Activation Energy Determines Reaction Rate / 84 3.4 Calculating Net Rate of a Reaction / 85 3.5 Rate of Reaction at Equilibrium: Exchange Current Density / 86 3.6 Potential of a Reaction at Equilibrium: Galvani Potential / 87 3.7 Potential and Rate: Butler–Volmer Equation / 89 3.8 Exchange Currents and Electrocatalysis: How to Improve Kinetic Performance / 94 3.9 Simplified Activation Kinetics: Tafel Equation / 97 3.10 Different Fuel Cell Reactions Produce Different Kinetics / 100 3.11 Catalyst–Electrode Design / 103 3.12 Quantum Mechanics: Framework for Understanding Catalysis in Fuel Cells / 104 3.13 The Sabatier Principle for Catalyst Selection / 107 3.14 Connecting the Butler–Volmer and Nernst Equations (Optional) / 108 3.15 Chapter Summary / 112 Chapter Exercises / 113 4 Fuel Cell Charge Transport 117 4.1 Charges Move in Response to Forces / 117 4.2 Charge Transport Results in a Voltage Loss / 121 4.3 Characteristics of Fuel Cell Charge Transport Resistance / 124 4.4 Physical Meaning of Conductivity / 128 4.5 Review of Fuel Cell Electrolyte Classes / 132 4.6 More on Diffusivity and Conductivity (Optional) / 153 4.7 Why Electrical Driving Forces Dominate Charge Transport (Optional) / 160 4.8 Quantum Mechanics–Based Simulation of Ion Conduction in Oxide Electrolytes (Optional) / 161 4.9 Chapter Summary / 163 Chapter Exercises / 164 5 Fuel Cell Mass Transport 167 5.1 Transport in Electrode versus Flow Structure / 168 5.2 Transport in Electrode: Diffusive Transport / 170 5.3 Transport in Flow Structures: Convective Transport / 183 5.4 Chapter Summary / 199 Chapter Exercises / 200 6 Fuel Cell Modeling 203 6.1 Putting It All Together: A Basic Fuel Cell Model / 203 6.2 A 1D Fuel Cell Model / 206 6.3 Fuel Cell Models Based on Computational Fluid Dynamics (Optional) / 227 6.4 Chapter Summary / 230 Chapter Exercises / 231 7 Fuel Cell Characterization 237 7.1 What Do We Want to Characterize? / 238 7.2 Overview of Characterization Techniques / 239 7.3 In Situ Electrochemical Characterization Techniques / 240 7.4 Ex Situ Characterization Techniques / 265 7.5 Chapter Summary / 268 Chapter Exercises / 269 II FUEL CELL TECHNOLOGY 8 Overview of Fuel Cell Types 273 8.1 Introduction / 273 8.2 Phosphoric Acid Fuel Cell / 274 8.3 Polymer Electrolyte Membrane Fuel Cell / 275 8.4 Alkaline Fuel Cell / 278 8.5 Molten Carbonate Fuel Cell / 280 8.6 Solid-Oxide Fuel Cell / 282 8.7 Other Fuel Cells / 284 8.8 Summary Comparison / 298 8.9 Chapter Summary / 299 Chapter Exercises / 301 9 PEMFC and SOFC Materials 303 9.1 PEMFC Electrolyte Materials / 304 9.2 PEMFC Electrode/Catalyst Materials / 308 9.3 SOFC Electrolyte Materials / 317 9.4 SOFC Electrode/Catalyst Materials / 326 9.5 Material Stability, Durability, and Lifetime / 336 9.6 Chapter Summary / 340 Chapter Exercises / 342 10 Overview of Fuel Cell Systems 347 10.1 Fuel Cell Subsystem / 348 10.2 Thermal Management Subsystem / 353 10.3 Fuel Delivery/Processing Subsystem / 357 10.4 Power Electronics Subsystem / 364 10.5 Case Study of Fuel Cell System Design: Stationary Combined Heat and Power Systems / 369 10.6 Case Study of Fuel Cell System Design: Sizing a Portable Fuel Cell / 383 10.7 Chapter Summary / 387 Chapter Exercises / 389 11 Fuel Processing Subsystem Design 393 11.1 Fuel Reforming Overview / 394 11.2 Water Gas Shift Reactors / 409 11.3 Carbon Monoxide Clean-Up / 411 11.4 Reformer and Processor Efficiency Losses / 414 11.5 Reactor Design for Fuel Reformers and Processors / 416 11.6 Chapter Summary / 417 Chapter Exercises / 419 12 Thermal Management Subsystem Design 423 12.1 Overview of Pinch Point Analysis Steps / 424 12.2 Chapter Summary / 440 Chapter Exercises / 441 13 Fuel Cell System Design 447 13.1 Fuel Cell Design Via Computational Fluid Dynamics / 447 13.2 Fuel Cell System Design: A Case Study / 462 13.3 Chapter Summary / 476 Chapter Exercises / 477 14 Environmental Impact of Fuel Cells 481 14.1 Life Cycle Assessment / 481 14.2 Important Emissions for LCA / 490 14.3 Emissions Related to Global Warming / 490 14.4 Emissions Related to Air Pollution / 502 14.5 Analyzing Entire Scenarios with LCA / 507 14.6 Chapter Summary / 510 Chapter Exercises / 511 A Constants and Conversions 517 B Thermodynamic Data 519 C Standard Electrode Potentials at 25∘C 529 D Quantum Mechanics 531 D.1 Atomic Orbitals / 533 D.2 Postulates of Quantum Mechanics / 534 D.3 One-Dimensional Electron Gas / 536 D.4 Analogy to Column Buckling / 537 D.5 Hydrogen Atom / 538 D.6 Multielectron Systems / 540 D.7 Density Functional Theory / 540 E Periodic Table of the Elements 543 F Suggested Further Reading 545 G Important Equations 547 H Answers to Selected Chapter Exercises 551 BIBLIOGRAPHY 555 INDEX 565

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xv Part 1: Fundamental and General Aspects 1 Wetting of Solid Walls and Spontaneous Capillary Flow 3 Jean Berthier and Kenneth A. Brakke 1.1 Introduction: Capillary Flows and Contact Angles 3 1.2 A General Condition for Spontaneous Capillary Flow (SCF) 5 1.3 The Dynamics of SCF 15 1.4 Conclusion 41 2 A Review of "Ordered Water Monolayer That Does Not Completely Wet Water" at Room Temperature 47 Chunlei Wang and Haiping Fang 2.1 Introduction 47 2.2 "Ordered Water Monolayer that Does Not Completely Wet Water" at Room Temperature 49 2.3 Effect of Surface Point Defects on the Ordered Water Monolayer 55 2.4 Thermal Properties of Ordered Water Monolayer 56 2.5 Simulation or Experimental Observations on the Phenomenon of Water Droplets on Water Monolayers on Real Solid Surfaces at Room Temperature 59 2.6 "Ordered Ethanol Monolayer that does not Completely Wet Ethanol" at Room Temperature 61 2.7 Discussion 64 2.8 Summary 65 3 Cheerios Effect and its Control by Contact Angle Modulation 73 Junqi Yuan and Sung Kwon Cho 3.1 Introduction 74 3.2 Theoretical Models 76 3.3 Control of Cheerios Effect 102 3.4 Concluding Remarks and Outlook 105 4 Recent Mathematical Analysis of Contact Angle Hysteresis 111 Xianmin Xu and Xiaoping Wang 4.1 Introduction 111 4.2 The Physical Principle and Mathematical Method 113 4.3 The Wenzel’s and Cassie’s Equations 114 4.4 The Modified Cassie Equation 118 4.5 Contact Angle Hysteresis 119 4.6 Conclusion and Outlook 124 5 Computational Analysis of Wetting on Hydrophobic Surfaces: Application to Self-Cleaning Mechanisms 129 Muhammad Osman and Roger A. Sauer 5.1 Introduction 130 5.2 Basic Relations in Differential Geometry 131 5.3 System Model 133 5.4 Governing Equations 134 5.5 Force Analysis 139 5.6 Results and Discussion 140 5.7 Conclusions 145 6 Bubble Adhesion to Superhydrophilic Surfaces 149 Ridvan Ozbay, Ali Kibar and Chang-Hwan Choi 6.1 Introduction 150 6.2 Theoretical Models 151 6.3 Experimental 154 6.4 Results and Discussion 155 6.5 Conclusions 161 Acknowledgement 162 References 162 7 Relationship Between the Roughness and Oleophilicity of Functional Surfaces 165 Luisa Coriand, Markus Rettenmayr and Angela Duparré 7.1 Introduction 165 7.2 Basics and Experimental 166 7.3 Results and Discussion 170 7.4 Summary 175 8 Liquid Repellent Amorphous Carbon Nanoparticle Networks 179 Ilker S. Bayer, Alexander J. Davis and Eric Loth 8.1 Introduction 180 8.2 Templates for Liquid Repellent Surfaces 180 8.3 Synthesis Without Flames 184 8.4 Synthesis by Combustion of Terpenoids 189 8.5 Amorphous Carbon Networks on 3-D Porous Materials for Liquid Filtration 191 8.6 Towards Robust Carbonaceous Films on Micro-textured Polymer Surfaces 193 8.7 Conclusions 208 9 Recent Progress in Evaluating Mechanical Durability of Liquid Repellent Surfaces 211 Athanasios Milionis, Ilker S. Bayer and Eric Loth 9.1 Introduction 211 9.2 Durability to Tangential Shear 218 9.3 Durability to Dynamic Impact 233 9.4 Durability under Vertical Compression/Expansion 239 9.5 Wear in Liquid Baths 242 9.6 Inherently Durable Liquid Repellent Materials 249 9.7 Future Directions for Investigating Mechanical Durability 251 10 Superhydrophobic and Superoleophobic Biobased Materials 259 Ilker S. Bayer 10.1 Introduction 260 10.2 Advances in Liquid Repellent Cellulose Fiber Networks 260 10.3 Liquid Repellent Materials: Cellulose Derivatives 270 10.4 Liquid Repellent Thermoplastic Starch and Biopolyesters 277 10.5 Conclusions 281 Part 2: Wettability Modification 11 Laser Ablated Micro/Nano-Patterned Superhydrophobic Stainless Steel Substrates 287 Sona Moradi, Saeid Kamal and Savvas G. Hatzikiriakos 11.1 Introduction 288 11.2 Materials and Experimental Methods 290 11.3 Experimental Details 292 11.4 Results and Discussion 293 11.5 Conclusions 301 12 RF Plasma Treatment of Neptune Grass (Posidonia oceanica): A Facile Method to Achieve Superhydrophilic Surfaces for Dye Adsorption from Aqueous Solutions 305 Hernando S. Salapare III, Ma. Gregoria Joanne P. Tiquio and Henry J. Ramos 12.1 Introduction 306 12.2 Experimental Details 315 12.3 Results and Discussion 319 12.4 Conclusions 328 13 Highly Liquid Repellent Technical Textiles Obtained by Means of Photo-chemical and Laser Surface Modifications 333 Thomas Bahners and Jochen S. Gutmann 13.1 Introduction 334 13.2 Background of the Conceptual Approach 335 13.3 Application of Combined Laser and Photo-chemical Modifications to Technical Textiles 347 13.4 Summary 358 14 Modification of Paper/Cellulose Surfaces to Control Liquid Wetting and Adhesion 365 Victor Breedveld and Dennis W. Hess 14.1 Introduction 366 14.2 Plasma Processing 366 14.3 Sticky vs. Roll-off Superhydrophobic Surfaces 367 14.4 Local Wetting/Adhesion Control 369 14.5 Superamphiphobic/Superomniphobic Paper 372 14.6 Summary and Conclusions 374 Part 3: Surface Free Energy and Adhesion 15 Surface Free Energy of Superhydrophobic Materials Obtained by Deposition of Polymeric Particles on Glass 381 Konrad Terpilowski 15.1 Introduction 382 15.2 Experimental 385 15.3 Results and Discussion 387 15.4 Conclusions 394 16 Tablet Tensile Strength: Role of Surface Free Energy 397 Frank M. Etzler and Sorana Pisano 16.1 Introduction 398 16.2 Applicability of the Proposed Model to Pharmaceutical Materials 404 16.3 Discussion 414 16.4 Summary 415 7 Why Test Inks Cannot Tell the Whole Truth About Surface Free Energy of Solids 419 Ming Jin, Frank Thomsen, Thomas Skrivanek and Thomas Willers 17.1 Introduction 419 17.2 Background 420 17.3 Materials and Methods 424 17. 4 Results and Interpretation 426 17.5 Advantages and Drawbacks of Contact Angle Measurement in Practice 435 17.6 Summary 437 References 438 Index 439

Read more less

Book SynopsisUsing a case study approach, this reference tests the reader's ability to apply engineering fundamentals to real-world examples and receive constructive feedback Case Studies in Mechanical Engineering provides real life examples of the application of engineering fundamentals. They relate to real equipment, real people and real decisions. They influence careers, projects, companies, and governments. The cases serve as supplements to fundamental courses in thermodynamics, fluid mechanics, heat transfer, instrumentation, economics, and statistics. The author explains equipment and concepts to solve the problems and suggests relevant assignments to augment the cases. Graduate engineers seeking to refresh their career, or acquire continuing education will find the studies challenging and rewarding. Each case is designed to be accomplished in one week, earning up to 15 hours of continuing education credit. Each case study provides methods to present an argumentTable of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xiv Introduction xvi Case 1 Steam Turbine Performance Degradation 1 1.1 Steam Turbine Types 2 1.1.1 Steam Turbine Components 5 1.1.2 Startup and Operation 7 1.1.3 Performance Monitoring and Analysis 10 1.1.4 Analyzing Performance Data – Corrected Pressures 10 1.1.5 Analyzing Performance Data – Flow Function 12 1.2 Refresher 14 1.2.1 Steam Turbine Efficiency 14 1.2.2 Example 14 1.3 Case Study Details 15 1.3.1 Performance Trend 15 1.3.2 IP Turbine Enthalpy Drop 16 1.4 Case Study Findings 17 1.5 Decision Making and Actions 18 1.5.1 Value 18 1.5.2 Decision Making and Actions – Alternatives 19 1.5.3 Decision Making and Actions – Making a Plan 20 1.6 Closure 20 1.7 Symbols and Abbreviations 21 1.8 Answer Key 21 References 24 Case 2 Risk / Reward Evaluation 26 2.1 Case Study 28 2.2 Background 29 2.2.1 Types of Gas Turbine Generating Plants 29 2.3 Gas Turbine Operating Risks 33 2.3.1 Gas Turbine Major Maintenance 35 2.3.2 Equivalent Fired Hours 36 2.3.3 Failure Costs 37 2.3.4 Reading Assignment 37 2.4 Case Study Evaluations 38 2.4.1 Review 38 2.4.2 Presenting Results 39 2.4.3 Judgment Calls 40 2.4.4 Exercise 40 2.4.5 Sensitivities 41 2.4.6 Exercise – Sensitivities 41 2.4.7 Presentation of Results 41 2.5 Case Study Results 42 2.6 Closure 42 2.7 Answer Key 43 Reference 45 Case 3 Gas Turbine Compressor Fouling 46 3.1 Background 47 3.1.1 Gas Turbine Types 47 3.1.2 Gas Compressor Fouling and Cleaning 49 3.1.3 Exercise 1 50 3.1.4 Inlet Filtration 50 3.1.5 Gas Turbine Performance Measurement 52 3.2 Case Study Details 53 3.2.1 Derivative of the Cost Function 54 3.2.2 Exercise 2 55 3.2.3 Linear Programming 56 3.2.4 New Methods – New Thinking 56 3.2.5 Exercise 3: Gas Turbine Inlet Filtration Upgrade 57 3.2.6 Presenting Results 57 3.3 Case Study Results / Closure 58 3.4 Symbols and Abbreviations 60 3.5 Answer Key 60 References 63 Case 4 Flow Instrument Degradation, Use and Placement 64 4.1 Background 65 4.1.1 Nuclear Steam Power Cycles 65 4.1.2 Core Power-Level Measurement 67 4.1.3 Differential Pressure Flow Measurement Devices 67 4.1.4 Two-Phase Piping Pressure Drop 71 4.1.5 Uncertainty 71 4.2 Case Study Details 72 4.3 Exercises 73 4.3.1 Uncertainty 74 4.3.2 Conclusions 76 4.4 Closure 76 4.5 Symbols and Abbreviations 76 4.6 Answer Key 77 4.7 Further Reading 79 References 79 Case 5 Two-Phase Hydraulics 80 5.1 Background 81 5.1.1 Reading Assignment 83 5.1.2 Müller-Steinhagen and Heck 83 5.1.3 Void Fraction 84 5.1.4 Pumping Net Positive Suction Head Required 86 5.1.5 Projects 86 5.2 Case Study Details 89 5.3 Exercises 90 5.3.1 Liquid Flow to Reboiler 90 5.3.2 Two-Phase Flow from Reboiler 90 5.3.3 Pump Suction 91 5.3.4 Discuss 92 5.4 Closure 92 5.5 Symbols and Abbreviations 92 5.6 Answer Key 93 References 94 Case 6 Reliability and Availability 95 6.1 Background 96 6.1.1 Models 97 6.1.2 Availability: Planned and Unplanned Outages – Parallel Systems 100 6.1.3 Series and Parallel Processes 102 6.1.4 Stochastic Models 103 6.1.5 Reading 104 6.1.6 Applicability 104 6.2 Case Study Details 105 6.2.1 Initial Block Flow Diagram 105 6.2.2 Business Structure 106 6.2.3 Modified Block Flow Diagram 108 6.2.4 Other Considerations 108 6.2.5 Exercises 109 6.3 Closure 110 6.4 Symbols and Abbreviations 110 6.5 Answer Key 111 Reference 113 Case 7 Efficiency and Air Emissions 114 7.1 Background 115 7.1.1 Cogeneration or CHP 115 7.1.2 Environmental Considerations 116 7.1.3 Efficiency 118 7.2 Case Study Details 119 7.2.1 General 119 7.2.2 Proposed CHP Plant 120 7.2.3 Steam Boilers 121 7.2.4 Fuel 121 7.2.5 Gas Turbine 121 7.2.6 Air 123 7.3 Refresher 123 7.3.1 Gas Mixture Molecular Weight 123 7.3.2 Gas Mixture Heating Value 123 7.3.3 Species Weight Fraction 123 7.3.4 Ultimate Analysis 124 7.4 Objective 124 7.5 Exercises 125 7.5.1 Outside Reading 125 7.5.2 Boiler Operation 125 7.5.3 Cogeneration Plant 126 7.5.4 Conclusion 126 7.6 Closure 126 7.7 Symbols and Abbreviations 127 7.8 Answer Key 127 References 130 Case 8 Low-Carbon Power Production 131 8.1 Background 132 8.1.1 Dispatch and Renewable Power Resources 133 8.1.2 Capacity Factor and Availability Factor 134 8.1.3 Fuel Costs (FC in Equation (8.1)) 134 8.1.4 Capital Cost Recovery (CR in Equation (8.1)) 135 8.1.5 Nonfuel Operations and Maintenance (M in Equation (8.1)) 135 8.1.6 Regulation and Government Support 135 8.2 Refresher 136 8.2.1 Short-Run Marginal Cost 136 8.2.2 CO2 Emissions 136 8.2.3 Long-Run Marginal Cost 136 8.3 Case Study Details 136 8.3.1 Reading Assignment 137 8.3.2 Transmission Costs 138 8.3.3 Economic Models 139 8.3.4 Carbon Emissions 139 8.3.5 Understanding the Findings 140 8.3.6 Explaining the Results 141 8.4 Closure 141 8.5 Answer Key 142 References 144 Case 9 Heat Exchangers and Drain Line Sizing 146 9.1 Background 147 9.1.1 Steam Surface Condensers 147 9.1.2 Feedwater Heaters 151 9.1.3 Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient 152 9.1.4 Condensing Heat Transfer 153 9.1.5 Forced Convection Inside Tubes 153 9.1.6 Conduction Heat Transfer 153 9.1.7 Off-Design Exchanger Performance 154 9.1.8 Drain Line Sizing 155 9.2 Reading 155 9.3 Case Study Details 156 9.3.1 Flow Diagram and Equipment 156 9.3.2 Design Cases 157 9.3.3 Exercises 159 9.4 Closure 160 9.5 Symbols and Abbreviations 161 9.6 Answer Key 162 9.7 Further Reading 164 References 164 Case 10 Optimized Maintenance 165 10.1 Background 166 10.1.1 Maintenance Practices 166 10.1.2 Economic Model for Maintenance 167 10.1.3 Operating Costs other than Maintenance 168 10.2 Refresher 169 10.2.1 Cost to Generate Power 169 10.2.2 Fixed and Variable Operations and Maintenance (O&M) 169 10.2.3 Cost of Fuel 169 10.2.4 Short]Run Gross Margin 169 10.3 Presentation Techniques 169 10.3.1 Waterfall Chart 169 10.3.2 Line and Scatter Plots 171 10.4 Reading 171 10.4.1 Questions 171 10.5 Case Study Details 172 10.5.1 Data 172 10.5.2 Exercises 174 10.6 Closure 176 10.7 Symbols and Abbreviations 176 10.8 Answer Key 177 10.9 Further Reading 184 References 185 Case 11 Project Engineering 186 11.1 Opening 186 11.2 Background 187 11.2.1 Mustard 187 11.2.2 Working with Warfare Agents 188 11.2.3 Alternative Technology for HD Decontamination 189 11.3 Project Planning and Definition 189 11.3.1 Project Management 192 11.3.2 Client Requirements 192 11.3.3 Work Breakdown Structure 194 11.3.4 Growing the Team 195 11.3.5 Process Basis of Design 196 11.4 Executing the Project 197 11.4.1 The Process 198 11.4.2 Stakeholder Communication 198 11.4.3 Ton Container Cleanout 199 11.4.4 Demonstration Tests 199 11.4.5 Materials of Construction 200 11.4.6 Unexpected Events 201 11.5 Closure 201 11.6 Answer Key 202 Reference 208 Case 12 In the Woodshop 209 12.1 Background 211 12.1.1 Band Saw 211 12.1.2 Table Saws 211 12.1.3 The Router 213 12.1.4 Safety 214 12.1.5 Measurements 214 12.2 Case Study Details 214 12.2.1 Exercise 215 12.2.2 The Cove 215 12.2.3 Extra Credit 217 12.3 Closure 217 12.4 Glossary 219 12.5 Solutions 219 12.6 Further Reading 220 References 221 Appendix 222 Glossary 225 Index 235

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn exhaustive review of the history, current state, and future opportunities for harnessing light to accomplish useful work in materials, this book describes the chemistry, physics, and mechanics of light-controlled systems. Describes photomechanical materials and mechanisms, along with key applications Exceptional collection of leading authors, internationally recognized for their work in this growing area Covers the full scope of photomechanical materials: polymers, crystals, ceramics, and nanocomposites Deals with an interdisciplinary coupling of mechanics, materials, chemistry, and physics Emphasizes application opportunities in creating adaptive surface features, shape memory devices, and actuators; while assessing future prospects for utility in optics and photonics and soft roboticsTable of ContentsList of Contributors xi Preface xv 1 A Historical Overview of Photomechanical Effects in Materials, Composites, and Systems 1Toru Ube and Tomiki Ikeda 1.1 Introduction 1 References 25 2 Photochromism in the Solid State 37Oleksandr S. Bushuyev and Christopher J. Barrett 2.1 Molecular Photoswitches in the Solid State 37 2.2 Molecular and Macroscopic Motion of Azobenzene Chromophores 39 2.3 Photomechanical Effects 41 2.4 Solid-State Photochromic Molecular Machines 54 2.5 Surface Mass Transport and Phase Change Effects 62 2.6 Photochromic Reactions in Framework Architectures 65 2.7 Summary and Outlook 68 References 69 3 Photomechanics: Bend, Curl, Topography, and Topology 79Daniel Corbett, Carl D. Modes, and Mark Warner 3.1 The Photomechanics of Liquid-Crystalline Solids 81 3.2 Photomechanics and Its Mechanisms 82 3.3 A Sketch of Macroscopic Mechanical Response in LC Rubbers and Glasses 92 3.4 Photo- and Heat-Induced Topographical and Topological Changes 97 3.5 Continuous Director Variation, Part 1 97 3.6 Mechanico-Geometric Effects, Part 1 100 3.7 Continuous Director Variation, Part 2 100 3.8 Continuous Director Variation, Part 3 103 3.9 Mechanico-Geometric Effects, Part 2 106 3.10 Director Fields with Discontinuities–Advanced Origami! 107 3.11 Mechanico-Geometric Consequences of Nonisometric Origami 110 3.12 Conclusions 110 References 112 4 Photomechanical Effects in Amorphous and Semicrystalline Polymers 117Jeong JaeWie 4.1 Introduction 117 4.2 Polymeric Materials 119 4.3 The Amorphous Polymer State 119 4.4 The Semicrystalline Polymer State 121 4.5 Absorption Processes 124 4.6 Photomechanical Effects in Amorphous and Semicrystalline Azobenzene-Functionalized Polymers 126 4.7 Molecular Alignment 132 4.8 Annealing and Aging 138 4.9 Sub-Tg SegmentalMobility 142 4.10 Cross-Link Density 145 4.11 Concluding Remarks 146 References 148 5 Photomechanical Effects in Liquid-Crystalline Polymer Networks and Elastomers 153Timothy J. White 5.1 Introduction 153 5.2 Optically Responsive Liquid Crystal Polymer Networks 159 5.3 Literature Survey 165 5.4 Outlook and Conclusion 169 References 171 6 Photomechanical Effects in Polymer Nanocomposites 179Balaji Panchapakesan, Farhad Khosravi, James Loomis, and Eugene M. Terentjev 6.1 Introduction 179 6.2 Photomechanical Actuation in Polymer–Nanotube Composites 180 6.3 Fast Relaxation of Carbon Nanotubes in Polymer Composite Actuators 186 6.4 Highly Oriented Nanotubes for Photomechanical Response and Flexible Energy Conversion 191 6.5 Photomechanical Actuation Based on 2-D Nanomaterial (Graphene)–Polymer Composites 205 6.6 Applications of Photomechanical Actuation in Nanopositioning 213 6.7 Future Outlook 224 Acknowledgments 225 References 225 7 Photomechanical Effects in Photochromic Crystals 233Lingyan Zhu, Fei Tong, Rabih O. Al-Kaysi, and Christopher J. Bardeen 7.1 Introduction 233 7.2 General Principles for Organic Photomechanical Materials 234 7.3 History and Background 234 7.4 Modes of Mechanical Action 240 7.5 Photomechanical Molecular Crystal Systems 242 7.6 Future Directions 260 7.7 Conclusion 264 Acknowledgments 264 References 264 8 Photomechanical Effects in Piezoelectric Ceramics 275Kenji Uchino 8.1 Introduction 275 8.2 Photovoltaic Effect 276 8.3 Photostrictive Effect 288 8.4 Photostrictive Device Applications 294 8.5 Concluding Remarks 299 References 300 9 Switching Surface Topographies Based on Liquid Crystal Network Coatings 303Danqing Liu and Dirk J. Broer 9.1 Introduction 303 9.2 Liquid Crystal Networks 304 9.3 Conclusions 322 References 322 10 Photoinduced Shape Programming 327Taylor H.Ware 10.1 One-Way Shape Memory 329 10.2 Two-Way Shape Memory 343 10.3 Summary and Outlook 358 References 358 11 Photomechanical Effects to Enable Devices 369M. Ravi Shankar 11.1 Introduction 369 11.2 Analog Photomechanical Actuators 371 11.3 Discrete-State (Digital) Photomechanical Actuators 373 11.4 Photomechanical Mechanisms and Machines 387 References 388 12 Photomechanical Effects in Materials, Composites, and Systems: Outlook and Future Challenges 393Timothy J.White 12.1 Introduction 393 12.2 Outlook and Challenges 393 12.3 Conclusion 401 References 401 Index 405

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn innovative and timely guide to the modeling, design and implementation of large-range compliant micropositioning systems based on flexure hinges Features innovative compact mechanism designs for large-range translational and rotational positioning Provides original and concise treatment of various flexure hinges with well-presented design and control methods Focuses on design implementation and applications through detailed examples Table of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgments xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Micropositioning Techniques 1 1.2 Compliant Guiding Mechanisms 2 1.2.1 Basic Flexure Hinges 2 1.2.2 Translational Flexure Hinges 3 1.2.3 Translational Positioning Mechanisms 4 1.2.4 Rotational Positioning Mechanisms 8 1.2.5 Multi-Stroke Positioning Mechanisms 10 1.3 Actuation and Sensing 11 1.4 Control Issues 12 1.5 Book Outline 14 References 14 Part I LARGE-RANGE TRANSLATIONAL MICROPOSITIONING SYSTEMS 2 Uniaxial Flexure Stage 21 2.1 Concept of MCPF 21 2.1.1 Limitation of Conventional Flexures 21 2.1.2 Proposal of MCPF 23 2.2 Design of a Large-Range Flexure Stage 25 2.2.1 Mechanism Design 25 2.2.2 Analytical Modeling 26 2.2.3 Architecture Optimization 29 2.2.4 Structure Improvement 31 2.3 Prototype Development and Performance Testings 33 2.3.1 Statics Performance Testing 34 2.3.2 Dynamics Performance Testing 35 2.4 Sliding Mode Controller Design 35 2.4.1 Dynamics Modeling 35 2.4.2 DSMC Design 36 2.5 Experimental Studies 38 2.5.1 Plant Model Identification 38 2.5.2 Controller Setup 39 2.5.3 Set-Point Positioning Results 39 2.5.4 Sinusoidal Positioning Results 41 2.6 Conclusion 42 References 44 3 XY Flexure Stage 45 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 XY Stage Design 46 3.2.1 Decoupled XY Stage Design with MCPF 46 3.2.2 Buckling/Bending Effect Consideration 49 3.2.3 Actuation Issues 51 3.3 Model Verification and Prototype Development 52 3.3.1 Performance Assessment with FEA Simulation 52 3.3.2 Prototype Fabrication 54 3.3.3 Open-Loop Experimental Results 54 3.4 EMPC Control Scheme Design 55 3.4.1 Problem Formulation 56 3.4.2 EMPC Scheme Design 57 3.4.3 State Observer Design 60 3.4.4 Tracking Error Analysis 61 3.5 Simulation and Experimental Studies 61 3.5.1 Plant Model Identification 61 3.5.2 Controller Parameter Design 64 3.5.3 Simulation Studies and Discussion 64 3.5.4 Experimental Results and Discussion 66 3.6 Conclusion 67 References 69 4 Two-Layer XY Flexure Stage 70 4.1 Introduction 70 4.2 Mechanism Design 71 4.2.1 Design of a Two-Layer XY Stage with MCPF 71 4.2.2 Structure Improvement of the XY Stage 72 4.3 Parametric Design 73 4.3.1 Motion Range Design 73 4.3.2 Stiffness and Actuation Force Design 74 4.3.3 Critical Load of Buckling 75 4.3.4 Resonant Frequency 75 4.3.5 Out-of-Plane Payload Capability 76 4.3.6 Influences of Manufacturing Tolerance 77 4.4 Experimental Studies and Results 79 4.4.1 Prototype Development 80 4.4.2 Statics Performance Testing 80 4.4.3 Dynamics Performance Testing 81 4.4.4 Positioning Performance Testing 83 4.4.5 Contouring Performance Testing 84 4.4.6 Control Bandwidth Testing 86 4.4.7 Discussion and Future Work 88 4.5 Conclusion 89 References 89 Part II MULTI-STROKE TRANSLATIONAL MICROPOSITIONING SYSTEMS 5 Dual-Stroke Uniaxial Flexure Stage 93 5.1 Introduction 93 5.2 Mechanism Design and Analysis 94 5.2.1 Mechanism Design to Minimize Interference Behavior 94 5.2.2 Mechanism Design to Achieve Large Stroke 99 5.2.3 FEA Simulation and Design Improvement 101 5.3 Prototype Development and Open-Loop Testing 104 5.3.1 Experimental Setup 106 5.3.2 Statics Performance Testing 106 5.3.3 Dynamics Performance Testing 107 5.4 Controller Design and Experimental Studies 109 5.4.1 Controller Design 109 5.4.2 Experimental Studies 110 5.5 Conclusion 111 References 113 6 Dual-Stroke, Dual-Resolution Uniaxial Flexure Stage 114 6.1 Introduction 114 6.2 Conceptual Design 115 6.2.1 Design of a Compliant Stage with Dual Ranges 115 6.2.2 Design of a Compliant Stage with Dual Resolutions 116 6.3 Mechanism Design 117 6.3.1 Stiffness Calculation 118 6.3.2 Motion Range Design 119 6.3.3 Motor Stroke and Driving Force Requirement 120 6.3.4 Sensor Deployment 121 6.4 Performance Evaluation 123 6.4.1 Analytical Model Results 123 6.4.2 FEA Simulation Results 124 6.5 Prototype Development and Experimental Studies 125 6.5.1 Prototype Development 126 6.5.2 Statics Performance Testing 127 6.5.3 Dynamics Performance Testing 129 6.5.4 Further Discussion 131 6.6 Conclusion 133 References 133 7 Multi-Stroke, Multi-Resolution XY Flexure Stage 135 7.1 Introduction 135 7.2 Conceptual Design 136 7.2.1 Design of Flexure Stage with Multiple Strokes 136 7.2.2 Design of Flexure Stage with Multiple Resolutions 138 7.3 Flexure-Based Compliant Mechanism Design 139 7.3.1 Compliant Element Selection 139 7.3.2 Design of a Two-Axis Stage 140 7.4 Parametric Design 141 7.4.1 Design of Motion Strokes 141 7.4.2 Design of Coarse/Fine Sensor Resolution Ratio 144 7.4.3 Actuation Issue Consideration 145 7.5 Stage Performance Assessment 146 7.5.1 Analytical Model Evaluation Results 146 7.5.2 FEA Simulation Results 146 7.6 Prototype Development and Experimental Studies 149 7.6.1 Prototype Development 149 7.6.2 Statics Performance Testing 150 7.6.3 Dynamics Performance Testing 154 7.6.4 Circular Contouring Testing 156 7.6.5 Discussion 156 7.7 Conclusion 159 References 159 Part III LARGE-RANGE ROTATIONAL MICROPOSITIONING SYSTEMS 8 Rotational Stage with Linear Drive 163 8.1 Introduction 163 8.2 Design of MCRF 164 8.2.1 Limitation of Conventional Radial Flexures 164 8.2.2 Proposal of MCRF 165 8.2.3 Analytical Models 166 8.3 Design of a Rotary Stage with MCRF 169 8.3.1 Consideration of Actuation Issues 170 8.3.2 Consideration of Sensing Issues 172 8.4 Performance Evaluation with FEA Simulation 172 8.4.1 Analytical Model Results 172 8.4.2 FEA Simulation Results 173 8.4.3 Structure Improvement 175 8.5 Prototype Development and Experimental Studies 176 8.5.1 Prototype Development 176 8.5.2 Open-Loop Performance Testing 177 8.5.3 Controller Design and Closed-Loop Performance Testing 178 8.5.4 Further Discussion 181 8.6 Conclusion 183 References 184 9 Rotational Stage with Rotary Drive 185 9.1 Introduction 185 9.2 New Design of MCRF 186 9.2.1 MCRF Design 186 9.2.2 Analytical Model Not Considering Deformation 187 9.2.3 Analytical Model Considering Deformation 189 9.3 Design of the Rotary Stage 192 9.3.1 Actuator Selection 194 9.3.2 Sensor Design 194 9.4 Performance Evaluation with FEA Simulation 196 9.4.1 Analytical Model Results 197 9.4.2 FEA Simulation Results 197 9.5 Prototype Fabrication and Experimental Testing 201 9.5.1 Prototype Development 201 9.5.2 Statics Performance Testing 202 9.5.3 Dynamics Performance Testing 206 9.5.4 Discussion 206 9.6 Conclusion 207 References 208 Part IV APPLICATIONS TO COMPLIANT GRIPPER DESIGN 10 Large-Range Rotary Gripper 213 10.1 Introduction 213 10.1.1 Structure Design and Driving Method 213 10.1.2 Sensing Requirements 214 10.2 Mechanism Design and Analysis 216 10.2.1 Actuation Issues 216 10.2.2 Position and Force Sensing Issues 218 10.3 Performance Evaluation with FEA Simulation 222 10.3.1 Analytical Model Results 222 10.3.2 FEA Simulation Results 222 10.4 Prototype Development and Calibration 227 10.4.1 Prototype Development 227 10.4.2 Calibration of Position Sensor 228 10.4.3 Calibration of Force Sensor 229 10.4.4 Verification of Force Sensor 230 10.4.5 Consistency Testing of the Sensors 231 10.5 Performance Testing Results 232 10.5.1 Testing of Gripping Sensing Performance 232 10.5.2 Testing of Horizontal Interaction Detection 235 10.5.3 Testing of Vertical Interaction Detection 236 10.5.4 Testing of Dynamics Performance 237 10.5.5 Applications to Pick–Transport–Place in Assembly 238 10.5.6 Further Discussion 239 10.6 Conclusion 242 References 242 11 MEMS Rotary Gripper 244 11.1 Introduction 244 11.2 MEMS Gripper Design 245 11.2.1 Actuator Design 246 11.2.2 Sensor Design 249 11.3 Performance Evaluation with FEA Simulation 251 11.3.1 Statics Analysis 252 11.3.2 Dynamics Analysis 254 11.4 Gripper Fabrication 254 11.5 Experimental Results and Discussion 255 11.5.1 Gripping Range Testing Results 255 11.5.2 Gripping Force Testing Results 258 11.5.3 Interaction Force Testing Results 260 11.5.4 Demonstration of Micro-object Gripping 261 11.5.5 Further Discussion 262 11.6 Conclusion 264 References 266 Index 267

Read more less

Book SynopsisLEDs are in the midst of revolutionizing the lighting industry Up-to-date and comprehensive coverage of light-emitting materials and devices used in solid state lighting and displaysPresents the fundamental principles underlying luminescenceIncludes inorganic and organic materials and devicesLEDs offer high efficiency, long life and mercury free lighting solutionsTable of ContentsList of Contributors xi Series Preface xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii About the Editor xix 1. Principles of Solid State Luminescence 1Adrian Kitai 1.1 Introduction to Radiation from an Accelerating Charge 1 1.2 Radiation from an Oscillating Dipole 4 1.3 Quantum Description of an Electron during a Radiation Event 5 1.4 The Exciton 7 1.5 Two-Electron Atoms 10 1.6 Molecular Excitons 16 1.7 Band-to-Band Transitions 19 1.8 Photometric Units 23 1.9 The Light Emitting Diode 28 References 30 2. Quantum Dots for Displays and Solid State Lighting 31Jesse R. Manders, Debasis Bera, Lei Qian and Paul H. Holloway 2.1 Introduction 31 2.2 Nanostructured Materials 34 2.3 Quantum Dots 35 2.3.1 History of Quantum Dots 36 2.3.2 Structure and Properties Relationship 36 2.3.3 Quantum Confinement Effects on Band Gap 38 2.4 Relaxation Process of Excitons 41 2.4.1 Radiative Relaxation 42 2.4.2 Nonradiative Relaxation Process 45 2.5 Blinking Effect 46 2.6 Surface Passivation 47 2.6.1 Organically Capped QDs 47 2.6.2 Inorganically Passivated QDs 48 2.7 Synthesis Processes 49 2.7.1 Top-Down Synthesis 49 2.7.2 Bottom-Up Approach 50 2.8 Optical Properties and Applications 53 2.8.1 Displays 53 2.8.2 Solid State Lighting 73 2.8.3 Biological Applications 78 2.9 Perspective 81 Acknowledgments 82 References 82 3. Color Conversion Phosphors for Light Emitting Diodes 91Jack Silver, George R. Fern and Robert Withnall 3.1 Introduction 91 3.2 Disadvantages of Using LEDs Without Color Conversion Phosphors 93 3.3 Phosphors for Converting the Color of Light Emitted by LEDs 95 3.3.1 General Considerations 95 3.3.2 Requirements of Color Conversion Phosphors 95 3.3.3 Commonly Used Activators in Color Conversion Phosphors 97 3.3.4 Strategies for Generating White Light from LEDs 97 3.3.5 Outstanding Problems with Color Conversion Phosphors for LEDs 98 3.4 Survey of the Synthesis and Properties of Some Currently Available Color Conversion Phosphors 99 3.4.1 Phosphor synthesis 99 3.4.2 Metal Oxide Based Phosphors 99 3.4.3 Metal Sulfide Based Phosphors 113 3.4.4 Metal Nitrides 117 3.4.5 Alkaline Earth Metal Oxo-Nitrides 120 3.4.6 Metal Fluoride Phosphors 121 3.5 Multi-Phosphor pcLEDs 122 3.6 Quantum Dots 123 3.7 Laser Diodes 124 3.8 Conclusions 125 Acknowledgments 125 References 126 4. Nitride and Oxynitride Phosphors for Light Emitting Diodes 135Le Wang and Rong-Jun Xie 4.1 Introduction 135 4.2 Synthesis of Nitride and Oxynitride Phosphors 138 4.2.1 Solid State Reaction Method 138 4.2.2 Gas Reduction and Nitridation 139 4.2.3 Carbothermal Reduction and Nitridation 140 4.2.4 Alloy Nitridation 140 4.2.5 Ammonothermal Synthesis 141 4.3 Photoluminescence Properties of Nitride and Oxynitride Phosphors 142 4.3.1 Luminescence Spectra of Typical Activators 142 4.4 Emerging Nitride Phosphors and Their Synthesis 165 4.4.1 Narrow-Band Red Nitride Phosphors 165 4.4.2 Narrow-Band Green Nitride Phosphors 167 4.5 Applications of Nitride Phosphors 169 4.5.1 General Lighting 169 4.5.2 LCD Backlight 172 References 173 5. Organic Light Emitting Device Materials for Displays 183Tyler Davidson-Hall, Yoshitaka Kajiyama and Hany Aziz 5.1 Introduction to OLEDs and Organic Electroluminscent Materials 184 5.2 OLED Light Emitting Materials 186 5.2.1 Neat Emitters 187 5.2.2 Guest Emitters 192 5.2.3 Aggregate-Induced Emission 201 5.3 OLED Displays 203 5.3.1 RGB Color Patterning Approaches 203 5.3.2 Display Addressing Approaches 204 5.3.3 FMM Technology 207 5.3.4 Alternative Fabrication Techniques 208 5.3.5 Outlook on OLED Display Commercialization 212 5.4 Quantum Dot Light Emitting Devices 213 5.4.1 QD Optimization by Core–Shell Morphology 214 5.4.2 Organic Charge Transport QD-LEDs 215 5.4.3 Hybrid Organic–Inorganic Charge Transport QD-LEDs 217 5.4.4 Energy Transfer Enhanced QD-LEDs 219 5.4.5 QD-LED Lifetime 220 References 220 6. White-Light Emitting Materials for Organic Light-Emitting Diode-Based Displays and Lighting 231Simone Lenk, Michael Thomschke and Sebastian Reineke 6.1 Introduction 231 6.2 White Organic Light-Emitting Diodes 233 6.3 Photometry and Radiometry 236 6.3.1 OLED Efficiencies 239 6.3.2 Color Stimulus Specification 239 6.3.3 Color Correlated Temperature 240 6.3.4 Color Rendering Index 241 6.3.5 White Light 241 6.4 Device Optics 242 6.4.1 Optical Properties of Thin Films 242 6.4.2 Optical Outcoupling 245 6.4.3 Top-Emitting OLEDs 247 6.4.4 Simulation Tools 248 6.5 Materials for Efficient White Electroluminescence 248 6.5.1 Spin Statistics for Electroluminescence 248 6.5.2 Fluorescence-Emitting Molecules 249 6.5.3 Advanced Concepts Comprising Fluorescent Emitters 251 6.5.4 Phosphorescence-Emitting Molecules 251 6.5.5 Single White-Light Emitting Phosphorescent Materials 256 6.5.6 Thermally Activated Delayed Fluorescence-Based Emitters 257 6.5.7 Phosphorescence Versus Thermally Activated Delayed Fluorescence 261 6.5.8 TADF Assisted Fluorescence (TAF) Emitters 263 6.6 Polymer Concepts 263 6.6.1 Various Concepts Involving Polymer Materials 265 6.6.2 Learning from High Performance Small Molecules for High Efficiency Polymers 267 6.7 Summary and Outlook 268 References 269 7. Light Emitting Diode Materials and Devices 273Michael R. Krames 7.1 Introduction 273 7.2 Light Emitting Diode Basics 273 7.2.1 Construction 273 7.2.2 Recombination Processes 275 7.2.3 Heterojunctions 277 7.2.4 Quantum Wells 278 7.2.5 Current Injection 278 7.2.6 Forward voltage 280 7.3 Material Systems 280 7.3.1 Ga(As,P) 280 7.3.2 Ga(As,P):N 281 7.3.3 (Al,Ga)As 282 7.3.4 (Al,Ga)InP 282 7.3.5 (Ga,In)N 283 7.3.6 White Light Generation 285 7.4 Packaging Technologies 288 7.4.1 Low Power 288 7.4.2 Mid Power 288 7.4.3 High Power 289 7.4.4 Chip-On-Board LEDs 290 7.4.5 Multi-Color LEDs 290 7.4.6 Electrostatic Discharge Protection 290 7.5 Performance 291 7.5.1 Light Extraction Efficiency 291 7.5.2 Monochromatic Performance 292 7.5.3 White-Emitting Performance 298 7.5.4 Temperature Effects 306 7.5.5 Reliability 306 References 307 8. Alternating Current Thin Film and Powder Electroluminescence 313Adrian Kitai 8.1 Introduction 313 8.2 Background of TFEL 314 8.2.1 Thick Film Dielectric EL Structure 315 8.2.2 Ceramic Sheet Dielectric EL 316 8.2.3 Sphere-Supported TFEL 316 8.3 Theory of Operation 317 8.4 Electroluminescent Phosphors 324 8.5 Thin Film Double-Insulating EL Devices 325 8.6 Current Status of TFEL 327 8.7 Background of AC Powder EL 328 8.8 Mechanism of Light Emission in AC Powder EL 329 8.9 Electroluminescence Characteristics of AC Powder EL Materials 333 8.10 Emission Spectra of AC Powder EL 334 8.11 Luminance Degradation 335 8.12 Moisture and Operating Environment 336 8.13 Current Status and Limitations of Powder EL 336 8.14 Research Directions in AC Powder EL and TFEL 336 References 337 Index 339

Read more less

Book SynopsisNew contributions to the cyclic plasticity of engineering materials Written by leading experts in the field, this book provides an authoritative and comprehensive introduction to cyclic plasticity of metals, polymers, composites and shape memory alloys. Each chapter is devoted to fundamentals of cyclic plasticity or to one of the major classes of materials, thereby providing a wide coverage of the field. The book deals with experimental observations on metals, composites, polymers and shape memory alloys, and the corresponding cyclic plasticity models for metals, polymers, particle reinforced metal matrix composites and shape memory alloys. Also, the thermo-mechanical coupled cyclic plasticity models are discussed for metals and shape memory alloys. Key features: Provides a comprehensive introduction to cyclic plasticity Presents Macroscopic and microscopic observations on the ratchetting of different materials Establishes cTable of ContentsIntroduction 1 I.1 Monotonic Elastoplastic Deformation 1 I.2 Cyclic Elastoplastic Deformation 3 I.2.1 Cyclic Softening/Hardening Features 3 I.2.2 Mean Stress Relaxation 6 I.2.3 Ratchetting 7 I.3 Contents of This Book 9 References 10 1 Fundamentals of Inelastic Constitutive Models 13 1.1 Fundamentals of Continuum Mechanics 13 1.1.1 Kinematics 13 1.1.2 Definitions of Stress Tensors 15 1.1.3 Frame‐Indifference and Objective Rates 16 1.1.4 Thermodynamics 17 1.1.4.1 The First Thermodynamic Principle 17 1.1.4.2 The Second Thermodynamic Principle 17 1.1.5 Constitutive Theory of Solid Continua 18 1.1.5.1 Constitutive Theory of Elastic Solids 18 1.1.5.2 Constitutive Theory of Elastoplastic Solids 19 1.2 Classical Inelastic Constitutive Models 22 1.2.1 J2 Plasticity Model 23 1.2.2 Unified Visco‐plasticity Model 24 1.3 Fundamentals of Crystal Plasticity 25 1.3.1 Single Crystal Version 25 1.3.2 Polycrystalline Version 27 1.4 Fundamentals of Meso‐mechanics for Composite Materials 28 1.4.1 Eshelby’s Inclusion Theory 29 1.4.2 Mori–Tanaka’s Homogenization Approach 30 References 32 2 Cyclic Plasticity of Metals: I. Macroscopic and Microscopic Observations and Analysis of Micro-mechanism 35 2.1 Macroscopic Experimental Observations 35 2.1.1 Cyclic Softening/Hardening Features in More Details 35 2.1.1.1 Uniaxial Cases 35 2.1.1.2 Multiaxial Cases 43 2.1.2 Ratchetting Behaviors 47 2.1.2.1 Uniaxial Cases 48 2.1.2.2 Multiaxial Cases 62 2.1.3 Thermal Ratchetting 75 2.2 Microscopic Observations of Dislocation Patterns and Their Evolutions 77 2.2.1 FCC Metals 80 2.2.1.1 Uniaxial Case 80 2.2.1.2 Multiaxial Case 86 2.2.2 BCC Metals 95 2.2.2.1 Uniaxial Case 95 2.2.2.2 Multiaxial Case 103 2.3 Micro‐mechanism of Ratchetting 111 2.3.1 FCC Metals 111 2.3.1.1 Uniaxial Ratchetting 111 2.3.1.2 Multiaxial Ratchetting 114 2.3.2 BCC Metals 115 2.3.2.1 Uniaxial Ratchetting 115 2.3.2.2 Multiaxial Ratchetting 117 2.4 Summary 118 References 119 3 Cyclic Plasticity of Metals: II. Constitutive Models 123 3.1 Macroscopic Phenomenological Constitutive Models 124 3.1.1 Framework of Cyclic Plasticity Models 124 3.1.1.1 Governing Equations 124 3.1.1.2 Brief Review on Kinematic Hardening Rules 126 3.1.1.3 Combined Kinematic and Isotropic Hardening Rules 131 3.1.2 Viscoplastic Constitutive Model for Ratchetting at Elevated Temperatures 136 3.1.2.1 Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening Rules 136 3.1.2.2 Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening Rule 137 3.1.2.3 Verification and Discussion 138 3.1.3 Constitutive Models for Time‐Dependent Ratchetting 144 3.1.3.1 Separated Version 146 3.1.3.2 Unified Version 152 3.1.4 Evaluation of Thermal Ratchetting 161 3.2 Physical Nature‐Based Constitutive Models 163 3.2.1 Crystal Plasticity‐Based Constitutive Models 163 3.2.1.1 Single Crystal Version 163 3.2.1.2 Application to Polycrystalline Metals 167 3.2.2 Dislocation‐Based Crystal Plasticity Model 175 3.2.2.1 Single Crystal Version 175 3.2.2.2 Verification and Discussion 177 3.2.3 Multi‐mechanism Constitutive Model 183 3.2.3.1 2M1C Model 187 3.2.3.2 2M2C Model 188 3.3 Two Applications of Cyclic Plasticity Models 189 3.3.1 Rolling Contact Fatigue Analysis of Rail Head 189 3.3.1.1 Experimental and Theoretical Evaluation to the Ratchetting of Rail Steels 190 3.3.1.2 Finite Element Simulations 194 3.3.2 Bending Fretting Fatigue Analysis of Axles in Railway Vehicles 197 3.3.2.1 Equivalent Two‐Dimensional Finite Element Model 199 3.3.2.2 Finite Element Simulation to Bending Fretting Process 201 3.3.2.3 Predictions to Crack Initiation Location and Fretting Fatigue Life 203 3.4 Summary 209 References 211 4 Thermomechanically Coupled Cyclic Plasticity of Metallic Materials at Finite Strain 219 4.1 Cyclic Plasticity Model at Finite Strain 221 4.1.1 Framework of Finite Elastoplastic Constitutive Model 221 4.1.1.1 Equations of Kinematics 221 4.1.1.2 Constitutive Equations 221 4.1.1.3 Kinematic and Isotropic Hardening Rules 222 4.1.1.4 Logarithmic Stress Rate 223 4.1.2 Finite Element Implementation of the Proposed Model 224 4.1.2.1 Discretization Equations of the Proposed Model 224 4.1.2.2 Implicit Stress Integration Algorithm 227 4.1.2.3 Consistent Tangent Modulus 228 4.1.3 Verification of the Proposed Model 230 4.1.3.1 Determination of Material Parameters 230 4.1.3.2 Simulation of Monotonic Simple Shear Deformation 230 4.1.3.3 Simulation of Cyclic Free‐End Torsion and Tension–Torsion Deformations 231 4.1.3.4 Simulation of Uniaxial Ratchetting at Finite Strain 235 4.2 Thermomechanically Coupled Cyclic Plasticity Model at Finite Strain 239 4.2.1 Framework of Thermodynamics 239 4.2.1.1 Kinematics and Logarithmic Stress Rate 239 4.2.1.2 Thermodynamic Laws 239 4.2.1.3 Generalized Constitutive Equations 241 4.2.1.4 Restrictions on Specific Heat and Stress Response Function 243 4.2.2 Specific Constitutive Model 244 4.2.2.1 Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening Rule 246 4.2.2.2 Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening Rule 247 4.2.3 Simulations and Discussions 249 4.3 Summary 261 References 262 5 Cyclic Viscoelasticity–Viscoplasticity of Polymers 267 5.1 Experimental Observations 268 5.1.1 Cyclic Softening/Hardening Features 268 5.1.1.1 Uniaxial Strain‐Controlled Cyclic Tests 269 5.1.1.2 Multiaxial Strain‐Controlled Cyclic Tests 273 5.1.2 Ratchetting Behaviors 275 5.1.2.1 Uniaxial Ratchetting 275 5.1.2.2 Multiaxial Ratchetting 288 5.2 Cyclic Viscoelastic Constitutive Model 299 5.2.1 Original Schapery’s Model 302 5.2.1.1 Main Equations of Schapery’s Viscoelastic Model 302 5.2.1.2 Determination of Material Parameters 303 5.2.1.3 Simulations and Discussion 303 5.2.2 Extended Schapery’s Model 304 5.2.2.1 Main Modification 304 5.2.2.2 Simulations and Discussion 307 5.3 Cyclic Viscoelastic–Viscoplastic Constitutive Model 310 5.3.1 Main Equations 310 5.3.1.1 Viscoelasticity 313 5.3.1.2 Viscoplasticity 314 5.3.2 Verification and Discussion 315 5.3.2.1 Determination of Material Parameters 315 5.3.2.2 Simulations and Discussion 316 5.4 Summary 327 References 327 6 Cyclic Plasticity of Particle‐Reinforced Metal Matrix Composites 331 6.1 Experimental Observations 332 6.1.1 Cyclic Softening/Hardening Features 332 6.1.2 Ratchetting Behaviors 335 6.1.2.1 Uniaxial Ratchetting at Room Temperature 335 6.1.2.2 Uniaxial Ratchetting at 573 K 338 6.2 Finite Element Simulations 341 6.2.1 Time‐Independent Cyclic Plasticity 342 6.2.1.1 Main Equations of the Time‐Independent Cyclic Plasticity Model 343 6.2.1.2 Basic Finite Element Model and Simulations 346 6.2.1.3 Effect of Interfacial Bonding 351 6.2.1.4 Results with 3D Multiparticle Finite Element Model 362 6.2.2 Time‐Dependent Cyclic Plasticity 367 6.2.2.1 Finite Element Model 368 6.2.2.2 Simulations and Discussion 368 6.3 Meso‐mechanical Time‐Independent Plasticity Model 373 6.3.1 Framework of the Model 373 6.3.1.1 Time‐Independent Cyclic Plasticity Model for the Matrix 374 6.3.1.2 Extension of the Mori–Tanaka Homogenization Approach 374 6.3.2 Numerical Implementation of the Model 376 6.3.2.1 Under the Strain‐Controlled Loading Condition 376 6.3.2.2 Under the Stress‐Controlled Loading Condition 378 6.3.2.3 Continuum and Algorithmic Consistent Tangent Operators 379 6.3.3 Verification and Discussion 380 6.3.3.1 Determination of Material Parameters 380 6.3.3.2 Simulations and Discussion 380 6.4 Meso‐mechanical Time‐Dependent Plasticity Model 387 6.4.1 Framework of the Model 388 6.4.1.1 Time‐Dependent Cyclic Plasticity Model for the Matrix 389 6.4.1.2 Mori–Tanaka Homogenization Approach 390 6.4.2 Numerical Implementation of the Model 390 6.4.2.1 Generalized Incrementally Affine Linearization Formulation 390 6.4.2.2 Extension of Mori–Tanaka’s Model 391 6.4.2.3 Algorithmic Consistent Tangent Operator and Its Regularization 393 6.4.2.4 Numerical Integration of the Viscoplasticity Model 394 6.4.3 Verification and Discussion 395 6.4.3.1 Under Monotonic Tension 395 6.4.3.2 Under Strain‐Controlled Cyclic Loading Conditions 395 6.4.3.3 Time‐Dependent Uniaxial Ratchetting 395 6.5 Summary 398 References 401 7 Thermomechanical Cyclic Deformation of Shape‐Memory Alloys 405 7.1 Experimental Observations 407 7.1.1 Degeneration of Super‐Elasticity and Transformation Ratchetting 407 7.1.1.1 Thermomechanical Cyclic Deformation Under Strain‐Controlled Loading Conditions 407 7.1.1.2 Thermomechanical Cyclic Deformation Under Uniaxial Stress‐Controlled Loading Conditions 411 7.1.1.3 Thermomechanical Cyclic Deformation Under Multiaxial Stress‐Controlled Loading Conditions 419 7.1.2 Rate‐Dependent Cyclic Deformation of Super‐Elastic NiTi SMAs 426 7.1.2.1 Thermomechanical Cyclic Deformation Under Strain‐Controlled Loading Conditions 428 7.1.2.2 Thermomechanical Cyclic Deformation Under Stress‐Controlled Loading Conditions 434 7.1.3 Thermomechanical Cyclic Deformation of Shape‐Memory NiTi SMAs 441 7.1.3.1 Pure Mechanical Cyclic Deformation under Stress‐Controlled Loading Conditions 441 7.1.3.2 Thermomechanical Cyclic Deformation with Thermal Cycling and Axial Stress 451 7.2 Phenomenological Constitutive Models 452 7.2.1 Pure Mechanical Version 452 7.2.1.1 Thermodynamic Equations and Internal Variables 452 7.2.1.2 Main Equations of Constitutive Model 453 7.2.1.3 Predictions and Discussions 457 7.2.2 Thermomechanical Version 464 7.2.2.1 Strain Definitions 464 7.2.2.2 Evolution Rules of Transformation and Transformation‐Induced Plastic Strains 469 7.2.2.3 Simplified Temperature Field 473 7.2.2.4 Predictions and Discussions 477 7.3 Crystal Plasticity‐Based Constitutive Models 489 7.3.1 Pure Mechanical Version 489 7.3.1.1 Strain Definitions 489 7.3.1.2 Evolution Rules of Internal Variables 492 7.3.1.3 Explicit Scale Transition Rule 494 7.3.1.4 Verifications and Discussions 495 7.3.2 Thermomechanical Version 500 7.3.2.1 Strain Definitions 502 7.3.2.2 Evolution Rules of Internal Variables 503 7.3.2.3 Thermomechanical Coupled Analysis for Temperature Field 505 7.3.2.4 Verifications and Discussions 507 7.4 Summary 524 References 525 Index 531

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis volume contains 40 papers from the following 10 Materials Science and Technology (MS&T''14) symposia: Rustum Roy Memorial Symposium: Processing and Performance of Materials Using Microwaves, Electric and Magnetic Fields, Ultrasound, Lasers, and Mechanical Work Advances in Dielectric Materials and Electronic Devices Innovative Processing and Synthesis of Ceramics, Glasses and Composites Advances in Ceramic Matrix Composites Sintering and Related Powder Processing Science and Technology Advanced Materials for Harsh Environments Thermal Protection Materials and Systems Advanced Solution Based Processing for Ceramic Materials Controlled Synthesis, Processing, and Applications of Structure and Functional Nanomaterials Surface Protection for Enhanced Materials Performance Table of ContentsPreface xi PROCESSING AND PERFORMANCE OF MATERIALS USING MICROWAVES, ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS Single-Mode Microwave Sintering of Er:Al2O3 3Robert Pavlacka, Claire Brennan, Victoria Blair, Raymond Brennan, Constantine Fountzoulas, Jiping Cheng, and Dinesh Agrawal A Study of High Temperature Refractory Insulation for Use in Ceramic and Microwave Metal Heating 13Edward B. Ripley and J. Cook Advancing Composites in Automotive by Electromagnetic Processing 21Lambert Feher Synthesis of Copper Spinels by Microwave Irradiation 33Jun Fukushima, Hirotsugu Takizawa, and Yamato Hayashi Analysis and Design of Multi-Tip Open-Ended Coaxial Probe for Very High Temperature Dielectric Measurements 43E. Ripley, J. Cook, M. Awida, K. Williams, B. Warren, and A. Fathy Magnetic Processing of Lead Free Solder Systems 51Edward Ripley, Russell Hallman, and Ashley C. Stowe Microwave Ultra-Rapid Sintering of Oxide Ceramics 57K. I. Rybakov, Yu. V. Bykov, A. G. Eremeev, S. V. Egorov, V. V. Kholoptsev, A. A. Sorokin, V. E. Semenov Thermal and Non-Thermal Phenomena in Microwave Processing 67N. Yoshikawa DIELECTRIC MATERIALS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES Low Temperatures Dielectric Anomaly in BiFeO3–Based Multiferroic Ceramics 79J. D. S. Guerra, Madhuparna Pal, G. S. Dias, I. A. Santos, R. Guo, and A. S. Bhalla Quantification of Primary and Secondary Contribution on Magnetoelectric Effect of NiFe2O4/Pb(Zr0.52Ti0.48)O3/NiFe2O4 Tri-Layered Composite 87S. Betal, L. F. Cótica, C. T. Morrow, S. Priya, A. Bhalla, and R. Guo Dielectric and Electrical Properties of Undoped and Fe-Doped Yttrium Copper Titanate 95Sunita Sharma, M. M. Singh, and K. D. Mandal Analysis of Birefringence Behavior in the Determination of the Characteristics Temperatures of Transparent Ferroelectric Relaxor Ceramic Systems 107F. P. Milton, E. R. Botero, F. A. Londoño, J. A. Eiras, and D. Garcia Magnetic Sensors Based on Tuned Varistors of Ilmenite-Hematite, IHC45, Oxide Semiconductor 115R. K. Pandey, William A. Stapleton, and Ivan Sutanto Structural, Microstructural and Dielectric Properties of Tri-Layered Aurivillius-Type Structure Bi4Ti3O12 Ferroelectric Ceramics 131I. C. Reis, A. C. Silva, R. Guo, A. S. Bhalla, and J. D. S. Guerra Dielectric Properties and Applications of Nanocrystalline Diamond Thin Films 137N. Govindaraju and R. N. Singh Mounting of Multi-Pin Bare Chips with Ball Pins on a Flexible Polyimide Board 151N. Korobova, Yu Dolgovykh, A. Pogalov, G. Blinov, and S. Timoshenkov ADVANCES IN COMPOSITES Numerical Studies of Infiltration Dynamics of Liquid-Copper and Titanium/Solid-Carbon System 159Khurram Iqbal Reactive Melt Infiltration of Boron Containing Fiber Reinforced Preforms Forming a ZrB2 Matrix 169Marius Kütemeyer, Darren Shandler, Dietmar Koch, and Martin Friess STRUCTURAL CLAY Analysis of Morphologic and Thermic Behavior of Minerals from the Municipality of Campos Dos Goytacazes 183A. R. G. Azevedo, J. Alexandre, G. C.Xavier, S. N. Monteiro, F. M. Margem, N. G. Azeredo, and A. L. C. Paes Characterization of the Clay Used in Manufacturing Structural Clay Brick 191N. G. Azeredo, J. Alexandre, A. R. G. Azevedo, G. C. Xavier, and S. N. Monteiro INNOVATIVE PROCESSING Densification of SHS Obtained Ti2AlC Active Precursor Powder by Hot Pressing Method 205L Chlubny, J. Lis, and M. M. Bucko Numerical Studies of Wetting and Interfacial Phenomena in Liquid-Copper Alloy/Solid-Carbon and Titanium Carbide Systems 213Khurram Iqbal Properties of Porous Silicon Carbide Ceramics Prepared by Soft Templating Approach 221Thibaud Nardin, Benoît Gouze, Julien Cambedouzou, Daniel Meyer, and Olivier Diat Low-Temperature Synthesis Method of Aluminum Nitride Powder 229Kyyoul Yun, Yuya Takahashi, and Shunji Yanase THERMAL PROTECTION MATERIALS AND SYSTEMS Stiffness Response of Oxide Scales on Nickel Based ODS Alloys Exposed To Thermal Cyclic Oxidation 237Belachew N. Amare, Bruce S.-J. Kang, and Mary Anne Alvin HYDRA, A New Hybrid Thermal Protection System for LEO and Moon Mission Re-Entry Vehicles 251Wolfgang P. P. Fischer, J. Barcena, S. Florez, and B. Perez Maturation of AIRBUS D&S Thermal Protection Systems Portfolio 265Wolfgang P. P. Fischer Fabrication and Characterization of C/C-SiC Material Made with Pitch-Based Carbon Fibers 277Thomas Reimer, Ivaylo Petkov, Dietmar Koch, Martin Frieß, and Christoph Dellin MATERIALS FOR HARSH ENVIRONMENTS Electrochemical Behavior of Ti(C,N)-Ni3Al Cermets 297M. B. Holmes, G. J. Kipouros, Z. N. Farhat, and K. P. Plucknett Extending the Lifetime of Mixer Paddles Used in the Production of a Low-Level Radioactive Cementitious Waste Form 309Marissa M. Reigel and Mark D. Fowley ADVANCED SOLUTION AND COLLOIDAL PROCESSING FOR CERAMICS Synthesis, Characterization of FexZr1-xO2 Solid Solution Nanoparticles and Bulk Powders Prepared Using a Sol-Gel Technique 323Guillermo Herrera-Pérez, Antonio Doménech-Carbó, Noemí Montoya, and Javier Alarcón Ferrite Nanoparticles: From Synthesis to New Advanced Materials 335Darja Lisjak CONTROLLED SYNTHESIS, PROCESSING, AND APPLICATIONS OF STRUCTURAL AND FUNCTIONAL NANOMATERIALS Structural and Optical Properties of Dysprosium-Doped SnO2 Nanocrystals and Their LPG-Sensing Behavior 351Ravi Chand Singh, Gurpreet Singh, and Anita Hastir Development and Characterization of a Graphene Nanosheet–Polyaniline (GNS–PANI) Nanocomposite for Conductive Ink Applications 361Ali Ramazani, Nasser Arsalani, Vahid Shirazi Khanamiri, Amin Goljanian Tabrizi,and Mahsa Sadat Safavi Design and Synthesis of Metallic Nanoparticle-Ceramic Support Interfaces for Enhancing Thermal Stability 369D. Driscoll, C. Law, and S.W. Sofie SINTERING AND RELATED POWDER PROCESSING Effect of Alloying Elements on Mechanical Properties and Electrical Conductivity of P/M Copper Alloys Dispersed with Vapor-Grown Carbon Fiber 383Hisashi Imai, Kuan-Yu Chen, Katsuyoshi Kondoh, and Hung-Yin Tsai The Role of Liquid Phase on Microstructure Development and Mechanical Properties in Ceramic Tiles for Interior Wall Facing 393A. Poznyak, I. Levitskii, and S. Barantseva SURFACE PROTECTION FOR ENHANCED PERFORMANCE Simulation and Modeling of a Carburizing Process using Variables for Effective Performance in Service in AISI 1032 Steel 405Adekunle Adegbola, Ghazali Akeem, Ismaila Alabi, Mutiu Kareem, Olugbenga Fashina, Abolade Olaniyan, Joseph Omotoyinbo, and Oladayo Olaniran Pyrochlore Lanthanide Zirconates for Thermal Barrier Coatings 417Honglong Wang, Emily Tarwater, Xinxing Zhang, Zhizhi Sheng, and Jeffrey W. Fergus Optimization and Development of X-ray Microscopy Technique for Investigation of Thermal Barrier Coating 425Navid Asadizanjani, Sina Shahbazmohammadi, and Eric H. Jordan Author Index 441

Read more less

Book SynopsisSignificant research has been done in polymeric nanocomposites and progress has been made in understanding nanofiller-polymer interface and interphase and their relation to nanocomposite properties. However, the information is scattered in many different publication media. This is the first book that consolidates the current knowledge on understanding, characterization and tailoring interfacial interactions between nanofillers and polymers by bringing together leading researchers and experts in this field to present their cutting edge research. Eleven chapters authored by senior subject specialists cover topics including: Thermodynamic mechanisms governing nanofiller dispersion, engineering of interphase with nanofillers Role of interphase in governing the mechanical, electrical, thermal and other functional properties of nanocomposites, characterization and modelling of the interphase Effects of crystallization on the interface, chemicalTable of ContentsPreface xiii Part 1 Nanocomposite Interfaces/Interphases 1 Polymer Nanocomposite Interfaces: The Hidden Lever for Optimizing Performance in Spherical Nanofilled Polymers 3 Ying Li, Yanhui Huang, Timothy Krentz, Bharath Natarajan, Tony Neely and Linda S. Schadler 1.1 Introduction 4 1.1.1 Dispersion Control 5 1.1.2 Interface Structure 6 1.1.3 Interface Properties 6 1.1.4 Measuring and Modeling the Interface 7 1.2 Dispersion Control through Interfacial Modification 8 1.2.1 Introduction 8 1.2.2 Short Ligands 8 1.2.3 Polymer Brush 11 1.2.3.1 Polymer Brush Synthesis Methods 12 1.2.3.2 Enthalpic and Entropic Contributions of Polymer Brushes to Dispersion Control 13 1.3 Interface Structure 16 1.3.1 Introduction 16 1.3.2 Effects of Particle Size 17 1.3.3 Effects of Crystallinity and Crosslinking 18 1.3.4 Effects of Polymer Brush Penetration 19 1.3.4.1 The Athermal Case 19 1.3.4.2 The Enthalpic Case 21 1.3.5 Characterizing the Interface Structure 22 1.4 Interface Properties and Characterization Techniques 24 1.4.1 Introduction 24 1.4.2 Molecular Mobility in Nanocomposite Interfaces 25 1.4.3 Thermomechanical Properties and Measurements 28 1.4.3.1 Direct Measurement 30 1.4.3.2 Indirect Methods 32 1.4.4 Dielectric Properties and Measurements 40 1.4.4.1 Effects of Nanofillers 42 1.4.4.2 Measurement Techniques 43 1.4.4.3 Indirect Measurement 44 1.4.4.4 Finite Element Modeling 50 1.4.5 Remarks on Characterization Methods 52 1.5 Summary 53 Acknowledgements 54 References 55 2 Interphase Engineering with Nanofillers in Fiber-Reinforced Polymer Composites 71 József Karger-Kocsis, Sándor Kéki, Haroon Mahmood and Alessandro Pegoretti 2.1 Introduction 72 2.2 Interphase Tailoring for Stress Transfer 74 2.2.1 Coating with Nanofillers 74 2.2.2 Creation of Hierarchical Fibers 80 2.2.2.1 Chemical Grafting of Nanofillers 80 2.2.2.2 Chemical Vapor Deposition (CVD) 81 2.2.2.3 Other “Grafting” Techniques 83 2.2.3 Effects of Matrix Modification with Nanofillers 85 2.3 Interphase Tailoring for Functionality 87 2.3.1 Sensing/Damage Detection 87 2.3.2 Self-Healing/Repair 89 2.3.3 Damping 91 2.4 Outlook and Future Trends 91 2.5 Summary 93 2.6 Acknowledgements 93 2.7 Nomenclature 94 References 94 3 Formation and Functionality of Interphase in Polymer Nanocomposites 103 Peng-Cheng Ma, Bin Hao and Jang-Kyo Kim 3.1 Introduction 103 3.2 Formation of Interphase in Polymer Nanocomposites 105 3.3 Functionality of Interphase in Polymer Nanocomposites 111 3.3.1 Load Transfer in Nanocomposites 111 3.3.2 Reduction in Growth Rate of Fatigue Cracks in Nanocomposites 116 3.3.3 Controlling the Fracture Behavior of Nanocomposites 119 3.3.4 Enhancing the Damping Properties of Nanocomposites 121 3.3.5 Channels for the Transport of Ions and Moisture in Nanocomposites 123 3.3.6 Phonon Scattering in Nanocomposites 125 3.3.7 Electron Transfer in Nanocomposites 128 3.4 Summary and Prospects 130 Acknowledgements 133 References 133 4 Impact of Crystallization on the Interface in Polymer Nanocomposites 139 Nandika D’Souza Siddhi Pendse, Laxmi Sahu, Ajit Ranade and Shailesh Vidhate 4.1 Introduction 140 4.2 Thermodynamics of Crystallization 142 4.3 Nylon Nanocomposites 144 4.4 Dispersion of MLS in Nanocomposites 145 4.5 Effect of MLS on Thermal Transitions in Nylon 146 4.6 Permeability 149 4.7 PET Nanocomposites 151 4.8 Dispersion of MLS in Nanocomposites 151 4.9 Effect of MLS on Thermal Transitions in PET 151 4.10 PEN Nanocomposites 156 4.11 Dispersion of MLS in Nanocomposites 156 4.12 Effect of MLS on Thermal Transitions in PEN 157 4.13 Permeability 162 4.14 The Role of the Interface in Permeability: PET versus PEN 162 4.15 Summary 167 References 168 5 Improved Nanofiller-Matrix Bonding and Distribution in GnP-reinforced Polymer Nanocomposites by Surface Plasma Treatments of GnP 171 Rafael J. Zaldivar and Hyun I. Kim 5.1 Introduction 172 5.2 Experimental 173 5.2.1 Composite Fabrication 173 5.2.2 Image Analysis 174 5.2.3 Raman Spectroscopy 174 5.2.4 X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS) 174 5.2.5 Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM) 175 5.2.6 Mechanical Testing 175 5.3 Results 175 5.4 Conclusions 187 Acknowledgement 187 References 187 6 Interfacial Effects in Polymer Nanocomposites Studied by Thermal and Dielectric Techniques 191 Panagiotis Klonos, Apostolos Kyritsis and Polycarpos Pissis 6.1 Introduction 192 6.2 Experimental Techniques 197 6.2.1 Differential Scanning Calorimetry (DSC) 197 6.2.2 Dielectric Techniques 202 6.2.2.1 Broadband Dielectric Spectroscopy (BDS) 203 6.2.2.2 Thermally Stimulated Depolarization Current (TSDC) Techniques 207 6.3 Evaluation in Terms of Interfacial Characteristics 209 6.3.1 Analysis of DSC Measurements 209 6.3.2 Analysis of Dielectric Measurements 211 6.3.3 Thickness of the Interfacial Layer 213 6.4 Examples 214 6.4.1 DSC Measurements 214 6.4.2 Dielectric Measurements 221 6.5 Prospects 235 6.6 Summary 236 Acknowledgements 237 References 237 Part 2 Techniques to Characterize/Control Nanoadhesion 7 Investigation of Interfacial Interactions between Nanofillers and Polymer Matrices Using a Variety of Techniques 251 Luqi Liu 7.1 Introduction 251 7.2 Observation of Interfacial Layer in Nanostructured Carbon Materials-based Nanocomposites 253 7.2.1 Characterization of Interface Layer Around CNTs 253 7.2.2 Characterization of Interface Layer Around Graphene Sheets 255 7.3 Interfacial Properties between Nanofiller and Polymer Matrix 256 7.3.1 Theoretical Simulations of CNT and/or Graphene-based Nanocomposites 256 7.3.1.1 Theoretical Simulation of CNT-based Nanocomposites 256 7.3.1.2 Theoretical Simulation of Graphene-based Nanocomposites 258 7.3.2 Experimental Studies to Characterize Interfacial Behavior in CNT and/or Graphene-based Nanocomposite Systems 260 7.3.2.1 Indirect Measurement 261 7.3.2.2 Direct Measurement 261 7.4 Summary 270 Acknowledgements 271 References 271 8 Chemical and Physical Techniques for Surface Modification of Nanocellulose Reinforcements 279 Viktoriya Pakharenko, Muhammad Pervaiz, Hitesh Pande and Mohini Sain 8.1 Introduction 279 8.2 Chemical Surface Modification 281 8.2.1 Acetylation 281 8.2.2 Silylation 284 8.2.3 Bacterial Treatment 285 8.2.4 Grafting 287 8.2.5 Surfactant Adsorption 289 8.2.6 TEMPO-mediated Oxidation 290 8.2.7 Click chemistry 292 8.3 Physical Surface Modification 292 8.3.1 Plasma 292 8.3.2 Corona 297 8.3.3 Laser 299 8.3.4 Flame 299 8.4 Use of Ions 300 8.5 Summary 300 Acknowledgments 301 References 301 9 Nondestructive Sensing of Interface/Interphase Damage in Fiber/Matrix Nanocomposites 307 Zuo-Jia Wang, Dong-Jun Kwon, Jin-Yeong Choi, Pyeong-Su Shin, K. Lawrence DeVries and Joung-Man Park 9.1 Introduction 308 9.2 Experimental Specimens and Methods 311 9.2.1 Gradient Specimen Test 311 9.2.2 Dual Matrix Fragmentation Test 314 9.3 Damage Sensing Using Electrical Resistance Measurements 317 9.3.1 Electrical Resistance Measurement for Strain Sensing Application 317 9.3.2 Electrical Resistance Measurement for Interface/Interphase Evaluation 321 9.4 Summary 327 References 327 10 Development of Polymeric Biocomposites: Particulate Incorporation, Interphase Generation and Evaluation by Nanoindentation 333 Oisik Das and Debes Bhattacharyya 10.1 Introduction 334 10.2 The Definitions of Composite and its Constituents 337 10.2.1 Composite 337 10.2.2 Biocomposite 337 10.2.3 The Reinforcement 337 10.2.4 The Matrix 338 10.3 Physical and Chemical Structures of Bio–based Reinforcements 339 10.3.1 Plant/Vegetable-based Reinforcements/Fibres 339 10.3.1.1 Physical Structure 339 10.3.1.2 Chemical Structure 339 10.3.2 Animal-based Reinforcements/Fibres 342 10.3.2.1 Physical Structure 342 10.3.2.2 Chemical Structure 343 10.4 Particulate and Short Fibre Composites 344 10.4.1 Biochar as Potential New Bio-based Particulate Reinforcement 345 10.4.2 Properties of Particulate-based Composites: Governing Factors 351 10.4.2.1 Particulate Properties 351 10.4.2.2 Particulate Structure 355 10.5 Nanoindentation Technique to Determine Interphase and Composite Properties 358 10.5.1 The Technique and Theory of Nanoindentation 358 10.5.1.1 Different Types of Indenter Tips 360 10.5.1.2 Nanoindentation Theory 362 10.5.1.3 Nanoindentation Instrument 364 10.5.2 Nanoindentation on Polymeric Composites and their Interphase 364 10.5 Concluding Remarks 369 References 370 11 Perspectives on the Use of Molecular Dynamics Simulations to Characterize Filler-Matrix Adhesion and Nanocomposite Mechanical Properties 375 Sanket A. Deshmukh, Benjamin J. Hanson, Qian Jiang and Melissa A. Pasquinelli 11.1 Introduction 376 11.2 Overview of Molecular Dynamics (MD) Simulations 377 11.3 Characterization of Interfacial Adhesion with MD Simulations 381 11.3.1 Quantifying Adhesion Strength 381 11.3.2 Effect of the Strength of Matrix-Filler Interactions 383 11.3.3 Effect of Filler Geometry 386 11.3.4 Effect of Ordering and Crosslinking within the Polymer Matrix 388 11.4 Characterization of Mechanical Properties with MD Simulations 391 11.4.1 Predicting Static Mechanical Properties 392 11.4.2 Predicting Dynamic Mechanical Properties 395 11.5 Prospects 399 11.6 Summary 400 Acknowledgements 400 References 400

Read more less

Book SynopsisRobust Optimization is a method to improve robustness using low-cost variations of a single, conceptual design. The benefits of Robust Optimization include faster product development cycles; faster launch cycles; fewer manufacturing problems; fewer field problems; lower-cost, higher performing products and processes; and lower warranty costs. All these benefits can be realized if engineering and product development leadership of automotive and manufacturing organizations leverage the power of using Robust Optimization as a competitive weapon. Written by world renowned authors, Robust Optimization: World's Best Practices for Developing Winning Vehicles, is a ground breaking book whichintroduces the technical management strategy of Robust Optimization. The authors discuss what the strategy entails, 8 steps for Robust Optimization and Robust Assessment, and how to lead it in a technical organization with an implementation strategy. Robust Optimization is defined anTable of ContentsPreface xxi Acknowledgments xxv About the Authors xxvii 1 Introduction to Robust Optimization 1 1.1 What Is Quality as Loss? 2 1.2 What Is Robustness? 4 1.3 What Is Robust Assessment? 5 1.4 What Is Robust Optimization? 5 1.4.1 Noise Factors 8 1.4.2 Parameter Design 9 1.4.3 Tolerance Design 13 2 Eight Steps for Robust Optimization and Robust Assessment 17 2.1 Before Eight Steps: Select Project Area 18 2.2 Eight Steps for Robust Optimization 19 2.2.1 Step 1: Define Scope for Robust Optimization 19 2.2.2 Step 2: Identify Ideal Function/Response 20 2.2.2.1 Ideal Function: Dynamic Response 20 2.2.2.2 Nondynamic Responses 21 2.2.3 Step 3: Develop Signal and Noise Strategies 23 2.2.3.1 How Input M is Varied to Benchmark “Robustness” 23 2.2.3.2 How Noise Factors Are Varied to Benchmark “Robustness” 23 2.2.4 Step 4: Select Control Factors and Levels 32 2.2.4.1 Traditional Approach to Explore Control Factors 32 2.2.4.2 Exploration of Design Space by Orthogonal Array 33 2.2.4.3 Try to Avoid Strong Interactions between Control Factors 33 2.2.4.4 Orthogonal Array and its Mechanics 36 2.2.5 Step 5: Execute and Collect Data 38 2.2.6 Step 6: Conduct Data Analysis 38 2.2.6.1 Computations of S/N and β 39 2.2.6.2 Computation of S/N and β for L18 Data Sets 43 2.2.6.3 Response Table for S/N and β 43 2.2.6.4 Determination of Optimum Design 48 2.2.7 Step 7: Predict and Confirm 49 2.2.7.1 Confirmation 50 2.2.8 Step 8: Lesson Learned and Action Plan 50 2.3 Eight Steps for Robust Assessment 52 2.3.1 Step 1: Define Scope 52 2.3.2 Step 2: Identify Ideal Function/Response and Step 3: Develop Signal and Noise Strategies 52 2.3.3 Step 4: Select Designs for Assessment 52 2.3.4 Step 5: Execute and Collect Data 52 2.3.5 Step 6: Conduct Data Analysis 52 2.3.6 Step 7: Make Judgments 53 2.3.7 Step 8: Lesson Learned and Action Plan 53 2.4 As You Go through Case Studies in This Book 55 3 Implementation of Robust Optimization 57 3.1 Introduction 57 3.2 Robust Optimization Implementation 57 3.2.1 Leadership Commitment 58 3.2.2 Executive Leader and the Corporate Team 58 3.2.3 Effective Communication 60 3.2.4 Education and Training 61 3.2.5 Integration Strategy 62 3.2.6 Bottom Line Performance 62 PART ONE VEHICLE LEVEL OPTIMIZATION 63 4 Optimization of Vehicle Offset Crashworthy Design Using a Simplified AnalysisModel 65Chrysler LLC, USA 4.1 Executive Summary 65 4.2 Introduction 66 4.3 Stepwise Implementation of DFSS Optimization for Vehicle Offset Impact 67 4.3.1 Step 1: Scope Defined for Optimization 67 4.3.2 Step 2: Identify/Select Design Alternatives 67 4.3.3 Step 3: Identify Ideal Function 68 4.3.4 Step 4: Develop Signal and Noise Strategy 69 4.3.4.1 Input and Output Signal Strategy 69 4.3.5 Step 5: Select Control/Noise Factors and Levels 70 4.3.5.1 Simplified Spring Mass Model Creation and Validation 70 4.3.5.2 Control Variable Selection 72 4.3.5.3 Control Factor Level Application for Spring Stiffness Updates 73 4.3.6 Step 6: Execute and Conduct Data Analysis 73 4.3.7 Step 7: Validation of Optimized Model 74 4.4 Conclusion 77 4.4.1 Acknowledgments 77 4.5 References 77 5 Optimization of the Component Characteristics for Improving Collision Safety by Simulation 79Isuzu Advanced Engineering Center, Ltd, Japan 5.1 Executive Summary 79 5.2 Introduction 80 5.3 Simulation Models 81 5.4 Concept of Standardized S/N Ratios with Respect to Survival Space 82 5.5 Results and Consideration 86 5.6 Conclusion 94 5.6.1 Acknowledgment 94 5.7 Reference 94 PART TWO SUBSYSTEMS LEVEL OPTIMIZATION BY ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS (OEMs) 95 6 Optimization of Small DC Motors Using Functionality for Evaluation 97Nissan Motor Co., Ltd, Japan and Jidosha Denki Kogyo Co., Ltd, Japan 6.1 Executive Summary 97 6.2 Introduction 98 6.3 Functionality for Evaluation in Case of DC Motors 98 6.4 Experiment Method and Measurement Data 99 6.5 Factors and Levels 100 6.6 Data Analysis 101 6.7 Analysis Results 104 6.8 Selection of Optimal Design and Confirmation 104 6.9 Benefits Gained 107 6.10 Consideration of Analysis for Audible Noise 108 6.11 Conclusion 110 6.11.1 The Importance of Functionality for Evaluation 110 6.11.2 Evaluation under the Unloaded (Idling) Condition 110 6.11.3 Evaluation of Audible Noise (Quality Characteristic) 111 6.11.4 Acknowledgment 111 7 Optimal Design for a Double-Lift Window Regulator System Used in Automobiles 113Nissan Motor Co., Ltd, Japan and Ohi Seisakusho Co., Ltd, Japan 7.1 Executive Summary 113 7.2 Introduction 114 7.3 Schematic Figure of Double-Lift Window Regulator System 114 7.4 Ideal Function 114 7.5 Noise Factors 116 7.6 Control Factors 117 7.7 Conventional Data Analysis and Results 119 7.8 Selection of Optimal Condition and Confirmation Test Results 120 7.9 Evaluation of Quality Characteristics 122 7.10 Concept of Analysis Based on Standardized S/N Ratio 124 7.11 Analysis Results Based on Standardized S/N Ratio 125 7.12 Comparison between Analysis Based on Standardized S/N Ratio and Analysis Based on Conventional S/N Ratio 127 7.13 Conclusion 132 7.13.1 Acknowledgments 132 7.14 Further Reading 132 8 Optimization of Next-Generation Steering System Using Computer Simulation 133Nissan Motor Co., Ltd, Japan 8.1 Executive Summary 133 8.2 Introduction 134 8.3 System Description 134 8.4 Measurement Data 135 8.5 Ideal Function 136 8.6 Factors and Levels 136 8.6.1 Signal and Response 136 8.6.2 Noise Factors 136 8.6.3 Indicative Factor 137 8.6.4 Control Factors 137 8.7 Pre-analysis for Compounding the Noise Factors 137 8.8 Calculation of Standardized S/N Ratio 138 8.9 Analysis Results 141 8.10 Determination of Optimal Design and Confirmation 141 8.11 Tuning to the Targeted Value 142 8.12 Conclusion 144 8.12.1 Acknowledgment 145 9 Future Truck Steering Effort Robustness 147General Motors Corporation, USA 9.1 Executive Summary 147 9.2 Background 148 9.2.1 Methodology 148 9.2.2 Hydraulic Power-Steering Assist System 149 9.2.3 Valve Assembly Design 152 9.2.4 Project Scope 153 9.3 Parameter Design 154 9.3.1 Ideal Steering Effort Function 154 9.3.2 Control Factors 157 9.3.3 Noise Compounding Strategy and Input Signals 157 9.3.4 Standardized S/N Post-Processing 159 9.3.5 Quality Loss Function 165 9.4 Acknowledgments 172 9.5 References 172 10 Optimal Design of Engine Mounting System Based on Quality Engineering 173Mazda Motor Corporation, Japan 10.1 Executive Summary 173 10.2 Background 174 10.3 Design Object 174 10.4 Application of Standard S/N Ratio Taguchi Method 175 10.5 Iterative Application of Standard S/N Ratio Taguchi Method 178 10.6 Influence of Interval of Factor Level 181 10.7 Calculation Program 184 10.8 Conclusions 185 10.8.1 Acknowledgments 186 10.9 References 186 11 Optimization of a Front-Wheel-Drive Transmission for Improved Efficiency and Robustness 187Chrysler Group, LLC, USA and ASI Consulting Group, LLC, USA 11.1 Executive Summary 187 11.2 Introduction 188 11.3 Experimental 189 11.3.1 Ideal Function and Measurement 189 11.4 Signal Strategy 190 11.5 Noise Strategy 191 11.6 Control Factor Selection 192 11.7 Orthogonal Array Selection 193 11.8 Results and Discussion 196 11.8.1 S/N Calculations 196 11.8.2 Graphs of Runs 200 11.8.3 Response Plots 201 11.8.4 Confirmation Run 201 11.8.5 Verification of Results 203 11.9 Conclusion 206 11.9.1 Acknowledgments 207 11.10 References 207 12 Fuel Delivery System Robustness 209Ford Motor Company, USA 12.1 Executive Summary 209 12.2 Introduction 210 12.2.1 Fuel System Overview 210 12.2.2 Conventional Fuel System 211 12.2.3 New Fuel System 211 12.3 Experiment Description 211 12.3.1 Test Method 211 12.3.2 Ideal Function 211 12.4 Noise Factors 213 12.4.1 Control Factors 213 12.4.2 Fixed Factors 214 12.5 Experiment Test Results 214 12.6 Sensitivity (β) Analysis 214 12.7 Confirmation Test Results 217 12.7.1 Bench Test Confirmation 217 12.7.1.1 Initial Fuel Delivery System 217 12.7.1.2 Optimal Fuel Delivery System 218 12.7.2 Vehicle Verification 218 12.7.2.1 Initial Fuel Delivery System 219 12.7.2.2 Optimal Fuel Delivery System 219 12.8 Conclusion 220 13 Improving Coupling Factor in Vehicle Theft Deterrent Systems Using Design for Six Sigma (DFSS) 223General Motors Corporation, USA 13.1 Executive Summary 223 13.2 Introduction 224 13.3 Objectives 225 13.4 The Voice of the Customer 225 13.5 Experimental Strategy 225 13.5.1 Response 225 13.5.2 Noise Strategy 226 13.5.3 Control Factors 226 13.5.4 Input Signal 227 13.6 The System 227 13.7 The Experimental Results 228 13.8 Conclusions 229 13.8.1 Summary 233 13.8.2 Acknowledgments 234 PART THREE SUBSYSTEMS LEVEL OPTIMIZATION BY SUPPLIERS 235 14 Magnetic Sensing System Optimization 237ALPS Electric, Japan 14.1 Executive Summary 237 14.1.1 The Magnetic Sensing System 238 14.2 Improvement of Design Technique 239 14.2.1 Traditional Design Technique 239 14.2.2 Design Technique by Quality Engineering 239 14.3 System Design Technique 241 14.3.1 Parameter Design Diagram 241 14.3.2 Signal Factor, Control Factor, and Noise Factor 242 14.3.3 Implementation of Parameter Design 244 14.3.4 Results of the Confirmation Experiment 244 14.4 Effect by Shortening of Development Period 246 14.5 Conclusion 246 14.5.1 Acknowledgments 247 14.6 References 247 15 Direct Injection Diesel Injector Optimization 249Delphi Automotive Systems, Europe and Delphi Automotive Systems, USA 15.1 Executive Summary 249 15.2 Introduction 250 15.2.1 Background 250 15.2.2 Problem Statement 250 15.2.3 Objectives and Approach to Optimization 251 15.3 Simulation Model Robustness 253 15.3.1 Background 253 15.3.2 Approach to Optimization 257 15.3.3 Results 257 15.4 Parameter Design 257 15.4.1 Ideal Function 257 15.4.2 Signal and Noise Strategies 258 15.4.2.1 Signal Levels 258 15.4.2.2 Noise Strategy 258 15.4.3 Control Factors and Levels 259 15.4.4 Experimental Layout 259 15.4.5 Data Analysis and Two-Step Optimization 259 15.4.6 Confirmation 263 15.4.7 Discussions on Parameter Design Results 264 15.4.7.1 Technical 264 15.4.7.2 Economical 264 15.5 Tolerance Design 268 15.5.1 Signal Point by Signal Point Tolerance Design 269 15.5.1.1 Factors and Experimental Layout 269 15.5.1.2 Analysis of Variance (ANOVA) for Each Injection Point 269 15.5.1.3 Loss Function 269 15.5.2 Dynamic Tolerance Design 270 15.5.2.1 Dynamic Analysis of Variance 271 15.5.2.2 Dynamic Loss Function 273 15.6 Conclusions 275 15.6.1 Project Related 275 15.6.2 Recommendations for Taguchi Methods 277 15.6.3 Acknowledgments 278 15.7 Reference and Further Reading 278 16 General Purpose Actuator Robust Assessment and Benchmark Study 279Robert Bosch, LLC, USA 16.1 Executive Summary 279 16.2 Introduction 280 16.3 Objectives 280 16.3.1 Robust Assessment Measurement Method 281 16.3.1.1 Test Equipment 281 16.3.1.2 Data Acquisition 284 16.3.1.3 Data Analysis Strategy 285 16.4 Robust Assessment 286 16.4.1 Scope and P-Diagram 286 16.4.2 Ideal Function 286 16.4.3 Signal and Noise Strategy 290 16.4.4 Control Factors 291 16.4.5 Raw Data 291 16.4.6 Data Analysis 291 16.5 Conclusion 296 16.5.1 Acknowledgments 297 16.6 Further Reading 297 17 Optimization of a Discrete Floating MOS Gate Driver 299Delphi-Delco Electronic Systems, USA 17.1 Executive Summary 299 17.2 Background 300 17.3 Introduction 302 17.4 Developing the “Ideal” Function 302 17.5 Noise Strategy 305 17.6 Control Factors and Levels 305 17.7 Experiment Strategy and Measurement System 306 17.8 Parameter Design Experiment Layout 306 17.9 Results 307 17.10 Response Charts 307 17.11 Two-Step Optimization 311 17.12 Confirmation 312 17.13 Conclusions 312 17.13.1 Acknowledgments 314 18 Reformer Washcoat Adhesion on Metallic Substrates 315Delphi Automotive Systems, USA 18.1 Executive Summary 315 18.2 Introduction 316 18.3 Experimental Setup 317 18.3.1 The Ideal Function 318 18.3.2 P-Diagram 318 18.3.3 Control Factors 319 18.3.3.1 Alloy Composition 319 18.3.3.2 Washcoat Composition 320 18.3.3.3 Slurry Parameters 320 18.3.3.4 Cleaning Procedures 320 18.3.3.5 Preparation 320 18.4 Control Factor Levels 320 18.5 Noise Factors 320 18.5.1 Signal Factor 320 18.5.2 Unwanted Outputs 320 18.6 Description of Experiment 322 18.6.1 Furnace 322 18.6.2 Orthogonal Array and Inner Array 323 18.6.3 Signal-to-Noise and Beta Calculations 323 18.6.4 Response Tables 323 18.7 Two Step Optimization and Prediction 323 18.7.1 Optimum Design 329 18.7.2 Predictions 329 18.8 Confirmation 329 18.8.1 Design Improvement 329 18.9 Measurement System Evaluation 334 18.10 Conclusion 334 18.11 Supplemental Background Information 336 18.12 Acknowledgment 340 18.13 Reference and Further Reading 340 19 Making Better Decisions Faster: Sequential Application of Robust Engineering to Math-Models, CAE Simulations, and Accelerated Testing 341Robert Bosch Corporation, USA 19.1 Executive Summary 341 19.2 Introduction 342 19.2.1 Thermal Equivalent Circuit – Detailed 343 19.2.2 Thermal Equivalent Circuit – Simplified 343 19.2.3 Closed Form Solution 343 19.3 Objective 345 19.3.1 Thermal Robustness Design Template 345 19.3.2 Critical Design Parameters for Thermal Robustness 345 19.3.3 Cascade Learning (aka Leveraged Knowledge) 346 19.3.4 Test Taguchi Robust Engineering Methodology 346 19.4 Robust Optimization 347 19.4.1 Scope and P-Diagram 347 19.4.2 Ideal Function 347 19.4.3 Signal and Noise Strategy 349 19.4.4 Input Signal 350 19.4.5 Control Factors and Levels 350 19.4.6 Math-Model Generated Data 351 19.4.7 Data Analysis 351 19.4.8 Thermal Robustness (Signal-to-Noise) 354 19.4.9 Subsystem Thermal Resistance (Beta) 356 19.4.10 Prediction and Confirmation 357 19.4.11 Verification 362 19.5 Conclusions 364 19.5.1 Acknowledgments 365 19.6 Futher Reading 366 20 Pressure Switch Module Normally Open Feasibility Investigation and Supplier Competition 367Robert Bosch, LLC, USA 20.1 Executive Summary 367 20.2 Introduction 368 20.2.1 Current Production Pressure Switch Module – Detailed 368 20.2.2 Current Production (N.C.) Switching Element – Detailed 369 20.3 Objective 370 20.4 Robust Assessment 370 20.4.1 Scope and P-Diagram 370 20.4.2 Ideal Function 371 20.4.3 Noise Strategy 372 20.4.4 Testing Criteria 372 20.4.5 Control Factors and Levels 373 20.4.6 Test Data 374 20.4.7 Data Analysis 375 20.4.8 Prediction and Confirmation 379 20.4.9 Verification 383 20.5 Summary and Conclusions 383 20.5.1 Acknowledgments 385 PART FOUR MANUFACTURING PROCESS OPTIMIZATION 387 21 Robust Optimization of a Lead-Free Reflow Soldering Process 389Delphi Delco Electronics Systems, USA and ASI Consulting Group, LLC, USA 21.1 Executive Summary 389 21.2 Introduction 390 21.3 Experimental 391 21.3.1 Robust Engineering Methodology 391 21.3.2 Visual Scoring 394 21.3.3 Pull Test 396 21.4 Results and Discussion 396 21.4.1 Visual Scoring Results 396 21.4.2 Pull Test Results 400 21.4.3 Next Steps 401 21.5 Conclusion 401 21.5.1 Acknowledgment 402 21.6 References 402 22 Catalyst Slurry Coating Process Optimization for Diesel Catalyzed Particulate Traps 403Delphi Energy and Chassis Systems, USA 22.1 Executive Summary 403 22.2 Introduction 404 22.3 Project Description 405 22.4 Process Map 406 22.4.1 Initial Performance 406 22.5 First Parameter Design Experiment 406 22.5.1 Function Analysis 407 22.5.2 Ideal Function 409 22.5.3 Measurement System Evaluation 409 22.5.4 Parameter Diagram 411 22.5.5 Factors and Levels 411 22.5.6 Compound Noise Strategy 412 22.5.7 Parameter Design Experiment Layout (1) 412 22.5.8 Means Plots 414 22.5.9 Means Tables 414 22.5.10 Two-Step Optimization and Prediction 415 22.5.11 Predicted Performance Improvement Before and After 416 22.6 Follow-up Parameter Design Experiment 416 22.6.1 Parameter Design Experiment Layout (2) 417 22.6.2 Means Plots for Signal-to-Noise Ratios 417 22.6.3 Confirmation Results in Tulsa 417 22.6.4 Noise Factor Q Affect on Slurry Coating 417 22.7 Transfer to Florange 419 22.7.1 Ideal Function and Parameter Diagram 421 22.7.2 Parameter Design Experiment Layout (3) 421 22.7.3 Means Plots for Signal-to-Noise Ratios 423 22.7.4 Prediction and Confirmation 423 22.7.5 Process Capability 423 22.8 Conclusion 424 22.8.1 The Team 424 Index 427

Read more less

Book SynopsisClassical and Modern Approaches in the Theory of Mechanisms is a study of mechanisms in the broadest sense, covering the theoretical background of mechanisms, their structures and components, the planar and spatial analysis of mechanisms, motion transmission, and technical approaches to kinematics, mechanical systems, and machine dynamics. In addition to classical approaches, the book presents two new methods: the analytic-assisted method using Turbo Pascal calculation programs, and the graphic-assisted method, outlining the steps required for the development of graphic constructions using AutoCAD; the applications of these methods are illustrated with examples. Aimed at students of mechanical engineering, and engineers designing and developing mechanisms in their own fields, this book provides a useful overview of classical theories, and modern approaches to the practical and creative application of mechanisms, in seeking solutions to increasingly complex problems.Table of ContentsPreface xi About the Companion Website xiii 1 The Structure of Mechanisms 1 1.1 Kinematic Elements 1 1.2 Kinematic Pairs 1 1.3 Kinematic Chains 2 1.4 Mobility of Mechanisms 3 1.4.1 Definitions 3 1.4.2 Mobility Degree of Mechanisms without Common Constraints 5 1.4.3 Mobility Degree of Mechanisms with Common Constraints 5 1.4.4 Mobility of a MechanismWritten with the Aid of the Number of Loops 7 1.4.5 Families of Mechanisms 7 1.4.6 Actuation of Mechanisms 9 1.4.7 Passive Elements 9 1.4.8 Passive Kinematic Pairs 10 1.4.9 Redundant Degree of Mobility 10 1.4.10 Multiple Kinematic Pairs 11 1.5 Fundamental Kinematic Chains 11 1.6 Multi-pairs (Poly-pairs) 14 1.7 Modular Groups 15 1.8 Formation and Decomposition of PlanarMechanisms 16 1.9 Multi-poles and Multi-polar Schemata 18 1.10 Classification of Mechanisms 18 2 Kinematic Analysis of Planar Mechanisms with Bars 21 2.1 General Aspects 21 2.2 Kinematic Relations 21 2.2.1 Plane-parallel Motion 21 2.2.2 Relative Motion 23 2.3 Methods for Kinematic Analysis 24 2.3.1 The Grapho-analytical Method 24 2.3.2 The Method of Projections 24 2.3.3 The Newton–Raphson Method 25 2.3.4 Determination of Velocities and Accelerations using the Finite Differences Method 26 2.4 Kinematic Analysis of the RRR Dyad 27 2.4.1 The Grapho-analytical Method 27 2.4.2 The Analytical Method 31 2.4.3 The Assisted Analytical Method 35 2.4.4 The Assisted Graphical Method 35 2.5 Kinematic Analysis of the RRT Dyad 46 2.5.1 The Grapho-analytical Method 46 2.5.2 The Analytical Method 49 2.5.3 The Assisted Analytical Method 52 2.5.4 The Assisted Graphical Method 53 2.6 Kinematic Analysis of the RTR Dyad 60 2.6.1 The Grapho-analytical Method 60 2.6.2 The Analytical Method 63 2.6.3 The Assisted Analytical Method 66 2.6.4 The Assisted Graphical Method 66 2.7 Kinematic Analysis of the TRT Dyad 73 2.7.1 The Grapho-analytical Method 73 2.7.2 The Analytical Method 77 2.7.3 The Assisted Analytical Method 79 2.7.4 The Assisted Graphical Method 80 2.8 Kinematic Analysis of the RTT Dyad 85 2.8.1 The Grapho-analytical Method 85 2.8.2 The Analytical Method 87 2.8.3 The Assisted Analytical Method 90 2.8.4 The Assisted Graphical Method 90 2.9 Kinematic Analysis of the 6R Triad 95 2.9.1 Formulation of the Problem 95 2.9.2 Determination of the Positions 96 2.9.3 Determination of the Velocities and Accelerations 97 2.9.4 The Assisted Analytical Method 98 2.9.5 The Assisted Graphical Method 99 2.10 Kinematic Analysis of Some Planar Mechanisms 103 2.10.1 Kinematic Analysis of the Four-Bar Mechanism 103 2.10.2 Kinematic Analysis of the Crank-shaft Mechanism 109 2.10.3 Kinematic Analysis of the Crank and Slotted Lever Mechanism 113 3 Kinetostatics of Planar Mechanisms 117 3.1 General Aspects: Forces in Mechanisms 117 3.2 Forces of Inertia 118 3.2.1 The Torsor of the Inertial Forces 118 3.2.2 Concentration of Masses 118 3.3 Equilibration of the Rotors 119 3.3.1 Conditions of Equilibration 119 3.3.2 The Theorem of Equilibration 119 3.3.3 Machines for Dynamic Equilibration 121 3.4 Static Equilibration of Four-bar Mechanisms 124 3.4.1 Equilibration with Counterweights 124 3.4.2 Equilibration with Springs 126 3.5 Reactions in Frictionless Kinematic Pairs 126 3.5.1 General Aspects 126 3.5.2 Determination of the Reactions for the RRR Dyad 127 3.5.3 Determination of the Reactions for the RRT Dyad 133 3.5.4 Determination of the Reactions for the RTR Dyad 139 3.5.5 Determination of the Reactions for the TRT Dyad 145 3.5.6 Determination of the Reactions for the RTT Dyad 150 3.5.7 Determination of the Reactions at the Driving Element 155 3.5.8 Determination of the Equilibration Force (Moment) using the Virtual Velocity Principle 156 3.6 Reactions in Kinematic Pairs with Friction 157 3.6.1 Friction Forces and Moments 157 3.6.2 Determination of the Reactions with Friction 160 3.7 Kinetostatic Analysis of some Planar Mechanisms 161 3.7.1 Kinetostatic Analysis of Four-bar Mechanism 161 3.7.2 Kinetostatic Analysis of Crank-shaft Mechanism 164 3.7.3 Kinetostatic Analysis of Crank and Slotted Lever Mechanism 166 4 Dynamics of Machines 169 4.1 Dynamic Model: Reduction of Forces and Masses 169 4.1.1 Dynamic Model 169 4.1.2 Reduction of Forces 169 4.1.3 Reduction of Masses 171 4.2 Phases of Motion of a Machine 173 4.3 Efficiency of Machines 174 4.4 Mechanical Characteristics of Machines 175 4.5 Equation of Motion of a Machine 176 4.6 Integration of the Equation of Motion 177 4.6.1 General Case 177 4.6.2 The Regime Phase 178 4.7 Flywheels 181 4.7.1 Formulation of the Problem: Definitions 181 4.7.2 Approximate Calculation 182 4.7.3 Exact Calculation 183 4.8 Adjustment of Motion Regulators 186 4.9 Dynamics of Multi-mobile Machines 189 5 Synthesis of Planar Mechanisms with Bars 195 5.1 Synthesis of Path-generating Four-bar Mechanism 195 5.1.1 Conditions for Existence of the Crank 195 5.1.2 Equation of the Coupler Curve 196 5.1.3 Triple Generation of the Coupler Curve 198 5.1.4 Analytic Synthesis 199 5.1.5 Mechanisms for which Coupler Curves Approximate Circular Arcs and Segments of Straight Lines 201 5.1.6 Method of Reduced Positions 201 5.2 Positional Synthesis 204 5.2.1 Formulation of the Problem 204 5.2.2 Poles of Finite Rotation 205 5.2.3 Bipositional Synthesis 206 5.2.4 Three-positional Synthesis 207 5.2.5 Four-positional Synthesis 210 5.2.6 Five-positional Synthesis 214 5.3 Function-generating Mechanisms 215 6 Cam Mechanisms 219 6.1 Generalities. Classification 219 6.2 Analysis of Displacement of Follower 223 6.2.1 Formulation of the Problem 223 6.2.2 The Analytical Method 224 6.2.3 The Graphical Method 233 6.2.4 Analysis of Displacement of Follower using Auto Lisp 236 6.3 Analysis of Velocities and Accelerations 237 6.3.1 Analytical Method 237 6.3.2 Graphical Method: Graphical Derivation 241 6.4 Dynamical Analysis 243 6.4.1 Pre-load in the Spring 243 6.4.2 The Work of Friction 245 6.4.3 Pressure Angle, Transmission Angle 245 6.4.4 Determination of the Base Circle’s Radius 247 6.5 Fundamental Laws of the Follower’s Motion 248 6.5.1 General Aspects: Phases of Motion of the Follower 248 6.5.2 The Linear Law 249 6.5.3 The Parabolic Law 250 6.5.4 The Harmonic Law 252 6.5.5 The Polynomial Law: Polydyne Cams 254 6.6 Synthesis of Cam Mechanisms 256 6.6.1 Formulation of the Problem 256 6.6.2 The Equation of Synthesis 257 6.6.3 Synthesis of Mechanism with Rotational Cam and Translational Follower 258 6.6.4 Synthesis of Mechanism with Rotational Cam and Rotational Follower 260 6.6.5 Cam Synthesis using Auto Lisp Functions 262 6.6.6 Examples 263 7 Gear Mechanisms 273 7.1 General Aspects: Classifications 273 7.2 Relative Motion of Gears: Rolling Surfaces 273 7.3 Reciprocal Wrapped Surfaces 278 7.4 Fundamental Law of Toothing 280 7.5 Parallel Gears with Spur Teeth 281 7.5.1 Generalities. Notations 281 7.5.2 Determination of the Conjugate Profile and Toothing Curve 281 7.5.3 The Involute of a Circle 283 7.5.4 Involute Conjugate Profile and Toothing Line 283 7.5.5 The Main Dimensions of Involute Gears 284 7.5.6 Thickness of a Tooth on a Circle of Arbitrary Radius 286 7.5.7 Building-up of Gear Trains 287 7.5.8 The Contact Ratio 288 7.5.9 Interference of Generation 289 7.6 Parallel Gears with Inclined Teeth 290 7.6.1 Generation of the Flanks 290 7.6.2 The Equivalent Planar Gear 291 7.7 Conical Concurrent Gears with Spur Teeth 293 7.8 Crossing Gears 295 7.8.1 Helical Gears 295 7.8.2 Cylindrical Worm and Wheel Toothing 296 7.9 Generation of the Gears using a CAD Soft 297 7.9.1 Gear Tooth Manufacture 297 7.9.2 Algorithm and Auto Lisp Functions for Creating Gears from Solids 297 7.9.3 Generation of the Cylindrical Gears with Spur and Inclined Teeth 298 7.9.4 The Generation of the Cylindrical Gears with Curvilinear Teeth 302 7.9.5 The Generation of Conical Gears with Spur Teeth 305 7.10 Kinematics of Gear Mechanisms with Parallel Axes 311 7.10.1 Gear Mechanisms with Fixed Parallel Axes 311 7.10.2 The Willis Method 311 7.10.3 Planetary Gear Mechanisms with Four Elements 312 7.10.4 Planetary Gear Mechanisms with Six Mobile Elements 313 7.11 Kinematics of Mechanisms with Conical Gears 314 7.11.1 Planetary Transmission with Three Elements 314 7.11.2 Planetary Transmission with Four Elements 314 7.11.3 Automotive Differentials 315 8 Spatial Mechanisms 317 8.1 Kinematics of Spatial Mechanisms: Generalities 317 8.1.1 Kinematics of the RSSR Mechanism 317 8.1.2 Kinematics of the RSST Mechanism 321 8.1.3 Spatial Mechanism Generating Oscillatory Motion 323 8.2 Hydrostatic Pumps with Axial Pistons 325 8.3 Cardan Transmissions 328 8.4 Tripod Transmissions 330 8.4.1 General Aspects 330 8.4.2 The C2–C Tripod Kinematic Pair 332 8.4.3 The C1–C Tripod Kinematic Pair 335 8.4.4 The S1–P Tripod Kinematic Pair 338 8.4.5 The S2–P Tripod Kinematic Pair 338 8.4.6 Simple Mechanisms with Tripod Joints 340 8.4.7 Tripod Joint Transmissions 344 8.5 Animation of the Mechanisms 349 8.5.1 The Need for an Animation 349 8.5.2 The Animation Algorithm 349 8.5.3 Positional Analysis 349 8.5.4 Modelling the Elements of a Mechanism 357 8.5.5 Creation of the Animation Frames 361 8.5.6 Creation of Animation File for the Mechanism 364 8.5.7 Conclusions 366 9 Industrial Robots 369 9.1 General Aspects 369 9.2 Mechanical Systems of Industrial Robots 370 9.2.1 Structure 370 9.2.2 The Path-generating Mechanism 371 9.2.3 The Orientation Mechanism 373 9.2.4 The Grip Device 377 9.3 Actuation Systems of Industrial Robots 380 9.3.1 Electrical Actuation 380 9.3.2 Hydraulic Actuation 381 9.4 Control Systems of Industrial Robots 382 9.5 Walking Machines 384 9.5.1 The Mechanical Model of the Walking Mechanism 385 9.5.2 Animation of the Walking Machine 386 10 Variators of Angular Velocity with Bars 391 10.1 Generalities 391 10.2 Mono-loop Mechanisms Used in the Construction of the Variators of Angular Velocity with Bars 391 10.2.1 Kinematic Schemata 391 10.2.2 Kinematic Aspects 393 10.2.3 Numerical Example 394 10.3 Bi-loop Mechanisms in Variators of Angular Velocity with Bars 398 10.3.1 Kinematic Schemata 398 10.3.2 Kinematic Analysis 400 Further Reading 411 Index 417

Read more less

Book SynopsisAdvanced Magnetic and OpticalMaterials offers detailed up-to-date chapters on the functional optical and magnetic materials, engineering of quantum structures, high-tech magnets, characterization and new applications. It brings together innovative methodologies and strategies adopted in the research and development of the subject and all the contributors are established specialists in the research area. The 14 chapters are organized in two parts: Part 1: Magnetic Materials Magnetic Heterostructures and superconducting orderMagnetic Antiresonance in nanocompositesMagnetic bioactive glass-ceramics for bone healing and hyperthermic treatment of solid tumorsMagnetic iron oxide nanoparticlesMagnetic nanomaterial-based anticancer therapyTheoretical study of strained carbon-based nanobelts: Structural, energetical, electronic, and magnetic propertiesRoom temperature molecular magnets Modeling and applications Part 2: Optical Materials Advances and future of white LED phosphors for solid-statTable of ContentsPreface xix Part 1 Magnetic Materials 1 Superconducting Order in Magnetic Heterostructures 3 Sol H. Jacobsen, Jabir Ali Ouassou and Jacob Linder 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Fundamental Physics 6 1.3 Theoretical Framework 15 1.4 Experimental Status 23 1.5 Novel Predictions 33 1.6 Outlook 37 Acknowledgements 38 References 39 2 Magnetic Antiresonance in Nanocomposite Materials 47 Anatoly B. Rinkevich, Dmitry V. Perov and Olga V. Nemytova 2.1 Introduction: Phenomenon of Magnetic Antiresonance 47 2.2 Magnetic Antiresonance Review 49 2.3 Phase Composition and Structure of Nanocomposites Based on Artificial Opals 54 2.4 Experimental Methods of the Antiresonance Investigation 56 2.5 Nanocomposites Where the Antiresonance Is Observed in 60 2.6 Conditions of Magnetic Antiresonance Observation in Non-conducting Nanocomposite Plate 63 2.7 Magnetic Field Dependence of Transmission and Reflection Coefficients 70 2.8 Frequency Dependence of Resonance Amplitude 72 2.9 Magnetic Resonance and Antiresonance upon Parallel and Perpendicular Orientation of Microwave and a Permanent Magnetic Field 74 2.10 Conclusion 76 Acknowledgement 77 References 77 3 Magnetic Bioactive Glass Ceramics for Bone Healing and Hyperthermic Treatment of Solid Tumors 81 Andrea Cochis, Marta Miola, Oana Bretcanu, Lia Rimondini and Enrica Vernè 3.1 Bone and Cancer: A Hazardous Attraction 82 3.2 Hyperthermia Therapy for Cancer Treatment 86 3.3 Evidences of Hyperthermia Efficacy 94 3.4 Magnetic Composites for Hyperthermia Treatment 95 3.5 Conclusions 103 References 103 4 Magnetic Iron Oxide Nanoparticles: Advances on Controlled Synthesis, Multifunctionalization, and Biomedical Applications 113 Dung The Nguyen and Kyo-Seon Kim 4.1 Introduction 114 4.2 Controlled Synthesis of Fe3O4 Nanoparticles 115 4.3 Surface Modification of Fe3O4 Nanoparticles for Biomedical Applications 122 4.4 Magnetism and Magnetically Induced Heating of Fe3O4 Nanoparticles 126 4.5 Applications of Fe3O4 Nanoparticles to Magnetic Hyperthermia 130 4.6 Applications of Fe3O4 Nanoparticles to Hyperthermia-based Controlled Drug Delivery 132 4.7 Conclusions 134 Acknowledgment 135 References 135 5 Magnetic Nanomaterial-based Anticancer Therapy 141 Catalano Enrico 5.1 Introduction 142 5.2 Magnetic Nanomaterials 144 5.3 Biomedical Applications of Magnetic Nanomaterials 145 5.4 Magnetic Nanomaterials for Cancer Therapies 146 5.5 Relevance of Nanotechnology to Cancer Therapy 147 5.6 Cancer Therapy with Magnetic Nanoparticle Drug Delivery 148 5.7 Drug Delivery in the Cancer Therapy 149 5.8 Magnetic Hyperthermia 151 5.9 Role of Theranostic Nanomedicine in Cancer Treatment 154 5.10 Magnetic Nanomaterials for Chemotherapy 155 5.11 Magnetic Nanomaterials as Carrier for Cancer Gene Therapeutics 156 5.12 Conclusions 156 5.13 Future Prospects 158 References 159 6 Theoretical Study of Strained Carbon-based Nanobelts: Structural, Energetic, Electronic, and Magnetic properties of [n]Cyclacenes 165 E. San-Fabián, A. Pérez-Guardiola, M. Moral, A. J. Pérez-Jiménez and J. C. Sancho-García 6.1 Introduction 166 6.2 Computational Strategy and Associated Details 168 6.3 Results and Discussion 171 6.4 Conclusions 181 Acknowledgments 182 References 182 7 Room Temperature Molecular Magnets: Modeling and Applications 185 Mihai A. Gîrţu and Corneliu I. Oprea 7.1 Introduction 186 7.2 Experimental Background 187 7.3 Ideal Structure and Sources of Structural Disorder 193 7.4 Exchange Coupling Constants and Ferrimagnetic Ordering 200 7.5 Magnetic Anisotropy 224 7.6 Applications of V[TCNE]x 233 7.7 Conclusions 241 Acknowledgments 243 References 243 8 Advances and Future of White LED Phosphors for Solid-State Lighting 251 Xianwen Zhang and Xin Zhang 8.1 Light Generation Mechanisms and History of LEDs Chips 251 8.2 Fabrication of WLEDs 254 8.3 Evaluation Criteria of WLEDs 257 8.4 Phosphors for WLEDs 261 8.5 Conclusions 271 References 272 Part 2 Optical Materials 277 9 Design of Luminescent Materials with “Turn-On/Off” Response for Anions and Cations 279 Serkan Erdemir and Sait Malkondu 9.1 Introduction 280 9.2 Luminescent Materials for Sensing of Cations 283 9.3 Luminescent Materials for Sensing of Anions 302 9.4 Conclusion 307 Acknowledgments 308 References 308 10 Recent Advancements in Luminescent Materials and Their Potential Applications 317 Devender Singh, Vijeta Tanwar, Shri Bhagwan and Ishwar Singh 10.1 Phosphor 317 10.2 An Overview on the Past Research on Phosphor 318 10.3 Luminescence 319 10.4 Mechanism of Emission of Light in Phosphor Particles 320 10.5 How Luminescence Occur in Luminescent Materials? 321 10.6 Luminescence Is Broadly Classified within the Following Categories 326 10.7 Inorganic phosphors 332 10.8 Organic Phosphors 332 10.9 Optical Properties of Inorganic Phosphors 333 10.10 Role of Activator and Coactivator 333 10.11 Role of Rare Earth as Activator and Coactivator in Phosphors 334 10.12 There Are Different Classes of Phosphors, Which May Be Classified According to the Host Lattice 342 10.13 Applications of Phosphors 345 10.14 Future Prospects of Phosphors 348 10.15 Conclusions 349 References 349 11 Strongly Confined PbS Quantum Dots: Emission Limiting, Photonic Doping, and Magneto-optical Effects 353 P. Barik, A. K. Singh, E. V. García-Ramírez, J. A. Reyes-Esqueda, J. S. Wang, H. Xi and B. Ullrich 11.1 Introduction 354 11.2 QDs Used and Sample Preparation 356 11.3 Basic Properties of PbS Quantum Dots 356 11.4 Measuring Techniques and Equipment Employed 358 11.5 Photoluminescence Limiting of Colloidal PbS Quantum Dots 361 11.6 Photonic Doping of Soft Matter 364 11.7 Magneto-optical Properties 370 11.8 Conclusions 380 Acknowledgment 380 References 380 12 Microstructure Characterization of Some Quantum Dots Synthesized by Mechanical Alloying 385 S. Sain and S.K. Pradhan 12.1 Introduction 386 12.2 Brief History of QDs 387 12.3 Theory of QDs 388 12.4 Different Processes of Synthesis of QDs 391 12.5 Structure of QDs 392 12.6 Applications of QDs 393 12.7 Mechanical Alloying 395 12.8 The Rietveld Refinement Method 398 12.9 Some Previous Work on Metal Chalcogenide QDs Prepared by Mechanical Alloying from Other Groups 402 12.11 Conclusions 419 References 419 13 Advances in Functional Luminescent Materials and Phosphors 425 Radhaballabh Debnath 13.1 Introduction 425 13.2 Some Theoretical Aspects of the Processes of Light Absorption/Emission by Matter 427 13.3 Sensitization/Energy Transfer Phenomenon in Luminescence Process 433 13.4 Functional Phosphors 435 13.5 Classifications of Functional Phosphors 438 13.6 Solid-state Luminescent Materials for Laser 460 Acknowledgments 467 References 467 14 Development in Organic Light-emitting Materials and Their Potential Applications 473 Devender Singh, Shri Bhagwan, Raman Kumar Saini, Vandna Nishal and Ishwar Singh 14.1 Luminescence in Organic Molecules 473 14.2 Types of Luminescence 475 14.3 Mechanism of Luminescence 479 14.4 Organic Compounds as Luminescent Material 480 14.5 Possible Transitions in Organic Molecules 494 14.6 OLED’s Structure and Composition 495 14.7 Basic Principle of OLEDs 502 14.8 Working of OLEDs 502 14.9 Light Emission in OLEDs 504 14.10 Types of OLED Displays 505 14.11 Techniques of Fabrication of OLEDs Devices 506 14.12 Advantages of OLEDs 507 14.13 Potential Applications of OLEDs 511 14.14 Future Prospects of OLEDs 512 14.15 Conclusions 512 References 513

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book brings together innovative methodologies and strategies adopted in the research and developments of Advanced 2D Materials.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Part 1 Synthesis, Characterizations, Modelling and Properties 1 Two-Dimensional Layered Gallium Selenide: Preparation, Properties, and Applications 3 Wenjing Jie and Jianhua Hao 1.1 Introduction 4 1.2 Preparation of 2D Layered GaSe Crystals 5 1.3 Structure, Characterization, and Properties 10 1.4 Applications 24 1.5 Conclusions and Perspectives 31 Acknowledgment 32 References 32 2 Recent Progress on the Synthesis of 2D Boron Nitride Nanosheets 37 Li Fu and Aimin Yu 2.1 Boron Nitride and Its Nanomorphologies 37 2.2 Boron Nitride Nanosheets Synthesis 39 2.3 Conclusion 56 References 57 3 The Effects of Substrates on 2D Crystals 67 Emanuela Margapoti, Mahmoud M. Asmar and Sergio E. Ulloa 3.1 Introduction 68 3.2 Fundamental Studies of 2D Crystals 71 3.3 Graphene Symmetries and Their Modification by Substrates and Functionalization 80 3.4 TMDs on Insulators and Metal Substrates 89 3.5 Conclusion 107 References 108 4 Hubbard Model in Material Science: Electrical Conductivity and Reflectivity of Models of Some 2D Materials 115 Vladan Celebonovic 4.1 Introduction 115 4.2 The Hubbard Model 116 4.3 Calculations of Conductivity 124 4.4 The Hubbard Model and Optics 135 4.5 Conclusions 141 Acknowledgment 142 References 142 Part 2 State-of-the-art Design of Functional 2D composites 5 Graphene Derivatives in Semicrystalline Polymer Composites 147 Sandra Paszkiewicz, Anna Szymczyk and Zbigniew Rosłaniec 5.1 Introduction 147 5.2 Preparation of Polymer Nanocomposites Containing Graphene Derivatives 150 5.3 Properties of Graphene-based Polymer Nanocomposites 156 5.4 Synergic Effect of 2D/1D System 174 5.5 Conclusions (Summary) and Future Perspectives 175 References 180 6 Graphene Oxide: A Unique Nano-platform to Build Advanced Multifunctional Composites 193 André F. Girão, Susana Pinto, Ana Bessa, Gil Gonçalves, Bruno Henriques, Eduarda Pereira and Paula A. A. P. Marques 6.1 Introduction to Graphene Oxide as Building Unit 194 6.2 Scaffolds for Tissue Engineering 196 6.3 Water Remediation 206 6.4 Multifunctional Structural Materials 212 6.5 Conclusions (Final Remarks) 223 Acknowledgments 224 References 224 7 Synthesis of ZnO–Graphene Hybrids for Photocatalytic Degradation of Organic Contaminants 237 Alina Pruna and Daniele Pullini 7.1 Introduction into Wastewater Treatment 237 7.2 Semiconductor-based Photocatalytic Degradation Mechanism 239 7.3 ZnO Hybridization toward Enhanced Photocatalytic Efficiency 240 7.4 Synthesis Approaches for ZnO–Graphene Hybrid Photocatalysts 242 7.5 ZnO–Graphene Hybrid Photocatalysts 244 7.6 Ternary Hybrids with ZnO and rGO Materials 270 7.7 Conclusions 276 Acknowledgments 278 References 278 8 Covalent and Non-covalent Modification of Graphene Oxide Through Polymer Grafting 287 Akbar Hassanpour, Khatereh Gorbanpour and Abbas Dadkhah Tehrani 8.1 Introduction 288 8.2 Covalent Modification of Graphene Oxide 288 8.3 Non-covalent Modification of Graphene Oxide 314 8.4 Composites and Grafts of GO with Natural Polymers 321 8.5 Conclusion 333 Acknowledgment 334 References 334 Part 3 High-tech Applications of 2D Materials 9 Graphene–Semiconductor Hybrid Photocatalysts and Their Application in Solar Fuel Production 355 Pawan Kumar, Anurag Kumar, Chetan Joshi, Rabah Boukherrouband Suman L. Jain 9.1 Introduction 356 9.2 Conclusion 379 References 379 10 Graphene in Sensors Design 387 Andreea Cernat, Mihaela Tertiș, Luminiţa Fritea and Cecilia Cristea 10.1 Introduction 388 10.2 Fabrication and Characterization of Graphene-based Materials 389 10.3 Applications 394 10.4 Conclusions 418 Acknowledgements 418 References 419 11 Bio-applications of Graphene Composites: From Bench to Clinic 433 Meisam Omidi, A. Fatehinya, M. Frahani, Z. Niknam, A. Yadegari, M. Hashemi, H. Jazayeri, H. Zali, M. Zahedinik, and L. Tayebi 11.1 Introduction 433 11.2 Synthesis and Structural Features 435 11.3 Biomedical Applications 438 11.4 Conclusions (Current Limitations and Future Perspectives) 457 References 461 12 Hydroxyapatite–Graphene as Advanced Bioceramic Composites for Orthopedic Applications 473 Wan Jeffrey Basirun, Saeid Baradaran and Bahman Nasiri-Tabrizi 12.1 Background of Study 474 12.2 Literature Review 478 12.3 Functional Specifications 486 12.4 Summary and Concluding Remarks 494 References 495

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis text explores formation control of vehicle systems and introduces three representative systems: space systems, aerial systems and robotic systems Formation Control of Multiple Autonomous Vehicle Systems offers a review of the core concepts of dynamics and control and examines the dynamics and control aspects of formation control in order to study a wide spectrum of dynamic vehicle systems such as spacecraft, unmanned aerial vehicles and robots. The text puts the focus on formation control that enables and stabilizes formation configuration, as well as formation reconfiguration of these vehicle systems. The authors develop a uniform paradigm of describing vehicle systems' dynamic behaviour that addresses both individual vehicle's motion and overall group's movement, as well as interactions between vehicles. The authors explain how the design of proper control techniques regulate the formation motion of these vehicles and the development of a system level decision-making strategyTable of ContentsPreface xiii List of Tables xvii List of Figures xix Acknowledgments xxv Part I Formation Control: Fundamental Concepts 1 1 Formation Kinematics 3 1.1 Notation 3 1.2 Vectorial Kinematics 5 1.2.1 Frame Rotation 5 1.2.2 The Motion of a Vector 7 1.2.3 The First Time Derivative of a Vector 11 1.2.4 The Second Time Derivative of a Vector 12 1.2.5 Motion with Respect to Multiple Frames 12 1.3 Euler Parameters and Unit Quaternion 13 2 Formation Dynamics of Motion Systems 17 2.1 Virtual Structure 17 2.1.1 Formation Control Problem Statement 19 2.1.2 Extended Formation Control Problem 22 2.2 Behaviour-based Formation Dynamics 26 2.3 Leader–Follower Formation Dynamics 27 3 Fundamental Formation Control 29 3.1 Unified Problem Description 29 3.1.1 Some Key Definitions for Formation Control 29 3.1.2 A Simple Illustrative Example 30 3.2 Information Interaction Conditions 32 3.2.1 Algebraic GraphTheory 32 3.2.2 Conditions for the Case without a Leader 33 3.2.3 Conditions for the Case with a Leader 35 3.3 Synchronization Errors 36 3.3.1 Local Synchronization Error: Type I 37 3.3.2 Local Synchronization Error: Type II 38 3.3.3 Local Synchronization Error: Type III 40 3.4 Velocity Synchronization Control 42 3.4.1 Velocity Synchronization without a Leader 42 3.4.2 Velocity Synchronization with a Leader 43 3.5 Angular-position Synchronization Control 45 3.5.1 Synchronization without a Position Reference 45 3.5.2 Synchronization to a Position Reference 47 3.6 Formation via Synchronized Tracking 48 3.6.1 Formation Control Solution 1 50 3.6.2 Formation Control Solution 2 51 3.7 Simulations 52 3.7.1 Verification of Theorem 3.12 52 3.7.2 Verification of Theorem 3.13 54 3.7.3 Verification of Theorem 3.14 57 3.8 Summary 60 Bibliography for Part I 61 Part II Formation Control: Advanced Topics 63 4 Output-feedback Solutions to Formation Control 65 4.1 Introduction 65 4.2 Problem Statement 65 4.3 Linear Output-feedback Control 66 4.4 Bounded Output-feedback Control 68 4.5 Distributed Linear Control 71 4.6 Distributed Bounded Control 72 4.7 Simulations 73 4.7.1 Case 1: Verification of Theorem 4.1 73 4.7.2 Case 2: Verification of Theorem 4.5 76 4.8 Summary 78 5 Robust and Adaptive Formation Control 81 5.1 Problem Statement 81 5.2 Continuous Control via State Feedback 83 5.2.1 Controller Development 83 5.2.2 Analysis of Tracker u0i84 5.2.3 Design of Disturbance Estimators 85 5.2.4 Closed-loop Performance Analysis 87 5.3 Bounded State Feedback Control 90 5.3.1 Design of Bounded State Feedback 90 5.3.2 Robustness Analysis 92 5.3.3 The Effect of UDE on Stability 94 5.3.4 The Effect of UDE on the Bounds of Control 94 5.4 Continuous Control via Output Feedback 95 5.4.1 Design of u0i and d^i 95 5.4.2 Stability Analysis 96 5.5 Discontinuous Control via Output Feedback 97 5.5.1 Controller Design 98 5.5.2 Stability Analysis 100 5.6 GSE-based Synchronization Control 102 5.6.1 Coupled Errors 103 5.6.2 Controller Design and Convergence Analysis 105 5.7 GSE-based Adaptive Formation Control 108 5.7.1 Problem Statement 108 5.7.2 Controller Development 109 5.8 Summary 111 Bibliography for Part II 113 Part III Formation Control: Case Studies 115 6 Formation Control of Space Systems 117 6.1 Lagrangian Formulation of Spacecraft Formation 117 6.1.1 Lagrangian Formulation 117 6.1.2 Attitude Dynamics of Rigid Spacecraft 118 6.1.3 Relative Translational Dynamics 120 6.2 Adaptive Formation Control 122 6.3 Applications and Simulation Results 123 6.3.1 Application 1: Leader–Follower Spacecraft Pair 123 6.3.1.1 Simulation Condition 123 6.3.1.2 Control Parameters 123 6.3.1.3 Simulation Results and Analysis 124 6.3.2 Application 2: Multiple Spacecraft in Formation 124 6.4 Summary 130 7 Formation Control of Aerial Systems 131 7.1 Vortex-induced Aerodynamics 131 7.1.1 Model of the Trailing Vortices of Leader Aircraft 134 7.1.2 Single Horseshoe Vortex Model 135 7.1.3 Continuous Vortex Sheet Model 137 7.2 Aircraft Autopilot Models 138 7.2.1 Models for the Follower Aircraft 139 7.2.2 Kinematics for Close-formation Flight 140 7.3 Controller Design 140 7.3.1 Linear Proportional-integral Controller 140 7.3.2 UDE-based Formation-flight Controller 142 7.3.2.1 Formation Flight Controller Design 143 7.3.2.2 Uncertainty and Disturbance Estimator 144 7.4 Simulation Results 147 7.4.1 Simulation Results for Controller 1 147 7.4.2 Simulation Results for Controller 2 148 7.5 Summary 154 8 Formation Control of Robotic Systems 157 8.1 Introduction 157 8.2 Visual Tracking 159 8.2.1 Imaging Hardware 159 8.2.2 Image Distortion 160 8.2.3 Color Thresholding 163 8.2.4 Noise Rejection 163 8.2.5 Data Extraction 165 8.3 Synchronization Control 167 8.3.1 Synchronization 167 8.3.2 Formation Parameters 168 8.3.3 Architecture 169 8.3.4 Control Law 169 8.3.5 Simulations 170 8.3.5.1 Constant Formation along Circular Trajectory 171 8.3.5.2 Time-varying Formation along Linear Trajectory 173 8.4 Passivity Control 176 8.4.1 Passivity 176 8.4.2 Formation Parameters 176 8.4.3 Control Law 177 8.4.4 Simulation 178 8.5 Experiments 181 8.5.1 Setup 181 8.5.2 Results 182 8.5.2.1 Constant Formation along Circular Trajectory 182 8.5.2.2 Time-varying Formation along Linear Trajectory 183 8.6 Summary 186 Bibliography for Part III 189 Part IV Formation Control: Laboratory 191 9 Experiments on 3DOF Desktop Helicopters 193 9.1 Description of the Experimental Setup 193 9.2 MathematicalModels 196 9.2.1 Nonlinear 3DOF Model 196 9.2.2 2DOF Model for Elevation and Pitch Control 199 9.3 Experiment 1: GSE-based Synchronized Tracking 201 9.3.1 Objective 201 9.3.2 Initial Conditions and Desired Trajectories 202 9.3.3 Control Strategies 203 9.3.4 Disturbance Condition 203 9.3.5 Experimental Results 204 9.3.6 Summary 208 9.4 Experiment 2: UDE-based Robust Synchronized Tracking 208 9.4.1 Objective 208 9.4.2 Initial Conditions and Desired Trajectories 208 9.4.3 Control Strategies 209 9.4.4 Experimental Results and Discussions 210 9.4.5 Summary 215 9.5 Experiment 3: Output-feedback-based Sliding-mode Control 216 9.5.1 Objective 216 9.5.2 Initial Conditions and Desired Trajectories 216 9.5.3 Control Strategies 217 9.5.4 Experimental Results and Discussions 217 9.5.5 Summary 222 Bibliography for Part IV 223 Part V Appendix 225 Bibliography for Appendix 237 Index 239

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book has been designed as a result of the author's teaching experiences; students in the courses came from various disciplines and it was very difficult to prescribe a suitable textbook, not because there are no books on these topics, but because they are either too exhaustive or very elementary. This book, therefore, includes only relevant topics in the fundamentals of the physics of semiconductors and of electrochemistry needed for understanding the intricacy of the subject of photovoltaic solar cells and photoelectrochemical (PEC) solar cells. The book provides the basic concepts of semiconductors, p:n junctions, PEC solar cells, electrochemistry of semiconductors, and photochromism. Researchers, engineers and students engaged in researching/teaching PEC cells or knowledge of our sun, its energy, and its distribution to the earth will find essential topics such as the physics of semiconductors, the electrochemistry of semiconductors, p:n junctions, Schottky junctions,Table of ContentsForeword xv Preface xvii 1 Our Universe and the Sun 1 1.1 Formation of the Universe 1 1.2 Formation of Stars 2 1.2.1 Formation of Energy in the Sun 3 1.2.2 Description of the Sun 6 1.2.3 Transfer of Solar Rays through the Ozone Layer 6 1.2.4 Transfer of Solar Layers through Other Layers 7 1.2.5 Effect of Position of the Sun vis-à-vis the Earth 8 1.2.6 Distribution of Solar Energy 8 1.2.7 Solar Intensity Calculation 8 1.3 Summary 12 Reference 12 2 Solar Energy and Its Applications 13 2.1 Introduction to a Semiconductor 14 2.2 Formation of a Compound 14 2.2.1 A Classical Approach 14 2.2.2 Why Call It a Band and Not a Level? 15 2.2.3 Quantum Chemistry Approach 17 2.2.3.1 Wave Nature of an Electron in a Fixed Potential 17 2.2.3.2 Wave Nature of an Electron under a Periodically Changing Potential 19 2.2.3.3 Bloch’s Solution to the Wave Function of Electrons under Variable Potentials 20 2.2.3.3 Concept of a Forbidden Gap in a Material 22 2.2.4 Band Model to Explain Conductivity in Solids 25 2.2.4.1 Which of the Total Electrons Will Accept the External Energy for Their Excitation? 26 2.2.4.2 Density of States 28 2.2.4.3 How Do We Find the Numbers of Electrons in These Bands? 29 2.2.5 Useful Deductions 31 2.2.5.1 Extrinsic Semiconductor 33 2.2.5.2 Role of Dopants in the Semiconductor 36 2.3 Quantum Theory Approach to Explain the Effect of Doping 37 2.3.1 A Mathematical Approach to Understanding This Problem 39 2.3.2 Representation of Various Energy Levels in a Semiconductor 40 2.4 Types of Carriers in a Semiconductor 42 2.4.1 Majority and Minority Carriers 42 2.4.2 Direction of Movement of Carriers in a Semiconductor 42 2.5 Nature of Band Gaps in Semiconductors 44 2.6 Can the Band Gap of a Semiconductor Be Changed? 45 2.7 Summary 47 Further Reading 47 3 Theory of Junction Formation 49 3.1 Flow of Carriers across the Junction 49 3.1.1 Why Do Carriers Flow across an Interface When n- and p-Type Semiconductors Are Joined Together with No Air Gap? 49 3.1.2 Does the Vacuum Level Remain Unaltered, and What Is the Significance of Showing a Bend in the Diagram? 52 3.1.3 Why Do We Draw a Horizontal or Exponential Line to Represent the Energy Level in the Semiconductor with a Long Line? 52 3.1.4 What Are the Impacts of Migration of Carriers toward the Interface? 52 3.2 Representing Energy Levels Graphically 54 3.3 Depth of Charge Separation at the Interface of n- and p-Type Semiconductors 56 3.4 Nature of Potential at the Interface 56 3.4.1 Does Any Current Flow through the Interface? 56 3.4.2 Effect of Application of External Potential to the p:n Junction Formed by the Two Semiconductors 58 3.4.2.1 Flow of Carriers from n-Type to p-Type 59 3.4.2.2 Flow of Carriers from p-Type to n-Type 60 3.4.2.3 Flow of Current due to Holes 60 3.4.2.4 Flow of Current due to Electrons 61 3.4.3 What Would Happen If Negative Potential Were Applied to a p-Type Semiconductor? 62 3.4.3.1 Flow of Majority Carriers from p- to n-Type Semiconductors 63 3.4.3.2 Flow of Majority Carriers from n- to p-Type 63 3.4.3.3 Flow of Minority Carrier from p- to n-Type Semiconductors 64 3.4.3.3 Flow of Minority Carriers from n- to p-Type Semiconductors 64 3.5 Expression for Saturation (or Exchange) Current I0 67 3.5.1 Factors on Which Diffusion Length Depends 70 3.6 Contact Potential θ 71 3.7 Width of the Space Charge Region 75 3.8 Metal–Schottky Junction 81 3.8.1 Current–Voltage Characteristics for Metal–Schottky Junctions 84 3.8.2 Saturation Current for Metal–Schottky Junctions 87 3.9 Effect of Light on p:n Junctions 90 3.10 Factors to Be Considered in Illuminating the p:n Junction 94 3.10.1 Grids for Collecting the Charges 95 3.10.2 Ohmic Contact on the Back Side of the Junction 96 3.11 Types of p:n Junctions 97 3.12 A Photoelectrochemical Cell 97 3.13 Summary 100 Further Reading 100 4 Effect of Illumination of a PEC Cell 101 4.1 Effect of Light on the Depletion Layer of the Semiconductor—Electrolyte Junction 101 4.1.1 Origin of Photopotential 102 4.1.2 Origin of Photocurrent 104 4.2 The Fate of Photogenerated Carriers 105 4.3 Magnitude of the Photocurrent 106 4.4 Gartner Model for Photocurrent 108 4.4.1 Photocurrent due to Photogenerated Carriers in the Space Charge Region 109 4.4.2 Photocurrent due to Photogenerated Carriers in the Diffusion Region 109 4.4.3 Application of the Gartner Model 111 4.4.4 When α Is Constant 112 4.4.5 When w Is Kept Constant 115 4.4.6 Lifetime of Carriers and Their Mobility 118 4.5 Carrier Recombination 118 4.5.1 Significance of the Lifetime of Carriers 119 4.5.2 Effect of Recombination Center on the Magnitude of Photocurrent 120 4.5.3 Origin of Recombination Centers 121 4.6 A Mathematical Treatment for the Lifetime of Carriers 122 4.7 Effect of Illumination on Fermi Level-Quasi Fermi Level 124 4.8 Solar Cell Performance 130 4.9 Current—Voltage Characteristics of a Solar Cell 135 4.10 The Equivalent Circuit of a Solar Cell 138 4.11 Solar Cell Efficiency 139 4.11.1 Absorption Efficiency αλ 141 4.11.2 Generation Efficiency gλ 141 4.11.3 Collection Efficiency Cλ 141 4.11.4 Current Efficiency Qλ 142 4.11.5 Voltage Factor and Fill Factor 142 4.11.6 Analytical Methods for J-V Characteristics of a Solar Cell 144 4.11.7 Back Wall Cell 145 4.12 Ohmic Contact 147 4.13 Defects in Solids 148 4.13.1 Bulk Defects 150 4.13.2 Surface Structure 150 4.14 Summary 153 Further Reading 153 References 154 5 Electrochemistry of the Metal–Electrolyte Interface 157 5.1 What Is a Metal? 158 5.2 What Is the Structure of Electrolyte and Water Molecules in an Aqueous Solution? 158 5.3 What Happens When a Metal Is Immersed in Solution? 160 5.4 Existence of a Double Layer Near the Metal–Electrolyte Interface 160 5.5 Influence of Concentration of Electrolyte on Helmholtz and Diffusion Potentials 166 5.6 Impact of Charge Accumulation at Various Regions 166 5.7 Electron Transfer and Its Impact on Potential Barrier 171 5.8 Butler–Volmer Approach to Electrochemical Reaction 181 5.9 Significance of Symmetry Factor β 191 5.10 Electrochemical Corrosion at the Metal–Electrolyte Interface 194 5.11 Summary 199 Further Reading 199 References 199 6 Electrochemistry of the Semiconductor–Electrolyte Interface 201 6.1 Difference between Metal and Semiconductor 201 6.1.1 Hydration of Electrolytes 202 6.1.2 Effect of Hydrogen Bond 203 6.2 Gaussian Distribution of the Potential Energy of Electrolytes 203 6.3 Capacitance at the Semiconductor–Electrolyte Interface 212 6.4 Stability of the Semiconductor 216 6.5 Modifying the Surface of Low Band Gap Materials 223 6.6 Summary 225 References 225 7 Impedance Studies 227 7.1 Types of AC Circuits 228 7.2 Significance of Vector Analysis 230 7.3 Impedance Measurement Techniques 234 7.3.1 Audio Frequency Bridges 234 7.3.2 Transformer Ratio Arms Bridge 236 7.3.3 Berberian–Cole Bridge Technique 237 7.3.4 Potentiostatic Measurement 238 7.3.5 Oscilloscope Technique 239 7.4 AC Impedance Plots and Data Analysis 242 7.4.1 Nyquist Plot 242 7.4.2 Bode Plot 243 7.4.3 Randles Plot 244 7.5 Equivalent Circuit Representation of a Simple System 245 7.6 Equivalent Circuit Representation for Electro-chemical Systems 246 7.7 Procedure for Running an Experiment 248 7.8 Semiconductor Interface 250 7.9 Summary 253 Further Reading 254 References 254 8 Photoelectrochemical Solar Cell 257 8.1 Classification of Photoelectrochemical Cells Based on the Energetics of the Reactions 263 8.2 Solar Chargeable Battery 264 8.3 Electrolyte-(Ohmic)-Semiconductor-Electrolyte (Schottky) Junction 273 8.3.1 On the Illuminated Side of Fe2O3 275 8.3.2 On the Dark Side of the Semiconductor—Compartment II 276 8.4 Synthesis of Value-Added Products 280 8.5 Summary 283 References 283 9 Photoeletrochromism 285 9.1 Photochromic Glasses 287 9.2 Electrochromism 291 9.2.1 Types of Chromogenic Materials 292 9.2.2 Electrolytes 294 9.2.3 Electrode Materials 294 9.2.4 Reservoir 294 9.3 Electrochromic Devices and Their Applications 295 9.4 Imaging Employing a Semiconductor Photo-electrode 301 9.4.1 Image-Forming Step 302 9.4.2 Image-Vanishing Step 302 9.5 Summary 303 References 303 10 Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells 305 10.1 The Dye-Sensitized Cell 306 10.2 Flexible Polymer Solar Cell 308 10.3 Summary 310 References 310 Index 313

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn updated and expanded edition of the popular guide to basic continuum mechanics and computational techniques This updated third edition of the popular reference covers state-of-the-art computational techniques for basic continuum mechanics modeling of both small and large deformations. Approaches to developing complex models are described in detail, and numerous examples are presented demonstrating how computational algorithms can be developed using basic continuum mechanics approaches. The integration of geometry and analysis for the study of the motion and behaviors of materials under varying conditions is an increasingly popular approach in continuum mechanics, and absolute nodal coordinate formulation (ANCF) is rapidly emerging as the best way to achieve that integration. At the same time, simulation software is undergoing significant changes which will lead to the seamless fusion of CAD, finite element, and multibody system computer codes in one computatTable of ContentsPREFACE ix 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1.1 Matrices / 2 1.2 Vectors / 6 1.3 Summation Convention / 11 1.4 Cartesian Tensors / 12 1.5 Polar Decomposition Theorem / 21 1.6 D’Alembert’s Principle / 23 1.7 Virtual Work Principle / 29 1.8 Approximation Methods / 32 1.9 Discrete Equations / 34 1.10 Momentum, Work, and Energy / 37 1.11 Parameter Change and Coordinate Transformation / 39 Problems / 43 2 KINEMATICS 47 2.1 Motion Description / 48 2.2 Strain Components / 55 2.3 Other Deformation Measures / 60 2.4 Decomposition of Displacement / 62 2.5 Velocity and Acceleration / 64 2.6 Coordinate Transformation / 68 2.7 Objectivity / 74 2.8 Change of Volume and Area / 77 2.9 Continuity Equation / 81 2.10 Reynolds’ Transport Theorem / 82 2.11 Examples of Deformation / 84 2.12 Important Geometry Concepts / 92 Problems / 94 3 FORCES AND STRESSES 97 3.1 Equilibrium of Forces / 97 3.2 Transformation of Stresses / 100 3.3 Equations of Equilibrium / 100 3.4 Symmetry of the cauchy Stress Tensor / 102 3.5 Virtual Work of the Forces / 103 3.6 Deviatoric Stresses / 113 3.7 Stress Objectivity / 115 3.8 Energy Balance / 119 Problems / 120 4 CONSTITUTIVE EQUATIONS 123 4.1 Generalized Hooke’s Law / 124 4.2 Anisotropic Linearly Elastic Materials / 126 4.3 Material Symmetry / 127 4.4 Homogeneous Isotropic Material / 129 4.5 Principal Strain Invariants / 136 4.6 Special Material Models for Large Deformations / 137 4.7 Linear Viscoelasticity / 141 4.8 Nonlinear Viscoelasticity / 155 4.9 A Simple Viscoelastic Model for Isotropic Materials / 161 4.10 Fluid Constitutive Equations / 162 4.11 Navier–Stokes Equations / 164 Problems / 164 5 FINITE ELEMENT FORMULATION: LARGE-DEFORMATION, LARGE-ROTATION PROBLEM 167 5.1 Displacement Field / 169 5.2 Element Connectivity / 176 5.3 Inertia and Elastic Forces / 178 5.4 Equations of Motion / 180 5.5 Numerical Evaluation of The Elastic Forces / 188 5.6 Finite Elements and Geometry / 193 5.7 Two-Dimensional Euler–Bernoulli Beam Element / 199 5.8 Two-Dimensional Shear Deformable Beam Element / 203 5.9 Three-Dimensional Cable Element / 205 5.10 Three-Dimensional Beam Element / 206 5.11 Thin-Plate Element / 208 5.12 Higher-Order Plate Element / 210 5.13 Brick Element / 211 5.14 Element Performance / 212 5.15 Other Finite Element Formulations / 216 5.16 Updated Lagrangian and Eulerian Formulations / 218 5.17 Concluding Remarks / 221 Problems / 223 6 FINITE ELEMENT FORMULATION: SMALL-DEFORMATION, LARGE-ROTATION PROBLEM 225 6.1 Background / 226 6.2 Rotation and Angular Velocity / 229 6.3 Floating Frame of Reference (FFR) / 234 6.4 Intermediate Element Coordinate System / 236 6.5 Connectivity and Reference Conditions / 238 6.6 Kinematic Equations / 243 6.7 Formulation of The Inertia Forces / 245 6.8 Elastic Forces / 248 6.9 Equations of Motion / 250 6.10 Coordinate Reduction / 251 6.11 Integration of Finite Element and Multibody System Algorithms / 253 Problems / 258 7 COMPUTATIONAL GEOMETRY AND FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS 261 7.1 Geometry and Finite Element Method / 262 7.2 ANCF Geometry / 264 7.3 Bezier Geometry / 266 7.4 B-Spline Curve Representation / 267 7.5 Conversion of B-Spline Geometry to ANCF Geometry / 271 7.6 ANCF and B-Spline Surfaces / 273 7.7 Structural and Nonstructural Discontinuities / 275 8 PLASTICITY FORMULATIONS 279 8.1 One-Dimensional Problem / 281 8.2 Loading and Unloading Conditions / 282 8.3 Solution of the Plasticity Equations / 283 8.4 Generalization of The Plasticity Theory: Small Strains / 291 8.5 J2 Flow Theory with Isotropic/Kinematic Hardening / 298 8.6 Nonlinear Formulation for Hyperelastic–Plastic Materials / 312 8.7 Hyperelastic–Plastic J2 FLOW THEORY / 322 Problems / 326 REFERENCES 329 INDEX 339

Read more less

Book SynopsisWhen installed and operated properly, general purpose steam turbines are reliable and tend to be forgotten, i.e., out of sound and out of mind. But, they can be sleeping giants that can result in major headaches if ignored. Three real steam turbine undesirable consequences that immediately come to mind are: Injury and secondary damage due to an overspeed failure. Anoverspeed failureon a big steam or gas turbine is one of the most frightening of industrial accidents. The high cost of an extensive overhaul due to an undetected component failure. A major steam turbine repair can cost ten or more times that of a garden variety centrifugal pump repair. Costly production loses due an extended outage if the driven pump or compressor train is unspared. The value of lost production can quickly exceed repair costs. A major goal of this book is to provide readers with detailed operating procedure aimed at reducing these risks to minimal levels. StarTable of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgements xix 1 Introduction to Steam Turbines 1 1.1 Why Do We Use Steam Turbines? 1 1.2 How Steam Turbines Work 2 1.2.1 Steam Generation 5 1.2.2 Waste Heat Utilization 5 1.2.3 The Rankine Cycle 7 1.3 Properties of Steam 8 1.3.1 Turbine Design Confi gurations 11 1.4 Steam and Water Requirements 13 1.4.1 Steam Conditions for Steam Turbines 13 1.4.2 Water Conditions for Steam Turbines 13 1.4.3 Advantages of Steam Turbine Drives 14 1.4.4 Speed Control 16 1.4.5 Turbine Overspeed Protection 17 Questions 18 Answers 19 2 General Purpose Back Pressure Steam Turbine 21 2.1 Single-Stage Back Pressure Steam Turbine 22 2.1.1 Steam Flow Path 23 2.2 Mechanical Components in General Purpose Back Pressure Steam Turbines 31 2.2.1 Radial and Th rust Bearings 31 2.2.2 Bearing Lubrication 33 2.2.3 Force Lubrication Systems 37 2.2.4 Lubrication 38 2.2.5 Bering Housing Seals 40 2.2.6 Lip Seals 41 2.2.7 Labyrinth Seals 42 2.2.8 Steam Packing Rings and Seals 44 Questions 48 Answers 49 3 Routine Steam Turbine Inspections 51 Questions 56 Answers 56 4 Steam Turbine Speed Controls and Safety Systems 59 4.1 Introduction 59 4.2 Speed Controls 60 4.3 Governor Classes 68 4.4 Overspeed Trip System 77 4.5 Overpressure Protection 81 4.6 Additional Advice 83 Questions 83 Answers 84 5 The Importance of Operating Procedures 85 5.1 Steam Turbine Start-up Risks 87 5.2 Starting Centrifugal Pumps and Compressors 91 5.3 Steam Turbine Train Procedures 93 5.4 Training Options 95 Questions 97 Answers 98 6 Overspeed Trip Testing 101 6.1 Overspeed Trip Pre-test Checks 104 6.2 Uncoupled Overspeed Trip Test Procedure 106 6.3 Acceptance Criteria for Overspeed Trip Test 110 Questions 113 Answers 114 7 Centrifugal Pump and Centrifugal Compressor Start-ups with a Steam Turbine Driver 115 7.1 Centrifugal Pump and Steam Turbine Start-up 117 7.2 Centrifugal Compressor and Steam Turbine Start-up 125 Questions 134 Answers 134 8 Centrifugal Pump and Centrifugal Compressor Shutdowns with a Steam Turbine Driver 137 8.1 Centrifugal Pump Steam Turbine Shutdown 139 8.2 Centrifugal Compressor Steam Turbine Shutdown 141 Questions 144 Answers 145 9 Installation, Commissioning and First Solo Run 147 9.1 Introduction 147 9.2 Equipment Installation 148 9.2.1 Foundations 148 9.2.2 Grouting 150 9.2.3 Piping 157 9.3 Commissioning 160 9.3.1 Steam Blowing 162 9.3.2 Strainers 165 9.3.3 Lubrication 167 9.3.4 Oil Sump Lubrication 167 9.3.5 Flushing Pressure Lubricated System 169 9.3.6 Hydraulic Governors 172 9.4 Turbine First Solo Run on Site 174 9.4.1 First Solo Run Pre-checks 175 9.4.2 Steam Turbine First Solo Run Procedure 179 Questions 186 Answers 187 10 Reinstating Steam Turbine after Maintenance 189 10.1 Turbine Reinstatment after Maintenance 189 10.2 Reinstatement after Maintenance Check List 190 10.3 Steam Turbine Reinstatement after Maintenance Procedure 194 Questions 201 Answers 202 11 Steam Turbine Reliability 205 11.1 Repairs versus Overhauls 205 11.2 Expected Lifetimes of Steam Turbines and Their Components 206 11.3 Common Failure Modes 207 11.4 Improvement Reliability by Design 211 Questions 214 Answers 215 12 Introduction to Field Troubleshooting 217 12.1 Common Symptoms 219 12.2 Common Potential Causes 219 12.3 Troubleshooting Example #1 222 12.4 Troubleshooting Example #2 223 12.5 Steam Turbine Troubleshooting Table 225 12.6 Other Troubleshooting Approaches 229 Questions 231 Answers 232 13 Steam Turbine Monitoring Advice 235 13.1 What Is the Steam Turbine Speed Telling You? 236 13.1.1 Is the Steam Turbine Running at the Correct Speed? 236 13.1.2 Is the Speed Steady? 237 13.1.3 Is a Speed Swing Acceptable? 237 13.2 Assessing Steam Turbine Vibrations 238 13.2.1 What is Normal? 238 13.2.2 What are Some Causes of Vibration in Steam Turbines? 239 13.3 Steam Turbine Temperature Assessments 243 13.3.1 Bearing Temperatures 243 13.3.2 Oil Temperatures 243 13.4 Common Governor Control Problems 244 13.4.1 Steam Turbine Loss of Power 245 13.4.2 Steam Turbine Sealing 245 13.4.3 Oil Analysis as it Applies to Steam Turbines 247 13.4.4 Formation of Sludge and Varnish 248 13.4.5 Steam Piping and Supports 249 13.4.6 Steam Turbine Supports 250 13.4.7 Overspeed Trip Systems 251 13.5 Other Inspections 252 13.6 Good Rules of Th umb for Steam Turbines 253 Questions 255 Answers 256 14 Beyond Start-ups, Shutdowns, and Inspections 257 Appendix A: An Introduction to Steam Turbine Selection 261 Appendix B: Glossary of Steam Turbine Terms 289 Appendix C: Predictive and Preventative Maintenance Activities 299 Appendix D: Properties of Saturated Steam 301 Index 305

Read more less

Book SynopsisApplications of mathematical heat transfer and fluid flow models in engineering and medicine Abram S.Table of ContentsSeries Preface xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xxvii About the Author xxix Nomenclature xxxi Part I APPLICATIONS IN CONJUGATE HEAT TRANSFER Introduction 1 When and why Conjugate Procedure is Essential 1 A Core of Conjugation 3 1 Universal Functions for Nonisothermal and Conjugate Heat Transfer 5 1.1 Formulation of Conjugate Heat Transfer Problem 5 1.2 Methods of Conjugation 9 1.2.1 Numerical Methods 9 1.2.2 Using Universal Functions 10 1.3 Integral Universal Function (Duhamel’s Integral) 10 1.3.1 Duhamel’s Integral Derivation 10 1.3.2 Influence Function 12 1.4 Differential Universal Function (Series of Derivatives) 13 1.5 General Forms of Universal Function 15 Exercises 1.1–1.32 16 1.6 Coefficients gk and Exponents C1 and C2 for Laminar Flow 19 1.6.1 Features of Coefficients gk of the Differential Universal Function 19 1.6.2 Estimation of Exponents C1 and C2 for Integral Universal Function 22 1.7 Universal Functions for Turbulent Flow 24 Exercises 1.33–1.47 27 1.8 Universal Functions for Compressible Low 28 1.9 Universal Functions for Power-Law Non-Newtonian Fluids 29 1.10 Universal Functions for Moving Continuous Sheet 32 1.11 Universal Functions for a Plate with Arbitrary Unsteady Temperature Distribution 34 1.12 Universal Functions for an Axisymmetric Body 35 1.13 Inverse Universal Function 36 1.13.1 Differential Inverse Universal Function 36 1.13.2 Integral Inverse Universal Function 37 1.14 Universal Function for Recovery Factor 38 Exercises 1.48–1.75 41 2 Application of Universal Functions 45 2.1 The Rate of Conjugate Heat Transfer Intensity 45 2.1.1 Effect of Temperature Head Distribution 45 2.1.2 Effect of Turbulence 50 2.1.3 Effect of Time-Variable Temperature Head 58 2.1.4 Effects of Conditions and Parameters in the Inverse Problems 60 2.1.5 Effect of Non-Newtonian Power-Law Rheology Fluid Behavior 66 2.1.6 Effect of Mechanical Energy Dissipation 67 2.1.7 Effect of Biot Number as a Measure of Problem Conjugation 68 Exercises 2.1–2.33 70 2.2 The General Convective Boundary Conditions 73 2.2.1 Accuracy of Boundary Condition of the Third Kind 73 2.2.2 Conjugate Problem as an Equivalent Conduction Problem 76 2.3 The Gradient Analogy 78 2.4 Heat Flux Inversion 82 2.5 Zero Heat Transfer Surfaces 84 2.6 Optimization in Heat Transfer Problems 86 2.6.1 Problem Formulation 87 2.6.2 Problem Formulation 89 2.6.3 Problem Formulation 92 Exercises 2.34–2.82 95 3 Application of Conjugate Heat Transfer Models in External and Internal Flows 102 3.1 External Flows 102 3.1.1 Conjugate Heat Transfer in Flows Past Thin Plates 102 Exercises 3.1–3.38 123 3.1.2 Conjugate Heat Transfer in Flows Past Bodies 126 3.2 Internal Flows-Conjugate Heat Transfer in Pipes and Channels Flows 141 4 Specific Applications of Conjugate Heat Transfer Models 155 4.1 Heat Exchangers and Finned Surfaces 155 4.1.1 Heat Exchange Between Two Fluids Separated by a Wall (Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient) 155 4.1.2 Applicability of One-Dimensional Models and Two-Dimensional Effects 166 4.1.3 Heat Exchanger Models 170 4.1.4 Finned Surfaces 175 4.2 Thermal Treatment and Cooling Systems 180 4.2.1 Treatment of Continuous Materials 180 4.2.2 Cooling Systems 185 4.3 Simulation of Industrial Processes 196 4.4 Technology Processes 202 4.4.1 Heat and Mass Transfer in Multiphase Processes 202 4.4.2 Drying and Food Processing 208 Summary of Part I 219 Effect of Conjugation 219 Part II APPLICATIONS IN FLUID FLOW 5 Two Advanced Methods 225 5.1 Conjugate Models of Peristaltic Flow 225 5.1.1 Model Formulation 225 5.1.2 The First Investigations 228 5.1.3 Semi-Conjugate Solutions 230 Exercises 5.1–5.19 236 5.1.4 Conjugate Solutions 237 Exercises 5.20–5.31 243 5.2 Methods of Turbulence Simulation 244 5.2.1 Introduction 244 5.2.2 Direct Numerical Simulation 244 5.2.3 Large Eddy Simulation 245 5.2.4 Detached Eddy Simulation 247 5.2.5 Chaos Theory 249 Exercises 5.32–5.44 249 6 Applications of Fluid Flow Modern Models 251 6.1 Applications of Fluid Flow Models in Biology and Medicine 251 6.1.1 Blood Flow in Normal and Pathologic Vessels 251 6.1.2 Abnormal Flows in Disordered Human Organs 261 6.1.3 Simulation of Biological Transport Processes 267 6.2 Application of Fluid Flow Models in Engineering 273 6.2.1 Application of Peristaltic Flow Models 273 6.2.2 Applications of Direct Simulation of Turbulence 278 Part III FOUNDATIONS OF FLUID FLOW AND HEAT TRANSFER 7 Laminar Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer 295 7.1 Navier-Stokes, Energy, and Mass Transfer Equations 295 7.1.1 Two Types of Transport Mechanism: Analogy Between Transfer Processes 295 7.1.2 Different Forms of Navier-Stokes, Energy, and Diffusion Equations 297 7.2 Initial and Boundary Counditions 302 7.3 Exact Solutions of Navier-Stokes and Energy Equations 303 7.3.1 Two Stokes Problems 303 7.3.2 Steady Flow in Channels and in a Circular Tube 304 7.3.3 Stagnation Point Flow (Hiemenz Flow) 304 7.3.4 Couette Flow in a Channel with Heated Walls 306 7.3.5 Adiabatic Wall Temperature 306 7.3.6 Temperature Distributions in Channels and in a Tube 306 7.4 Cases of Small and Large Reynolds and Peclet Numbers 307 7.4.1 Creeping Approximation (Small Reynolds and Peclet Numbers) 307 7.4.2 Stokes Flow Past Sphere 308 7.4.3 Oseen’s Approximation 308 7.4.4 Boundary Layer Approximation (Large Reynolds and Peclet Numbers) 309 7.5 Exact Solutions of Boundary Layer Equations 315 7.5.1 Flow and Heat Transfer on Isothermal Semi-infinite Flat Plate 315 7.5.2 Self-Similar Flows of Dynamic and Thermal Boundary Layers 319 7.6 Approximate Karman-Pohlhausen Integral Method 320 7.6.1 Approximate Friction and Heat Transfer on a Flat Plate 320 7.6.2 Flows with Pressure Gradients 322 7.7 Limiting Cases of Prandtl Number 323 7.8 Natural Convection 324 8 Turbulent Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer 327 8.1 Transition from Laminar to Turbulent Flow 327 8.2 Reynolds Averaged Navier-Stokes Equation (RANS) 328 8.2.1 Some Physical Aspects 328 8.2.2 Reynolds Averaging 329 8.2.3 Reynolds Equations and Reynolds Stresses 330 8.3 Algebraic Models 331 8.3.1 Prandtl’s Mixing-Length Hypothesis 331 8.3.2 Modern Structure of Velocity Profile in Turbulent Boundary Layer 332 8.3.3 Mellor-Gibson Model 334 8.3.4 Cebeci-Smith Model 335 8.3.5 Baldwin-Lomax Model 336 8.3.6 Application of the Algebraic Models 337 8.3.7 The 1/2 Equation Model 338 8.3.8 Applicability of the Algebraic Models 339 8.4 One-Equation and Two-Equations Models 339 8.4.1 Turbulence Kinetic Energy Equation 340 8.4.2 One-Equation Models 340 8.4.3 Two-Equation Models 341 8.4.4 Applicability of the One-Equation and Two-Equation Models 343 9 Analytical and Numerical Methods in Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer 344 Analytical Methods 344 9.1 Solutions Using Error Functions 344 9.2 Method of Separation Variables 345 9.2.1 General Approach, Homogeneous, and Inhomogeneous Problems 346 9.2.2 One-Dimensional Unsteady Problems 347 9.2.3 Orthogonal Eigenfunctions 348 9.2.4 Two-Dimensional Steady Problems 351 9.3 Integral Transforms 353 9.3.1 Fourier Transform 353 9.3.2 Laplace Transform 356 9.4 Green’s Function Method 358 Numerical Methods 361 9.5 What Method is Proper? 361 9.6 Approximate Methods for Solving Differential Equations 363 9.7 Computing Flow and Heat Transfer Characteristics 368 9.7.1 Control-Volume Finite-Difference Method 368 9.7.2 Control-Volume Finite-Element Method 371 10 Conclusion 373 References 376 Author Index 397 Subject Index 409

Read more less